X^yvtXft^W^t*- rnan ,3irtmtt J Bruce S. Collins, D.O. COLLEGE OF OSTEOPATHIC PHYSICIANS AND SURGEONS LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA FIG. 1. Radiograph of a lesion of the second dorsal vertebra. Note the approximation of the left transverse processes of the first and second dorsal vertebrae. Case of exophthalmic goitre following traumatic strain in this spinal area. Recovery. By DAIN L. TASKER, D. O. MEMBER OF THE FACULTY OF THE PACIFIC COLLEGE OF OSTEOPATHY 1898-1907 FELLOW OF THE SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES PRESIDENT OF THE CALIFORNIA STATE BOARD OF OSTEOPATHIC EXAMINERS 1901-1902 PRESIDENT OF THE CALIFORNIA STATE BOARD OF MEDICAL EXAMINERS 1910-1911 MEMBER OF THE AMERICAN OSTEOPATHIC ASSOCIATION Fourth TLdition Illustrated PUBLISHED BY BIRELEY & ELSON PRINTING CO. LOS ANGELES, CAL. COPYRIGHTED 1916 BY THE AUTHOR, DAIN L. TASKER, D.O. LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA. PREFACE. This book on the Principles of Osteopathy is intended as a manual for the use of students and practitioners. There has been no effort on the part of the author to do more than give a short, terse exposition of the essential facts underlying osteopathy. Realizing fully the great effort required to keep pace with the rapid progress of medicine in general, we have tried to include in our chap- ters only that which will be solid food for our readers. We have long since learned that the hurried student and busy practitioner have no time to read long dissertations on any subject. Time is an essential factor in covering the necessary studies of an osteopathic curriculum. In order that the student may read these chapters intelligently he must have concluded at least ten months study of Biology, Histology, Anatomy and Physiology. These subjects form the basis of the science of osteopathy. The author has kept in touch with the growth of osteo- pathy from year to year through careful perusal of its pub- lished books and periodicals. The contents of this book are the condensed results of the author's study of recognized medical text books on Anatomy, Physiology, Histology, Pathology, Bacteriology and Diagnosis, of the works of the founder of Osteopathy, Dr. A. T. Still, Hazzard, Riggs, Henry and McConnell ; of six years' experience in the clinics of the Pacific School of Osteopathy, and the Infirmary in connection with this college, and six years of continuous teaching, two of which were devoted to Anatomy and Physiology and the remain- 8 PREFACE ing four to Theory and Practice of Osteopathy and Physi- cal Diagnosis. To enumerate the books from whose pages facts have been gleaned for corroborative testimony concerning the Principles of Osteopathy is impossible. Books have been read and laid aside and what is here written may be the result of something which caught the author's attention for a moment only and then became a maverick. The illustrations to elucidate the text have been fur- nished principally by the laboratories and clinics of the Pacific School of Osteopathy. Without the hearty and efficient aid of my associates on the faculty of this college much of the concise detail of this book would have been impossible. I am indebted to several osteopathic physi- cians for drawings of histological tissues which they had prepared during their college work. They are given credit under their drawings. The large number of excellent photographs of micro- scopic structures, patients and movements is the result of the skill of J. O. Hunt, D. O. A few of the photographs were made by M. E. Sperry, D. O., who also took great care to see that we had the best of photographic lenses with which to work. I am also greatly indebted to C. H. Phinney, D. O., and J. E. Stuart, D. O., for their accurate demonstration of osteopathic movements. My thanks are extended to Miss Louisa Burns, B. S., for reading the manuscript and suggesting corrections therein, also to Miss Gertrude Smith for preparing the manuscript for the publisher. DAIN L. TASKER, D. O. PREFACE 9 PREFACE TO THIRD EDITION. A long. time has elapsed since the second edition of this book was sold out. The present edition is, in reality, a new book instead of what is ordinarily understood as a revision. The material which was developed for the first and second editions was entirely destroyed by the dyna- mite explosion and fire which wrecked the great estab- lishment of the Los Angeles Times and killed more than a score of its employees. The demand for this book having grown steadily more insistent and the more important fact that, during the time since the publication of the second edition, there has been a great development in every phase of osteopathic teaching and practice, has led us to attempt to produce an edition of Principles of Osteopathy which will be even more useful to students and practitioners than our former editions. The experimental work done in the laboratories of our colleges and of private investigators, as well as the recorded experiences of our practitioners, tend more and more to substantiate the Principles of Osteopathy as set forth in our previous editions. The feeling that this book will furnish genuine assistance in the teaching and prac- tice of osteopathy leads the author to send it forth, with the belief that its imperfections will be kindly excused by its readers, in view of the spirit of generous helpfulness toward all schools of medicine which has been made the reason for its existence. Nearly every chapter is in some degree changed or completely rewritten. Several new chapters, of practical value, have been added. Much of the material in early chapters of the former editions, relating to histology, has been eliminated. The writer wishes to express his gratitude to John Comstock for his valuable assistance in illustrating this edition. TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER I Causes of Disease Normal and Abnormal The Ideal Normal Variations in Structure and Function -Adaptation Normal Health Comfort and Efficiency Variation of the Normal Distress and Ineffi- ciency Difference in Belief as to Causes Interpretation of Phenomena of Disease Favorable Reaction to Environment Known Causes of Disease The Tenacity of Life Lesion- Disease Association Remove the Cause of Disease Preven- tative Medicine Symptoms A Normal Stimulus A Change of Resistance Cause and Effect Cell Relations Excessive Stimulation Structural Defects Cell Life Dependent on Cir- culation Intercellular Tension Scientific Therapeutics The Problem as a Whole Natural Recovery Extrinsic Causes of Disease Inherent Recuperative Power Disturbed Tissue Re- lations The Biological Relation of Function and Structure The True Art of Healing. CHAPTER II The Lesion as a Cause 40 Definition Characteristics of a Lesion Classes of Lesions Causes of Lesions Secondary Lesions Effect of Violence or Fatigue Failure of Adaptation Chemical Causes of Spinal Lesions The Reason for the Persistance of a Lesion The Sequence of Lesion Phenomena Variations in Development Palpation of a Lesion Description Find the Lesion Inspec- tion of the Back Palpation of Vertebral Structures History of Accident Traumatic Lesion Weight Carrying and Balanc- ing Function Disturbed Lack of Physiological Rest Influence on Circulation and Innervation Segmental Co-ordination Example of Fatigue Loss of Muscular Tone Experimental Lesions Loss of Motion Necessity for Study of Structure. CHAPTER III The Lesion as an Effect 55 Analysis of the Causes of Lesions The Attractiveness of the Traumatic Lesion Theory Classification of Lesions Examples of Secondary Lesions The Spinal Lesion, an Objective Symp- tom Visceral Reflexes -Pleurisy Cardiac Lesion Patterns Unity of the Body. CHAPTER IV Spinal Hyperaesthesia and Muscular Tension 59 Subjective Symptoms Irritation of the Spinal Nerves Spinal Treatment Control of the Body by the Nervous System A Concept of the Nervous System Neuralgia Visceral Disturb- ance Due to Disturbed Nerve Control Co-existence of Spinal TABLE OF CONTENTS 11 Tenderness Symptoms of Spinal Irritation Duration of Affec- tions Due to Spinal Irritation Affection of the Upper Cervical Region Irritation of the Lower Cervical Region Irritation of the Upper Dorsal Region Irritation of the Lower Dorsal Region Irritation of the Lumbar and Sacral Regions The Effect of Recumbency Irritation of Spinal Marrow Not Neces- sarily Dependent on Disease of Vertebrae lateral Curvature Treatment Ganglia of the Sympathetic Nerves Symptoms of Irritation of Sympathetic Ganglia Middle and Lower Tho- racic Sympathetic Ganglia Spinal Treatment, Hyperaemia Muscular Tension Digital Examination of the Spinal Area The Use of Spinal Muscular Tension in Diagnosis Cause or Effect. CHAPTER V The Segmentation of the Body 76 The Lesion as a Guide in Diagnosis The Spinal Segment Injury of a Single Nerve A Unilateral Cervical Spinal Lesion Treatment Involvement of the Central Nerve Cells Cervical Muscles Embryology Segmentation Widespread Influence of a Spinal Lesion Association of Muscles Innervated by the Same Segment Effect of Sectioning Single Spinal Nerve Developmental Changes in Muscles. CHAPTER VI The Nervous System 97 The Medium of Communication The Attributes of Nerve Tis- sue Nerve and Muscle Irritability Conductivity Trophicity Unity of the Nervous System Other Systems of Integration Mechanical Irritation Effect on Conductivity Afferent and Efferent Fibres Organization of the Nerve Bundle Intra- spinal Fibers Segmentation of the Spinal Cord Segmental In- tegration Ceaseless Play of Reflexes The Simple Reflex The Sensory Side of the Reflex Arc Protective Reactions Exam- ple Comparative Segmentation Efferent Impulses Efferent Fibers to the Sympathetic Ganglia Ganglionic Control Three Fields for Reception of Sensory Impressions Proprio-ceptive Field Segmental Co-ordination Plurisegmental Control Clinical Evidence, Group Lesions Differentiation of Spinal Lesions Lesions Due to Functional Fatigue. CHAPTER VII The Nervous System (Continued) 114 Alignment, Tone, Reflexes Clinical Illustration Inspection Patellar Tendon Reflex Gastric Spinal Reflex Sensation Visceral Sensation Dependence on Objective Symptoms Depth and Extent of Lesions Lesion Picture in Autotoxemia Lesions Independent of Segmental Reflexes The Lesion as an Expression of Some Form of Integration Circulatory Inte- gration Lesion Protective Reactions Pains Incident to Chill and Fever The Practical Use of Knowledge. CHAPTER VIII The Sympathetic Nervous System 125 Unity of the Nervous System Origin Lateral Ganglia Four Prevertebral Plexuses Visceral Ganglia Communicating Fibers White Rami-communicantes Distribution Function 12 TABLE OF CONTENTS Gray Rami-communicantes Distribution Functions of the Sympathetic System Independent or Dependent Ganglia Cervical Ganglia of Importance to Osteopaths Superior Cervi- cal Ganglion Connections Vaso-constriction Distribution Headache Middle Cervical Ganglion Distribution Function Manipulation Recapitulation The Thoracic Ganglia Rami- efferentes Upper Five Thoracic Ganglia Nerve Distribution The Interscapular Region A Case Illustrating the Ciliospinal Center Effects of Treatment, First to Seventh Dorsal Great Splanchnic Lesser Splanchnic Least Splanchnic Functions Theory Lumbar Ganglia Sacral Ganglia Distribution Function Cardiac Plexus Position and Formation Pulmo- nary Plexus Physiology Functions Treatment Results Argument Solar Plexus Location and Formation Distribu- tion Function Centers Hypogastric Plexus Location and Formation Pelvic Plexus Distribution Subsidiary Plexuses Function Summary Automatic Visceral Ganglia Conclu- CHAPTER IX Circulatory Tissue 149 Functions Lymph Distribution of the Blood The Circulatory Apparatus The Heart Regulation of Contraction Co-ordi- nating Centers The Pneumogastric Nerve Accelerator Cen- ter Stimulation of the Heart Inhibition of the Heart Vaso- motor Control of the Coronary Arteries Angina Pectoris Action of the Heart Centers Vaso-motor Nerves Vaso-con- striction Vaso-dilation Summary Sensory Nerves Capillary Circulation Recapitulation Vaso-motor Centers Conclusions Hyperaemia Therapeutics Case Illustrations. CHAPTER X Hilton's Law 181 The Law Stated Methods of Studying Anatomy Example of Hilton's Law The Knee Object of such a Distribution Uni- formity of the Law Precision of Nerve Distribution to Muscles Indications for the Use of Therapeutics The Use of Hil- ton's Law in Physical Diagnosis Comparison of Methods Herpes Zoster The Distribution of an Intercostal Nerve Some of the Evil Effects of Rest Head's Law Application of the Law The Viscera Nerves of Conscious Sensation. CHAPTER XI Osteopathic Centers 194 Diagnosis First Four Cervical Nerves Example of Hilton's Law The Pneumogastric Nerve The Hypoglossal Nerve Superior Cervical Ganglion Suboccipital Triangles Cervical Plexus Intensity of Reflexes The Spinal Accessory The Phrenic Nerve, Hiccoughs The Trapezius and Splenius Capitis et Colli Muscles Vaso-motion, Head, Face and Neck Affec- tions of the Cervical Nerves Brachial Plexus Affections of the Brachial Nerves A Case of Hemiparesis below the Fifth Cer- vical Vertebra Subluxation of the Scapula The Nerve of Wrisberg The Interscapular Region The Lung Center Cilio- spinal Center Heart Center Stomach Center Liver and Spleen Center Large Intestine Small Intestine Center for Chills The Language of Pain Osteopathic view of Pathology TABLE OF CONTENTS 13 Center for the Gall-bladder Intestines Uterus Ovaries and Testes Kidney Second Lumbar Paraplegia Lumbar and Sacral Plexuses The Bladder Sphincter Vaginae Conclu- sions. CHAPTER XII The Back 239 The Spinal Column The Spinal Ligaments Flexibility Nor- mal Spinal Curves Limitation of Flexibility Articular Pro- cesses Cervical Region Dorsal Region Lumbar Region Flexion and Extension Side Bending Rotation Best Position for Freest Movement Rotation in the Dorsal Region Char- acteristic Movement in the Lumbar Region Rotation Toward Concavity of a Curve Adaptability of Position to Body Weight. CHAPTER XIII The Pelvis 263 The Fifth Lumbar Loss vs. Exaggeration of Normal Curves Motion in Lumbo-sacral Articulation Adaptation in Lumbo- sacral Articulation Stability of the Lumbo-sacral Articulation Decompensation of the Lumbro-sacral Articulation Part of the Pelvis Characteristics of the Sacro-iliac Articulation Phys- iological Relaxation The Male Pelvis Loss of Stability - Analysis of Sacro-iliac Articulations Relation of Sex to Sacro- iliac Lesions Inherent Weakness in the Character of the Struc- ture Causes of Subluxations Rotation Compensatory Pelvic Tilt Classes of Cases Symptoms Plan of Treatment. CHAPTER XIV Subluxations 283 Definition Characteristics of Subluxations Primary or Sec- ondary Lesions The Characteristic Structure of Joints The Atlas Occipito-atlantal Articulation The Causes of Subluxa- tions Normal Relations of the Atlas Abnormal Positions of the Atlas The Effect of Muscle Contraction The Effect on Circulation Effect on Superior Cervical Ganglion Atlo-axial Articulation Unequal Development Caries Dislocation Spontaneous Reduction Cervical Vertebrae Disproportion between Cause and Effect Example Unequal Development of Spinous Processes of Cervical Vertebrae Palpation of Dorsal Spinous Processes Normal Dorsal Movements False Lesions Lateral Subluxation Muscular Contraction Comparison of Effects of Muscular Contraction Separation of Spinous Pro- cesses Approximation of Spinous Processes Primary Sub- luxations Secondary Subluxations Limited Area for Lateral Subluxations Lower Dorsal Vertebrae Dorso-lumbar Articu- lation Kyphosis, Lower Dorsal Lumbar Region Examina- tion of the Ribs Costo-central Articulations Costo-transverse Articulations Co-ordination Inco-ordination Nervous Con- trol of Respiration Costal Subluxations First Rib Tenth Rib Eleventh and Twelfth Ribs Effect of Position of Vertebrae on Position of Ribs The Clavicles Summary. CHAPTER XV The Diagnostic Value of Backache 311 Elasticity A Field for Study Objective and Subjective Symp- toms Pain Poise Structural Defects Statics General De- bility Sacro-iliac Subluxation Spinal Rotation Spinal Cur- 14 TABLE OF CONTENTS vature Caries Rigidity Arthropathies Spondylitis Deform- ans Rachitis Malignant Growths Typhoid Spine Lumbago Posture Toxemia Trauma Crick in the Back Involvement of the Spinal Cord Infectious Fevers Referred Visceral Pains Inflammation of Serous Membranes Colicy Pain Summary Plurisegmental Control of Viscera Reflex Subluxations In- tensity of Reaction Location of Reflexes Reflex Patterns. CHAPTER XVI Adaptation and Compensation 332 Definition The Spinal Column Compensatory Curvature The Thorax The Heart Skin and Kidneys Power of En- cysting The Extremities Law The Attitude of Rest. CHAPTER XVII Inhibition 354 Acceleration, Inhibition Muscular Contraction Secretion Acceleration and Inhibition as Attributes of Nerve Tissue In- hibition a Normal Attribute of the Central Nervous System History Arrest of Activity Shock Fatigue Location of In- hibition Muscular Activity Three Characteristics of the Nerv- ous System Development of Inhibition Neurotic Diathesis, Chorea Paralysis Agitans Developing Inhibition by Training Inhibitory Effect of Pressure Dosage Impairment of Function Physiological Activity is the Result of Stimulation Hilton's Law Inhibition, Therapeutic How Vaso-motor Cen- ters Act Over-stimulation Equals Inhibition The Guide for the Use of Inhibition Pathological Changes Which Accom- pany Over-stimulation Rational Treatment Hyperaesthesia of Sensory Areas, Diagnosis Results of Inhibition The Phrase "Remove Lesions" The Human Body is a Vital Mechanism Osteopathic Meaning of Inhibition The Scientific Use of Inhibition Inhibition as a Local Anaesthetic Inhibi- tion to Remove Lesions Inhibition as a Preparatory Treat- ment. CHAPTER XVIII Sounds Produced in Joints 371 Normal Sounds Abnormal Sounds Pathology of Joints Pro- ducing Abnormal Sounds Synovial Adhesions Non-use of a Slightly Sprained Joint Rheumatic Joints Semilunar Carti- lages of the Knee Bone Setting Historical Reference Tar- sal and Carpal Subluxations Enarthrodial and Arthrodial Joints Slow vs. Quick Reduction of a Subluxation Bone- Setter's Phrases Differences of Opinion "Affections of the Spine," Dr. Hood "Crick in the Back" Manipulation of the Neck Manipulation of the Back Treatment of Upper Dorsal Comment Differential Diagnosis Size of the Vertebral Canal Conservative vs. Radical Treatment. CHAPTER XIX Position for Examination 384 Observation Testing Alignment and Flexibility Sense of Touch Inspection Palpation of the Ribs Palpation of the Spine Extrinsic and Intrinsic Muscles of the Back Test Muscular Tension Thoracic Flexibility Examination of the Abdomen Elevation or Depression of the Ribs Examination TABLE OF CONTENTS 15 of the Rectum and Prostate Gland Examination of the Neck The History of Lesions The Extremities Subjective Symp- toms. CHAPTER XX Manipulation 402 Methods of Procedure Relaxation of the Latissimus Dorsi Relaxation of the Trapezius Relaxation of the Rhomboids The Pectoralis Major and Serratus Magnus Quadratus Lum- borum Erector Spinae Treatment of Simple Kyphosis Lor- dosis, Upper Dorsal The Possible Variety of Movements which Will Secure the Same Results The Head and Neck as a Lever Lordosis or Kyphosis May Affect a Function Similarly Splenius Capitis et Colli Kyphosis, Upper Dorsal Kypho- sis, Dorso-lumbar Other Movements New Schools Various Applications of a Principle The Use of a Fulcrum Co-ordi- nation of Corrective Movements Dorsal Rotation Lateral Curvature Know How to Apply Principles Do Not Copy Movements. CHAPTER XXI Reduction of Subluxations 443 Lateral Subluxations Luxations of the Innominate Bones Anterior Rotation of the Ilium Posterior Rotation of the Ilium. CHAPTER XXII Treatment of the Cervical Region 471 To Raise the Clavicle Subluxation of the Clavicle Preparatory Treatment of the Neck, Trapezius Sterno-cleido-mastoid Scaleni Splenius Capitis et Colli Extension Rotation The Hyoid Bone Mylo-hyoid and Hyoglossus Sterno-thyroid and Sterno-hyoid Intrinsic Muscles of the Larynx The Atlas Sixth Cervical General Principle Underlying Corrective Move- ments The Simplest Form of Correction Torsion and Coun- ter Pressure Rigidity The Favorable Position for Corrective Movements. CHAPTER XXIII Extremities 493 Diagnosis Causes of Stiff Joints Ankylosis The Scapulo- humeral Articulation Examination of the Brachial Plexus Reduction of Dislocations by Traction Reduction of Disloca- tions by Leverage Elbow Dislocations The Radius Old Dis- locations Muscles of the Lower Extremity Quadriceps Ex- tensor The Adductor Group Dislocation of the Femur Stretching the Sciatic Nerve The Calf Muscles Scientific Manipulation Saphenous Opening Semilunar Cartilages of the Knee Paralysis of External Popliteal Nerve "Glucokinesis and Mobilisation" Pain in the Legs and Feet Varicose Veins. CHAPTER XXIV Manipulation for Vaso-motor Nerve Effects 522 The Fifth Cranial Nerve Inhibition of Suboccipital. INTRODUCTION. Great strides have been made during the past twenty- five years in the practice of medicine. The relative posi- tions formerly held by drug therapy and surgery have been completely reversed. The concoctions of the pharmo- copoeia, with their vague and uncertain effects upon human tissues and functions, no longer entice the earnest seeker after medical truths to spend a lifetime experimenting with substances which are absolutely foreign to the human body. There was a time, not far away, when that person who treated human diseases by manipulation, water, diet and general hygiene was considered to be the chief of impostors. Go a little farther back in the history of medi- cine and we see surgery dishonored because it was me- chanical, not mystical enough for the ponderous minds whose fort it was to deal with strange substances of the animal, vegetable and mineral kingdoms. During all the years in which drug-therapy flourished there were a few real scientists who devoted time and talents to the structure of our bodies and the function of each part. Discoveries came slowly along these lines be- cause the majority of medical men were concentrating their energies on ferreting out the effects of drugs. Facts in anatomy and physiology which are so patent to us at this time remained obscure for centuries, simply because there was no thought of studying the form and action of tissues, while all nature outside of our own bodies seemed to be a grand laboratory of specifics for human ailments. If osteopathy had been born fifty years ago, it would have died because the popular and scientific minds were not in a condition to receive it. Even the time at which 18 INTRODUCTION it was born, scarcely thirty-five years ago, was hardly ripe for this new departure in medicine. Twenty years easily cover the period of its active history. A Scientific Growth. There is one distinctive point about osteopathy which should be especially emphasized: It is not an empirical system ; nothing is done on the cut and dry plan. It has been developed in a purely scien- tific way. We might observe the action of the human body in health and disease indefinitely without securing any exact data to pass on to the next generation of ob- servers if we fail to know the structure of the body. A physician may learn many things in an empirical way which are very poor assets for science. The strange part of medical history, to the modern investigator, is the fact that discoveries in anatomy and physiology, which are of such vital importance to the suc- cessful treatment of human diseases, were left stored away between the covers of books, not deemed of any value except to whet the mind of the dilletante in medicine. Osteopathy as a distinct system of medicine has grown to its present proportions at a time when the older schools of medicine are making radical changes in their therapeutical procedures, e. g., serum-therapy. In spite of all these so-called scientific advances in drug-therapy, osteopathy has made steady advance into public favor, thereby showing that it is fully able to compete with the older systems of practice. The Founder of Osteopathy. Dr. A. T. Still, of Kirks- ville, Mo., is the honored founder of this system of thera- peutics. His work was in studying the structure of our bodies directly, and thus gaining an accurate knowledge of how bones, ligaments and muscles, blood-vessels, glands and nerves are placed. Then he sought that department of knowledge which we call physiology, and learned how these tissues act in health. Having had previous train- ing in treating diseases by the drug method, he was slow to discard the old method for one which had never been INTRODUCTION 19 tried, even though it had good scientific reasons back of it. But the substitution did take place by degrees until his system of therapeutics no longer depended on the use of drugs. It seems to be a popular idea that it is necessary for the founder of a system to have a creed or statement of belief. We do not doubt but that it is good for us at times to try to put our beliefs in writing, not to form a fixed position, but just as the architect draws many plans to gradually develop his mental pictures. These statements usually contain the truth about our work so far as we know it. We can thus see how far we have advanced and realize that we have much to learn. Dr. Still has, from time to time, expressed the result of his studies, that is, the observed facts upon which he has built his system of therapeutics. In 1874, Dr. Still stated his observations as follows : "A disturbed artery marks the period to an hour, and minute, when disease begins to sow its seeds of destruction in the human body. That in no case could it be done without a broken or sus- pended current of arterial blood which, by nature, is in- tended to supply and nourish all nerves, ligaments, mus- cles, skin, bones and the artery itself. * * * The rule of the artery must be absolute, universal, and unob- structed, or disease will be the result. * * * All nerves depend wholly upon the arterial system for their qualities, such as sensation, nutrition and motion, even though by the law of reciprocity they furnish force, nu- trition and sensation to the artery itself." Definitions. Many definitions have been formulated and published to the world. Each one tends to limit one's conception of osteopathy in some particular. A definition always limits the thing defined, therefore, no definition of osteopathy can be complete, because we are dealing with a principle, the universality of which no one knows. Whereas, less than seven years ago, it was thought that osteopathy was an excellent method of treating 20 INTRODUCTION chronic ailments, we now find osteopaths working day and night at the bedside of the acutely sick. Thus does it spread and become thoroughly recognized as a system applicable to all diseases. In order to bring before the student as full and com- prehensive an idea of the scope of osteopathy as possible, a series of definitions are quoted. These definitions h ive been taken from current osteopathic literature and are credited to their respective authors. One of the short paragraphs in Dr. Still's auto- biography is sufficient to give a clear understanding of his idea of the human body. "The human body is a machine run by the unseen force called life, and that it may be run harmoniously, it is necessary that there be liberty of blood, nerves and arteries from the generating point to des- tination." The following definition is one which has been used in the American School publications for a long time : "Os- teopathy is that science which consists of such exact, ex- haustive and verifiable knowledge of the structures and functions of the human mechanism, anatomical, physio- logical and psychological, including the chemistry and physics of its known elements as has made discoverable certain organic laws and remedial resources, within the body itself, by which nature, under the scientific treatment peculiar to osteopathic practice, apart from all ordinary methods of extraneous, artificial, or medicinal stimulation, and in harmonious accord with its own mechanical prin- ciples, molecular activities, and metabolic processes, may recover from displacements, disorganizations, derange- ments, and consequent disease, and regain its normal equi- librium of form and function in health and strength." Mason W. Pressly, A. B., Ph. D., D. U. "Osteopathy is that science of healing which empha- sizes, (a) the diagnosis of disease by physical methods with a view to discovering not the symptoms but the causes of diseases, in connection with misplacements of tissue, INTRODUCTION 21 obstruction of the fluids and interference with the forces of the organism ; (b) the treatment of diseases by scientific manipulations in connection with which the operating physician mechanically uses and applies the inherent re- sources of the organism to overcome disease and establish health, either by removing or correcting mechanical dis- orders, and thus permitting nature to recuperate the dis- eased part, or by producing and establishing antitoxic and antiseptic conditions to counteract toxic and septic con- ditions of the organism or its parts; (c) the application of mechanical and operative surgery in setting fractured or dislocated bones, repairing lacerations and removing abnormal tissue growths or tissue elements when these become dangerous to the organic life." J. Martin Little- John, LL. D., M. D., D. O. "Osteopathy is a school of mechanical therapeutics based on several theories. 1. Anatomical order of the bones and other structures of the body is productive of physiological order, i. e., ease or health in contradistinc- tion to disease or disorder which is usually due, directly or indirectly, to anatomical disorder. 2. Sluggish organs may be stimulated mechanically by way of appropriate nerves (frequently by utilizing reflexes) or nerve centers. 3. Inhibition of over-active organs may be effected by steady pressure substituted for the mechanical stimulation mentioned above. 4. Removal of causes of faulty action of any part or organ is the keynote of the science." C. M. Case, M. D., D. O. "Osteopathy is that school of medicine whose dis- tinctive method consists in (1) a physical examination to determine the condition of the mechanism and functions of all parts of the human body, and (2) a specific manipu- lation to restore the normal mechanism and re-establish the normal functions. This definition lays stress (1) upon correct diagnosis. The osteopath must know the normal and recognize any departure from it as a possible factor in disease. There is not one fact known to the anatomist 22 INTRODUCTION or physiologist that may not be of vital importance to the scientific osteopath. Hence a correct diagnosis based upon such knowledge is half the battle. Without it scien- tific osteopathy is impossible and the practice is neces- sarily haphazard or merely routine movements. The defi- nition lays stress upon (2) removal of the cause of disease. A deranged mechanism must be corrected by mechanical means specifically applied as the most natural and only direct method of procedure. This work is not done by any of the methods of other schools. After the mechanism has been corrected little remains to be done to restore function, but stimulation or inhibition of certain nerve centers may give temporary relief and aid nature. The adjuvants used by other schools, such as water, diet, exer- cise, surgery, etc., are the common heritage of our profes- sion and should be resorted to by the osteopath if they are indicated." E. R. Booth, Ph. D., D. O., Ex-President A. O. A. "Osteopathy is that science or system of healing which, using every means of diagnosis, with a view to discover- ing, not only the symptoms, but the causes of diseases, seeks, by scientific manipulations of the human body, and other physical means, the correcting and removing of all abnormalities in the physical relations of the cells, tissues and organs of the body, particularly the correcting of mis- placements of organs or parts, the relaxing of contracted tissues, the removing of obstructions to the movements of fluids, the removing of interferences with the trans- mission of nerve impulses, the neutralizing and removing of septic or foreign substances from the body; thereby re- storing normal physiological processes, through the re- establishment of normal chemical and vital relations of the cells, tissues and organs of the body, and resulting in restoration of health, through the automatic stimulation and free operation of the inherent resistant and remedial forces within the body itself." C. M. Turner Hulett, D. O. INTRODUCTION 23 "Osteopathy is that science which reasons on the human system from a mechanical as well as a chemical standpoint, taking into consideration in its diagnosis, heredity, the habits of the patient, past and present; the history of the trouble, including symptoms, falls, strains, injuries, toxic and septic conditions, and especially in every case a physical examination by inspection, palpation, per- cussion, ausculation, etc., to determine all abnormal physi- cal conditions ; the treatment emphasizing scientific manip- ulation to correct mechanical lesions, to stimulate or in- hibit and regulate nerve force and circulatory fluids for the recuperation of any diseased part, using the vital forces within the body; also the habits of the patient are regu- lated as to hygiene, air, food, water, rest, exercises, climate and baths; such means as hydropathy, electricity, massage, antidotes and antiseptics, and suggestion sometimes being used as adjuncts." Chas. C. Reid, D. O. The above definitions have nearly all been taken from the Journal of the American Osteopathic Association. Osteopathic Diagnosis. Physical diagnosis is and al- ways will be the leading factor in the success of osteo- pathic practitioners. This ability to take hold of an ailing human being and detect the disturbing factor in it is the highest attainment of the physician. Osteopathy has de- veloped the art of palpation to a wonderful degree. Bas- ing this art on a definite knowledge of structure and function makes it the chief reliance in diagnosis. Every physical diagnosis begins with palpation and proceeds with ausculation and percussion, and not failing to use chemical and microscopical methods when necessary. The student must learn to use his sense of touch continually, in fact, learn to see with his fingers. Add to this development of touch a training in chemical and microscopical analysis of secretions and excretions of the body, and we have a practitioner thoroughly equipped to make an accurate scientific diagnosis. 24 INTRODUCTION Osteopathic Therapeutics. Osteopathic treatment is based on this kind of physical diagnosis which we have just described. It takes into account the fact that the organism is a self-recuperating mechanism and requires proper food, proper surroundings, and perfect activity of every tissue, especially the blood. Thus we divide treat- ment into three divisions, (1) manipulation for the pur- pose of correcting the mal-position of any tissue, whether that tissue be bone or blood; (2) proper feeding, i. e., dietetics; and (3) proper surroundings, i. e., hygiene. If the condition of the body is such that none of the three methods just mentioned will right the difficulty, i. e., if there are broken bones, ruptured muscles and connec- tive tissues or false growths, we can then use surgical means. Surgery is a part of the Osteopathic system, just as it is of all systems of medicine. The chief assurance lies in the fact that the Osteopathic system is very con- servative as regards the use of the knife. Osteopathy includes all those qualities which make up a successful system ; its diagnosis is accurate and its treatment is comprehensive, including scientific manipula- tions, scientific dietetics, hygiene and surgery. In a recent article in the American Monthly Review ol Reviews, the following sentences appear: "With but few exceptions, the entire vegetable and mineral kingdoms have given us little of specific value ; but still, up to the present day, the bulk of our books on materia medica is made up of a description of many valueless drugs and preparations. Is it not to be deplored that valuable time should be wasted in our student days by cramming into our heads a lot of therapeutic ballast." This is probably the most recent statement of this kind in the public prints. It substantiates the position taken by the Osteopathic colleges. We feel justified in claiming that osteopathy today occupies a position which every other system of medicine must come to sooner or later. It is broad enough and liberal enough to accept INTRODUCTION 25 truth wherever demonstrated. Its foundations being laid in the basic sciences, and its treatment never departing from the facts of these sciences, make it a system of lasting worth and capable of adding an entirely new conception of the phenomena of life to medical literature. The formation of the name osteopathy (from osteon, bone, and pathos, suffering) seems to be as perfect a de- scriptive name as it is possible to form which would cover the basic principle of the science. The bones are the foundation upon which all the soft tissues are laid, and the osteopath makes all his examinations, using them as fixed points from which to explore for faulty arrange- ment. The name does not mean bone disease, but since the osteopath finds many diseases resulting from irritation due to slightly displaced bone, the name is used in the sense of disease caused by bone. We do not consider that all diseases are caused by displaced bone, but it is a cause which has heretofore been overlooked. We recognize that there are many causes of disease, and do not wish to be understood as trying to fit fact to theory, but as a result of observing certain facts, this basic principle of osteo- pathy has been made clear. We believe that health is the natural state, and that this condition is bound to be maintained so long as every cell has an uninterrupted blood supply, and its controlling nerve is undisturbed. Therefore, the first effort of the osteopath is to remove all obstructions to blood and nerve supply, feeling certain that when these obstructions are removed, health will follow. Hilton in his lectures on "Rest and Pain," which are considered medical classics, has expressed himself forcibly on this subject, as follows: "It would be well, I think, if the surgeon would fix upon his memory, as the first professional thought which should accompany him in the course of his daily occupation, this physiological truth that nature has a constant tendency to repair the injuries to which her structures may have been subjected, whether those injuries be the result of 26 INTRODUCTION fatigue or exhaustion, of inflammation or accident. Also, that this reparative power becomes at once most con- spicuous when the disturbing cause has been removed; thus presenting to the consideration of the physician and surgeon a constantly recurring and sound principle for his guidance in his professional practice." Every system of curing human ills which is based on the known facts of anatomy and physiology will last, because it is true. When systems of drug medication are known only as history, osteopathy will be ministering to the human race, because it knows no other path than that which leads to greater truths in physiology and anatomy. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 27 CHAPTER I. CAUSES OF DISEASE. Normal and Abnormal. In order to use the word ab- normal, with reference to the structure and function of living tissues, we must have knowledge of the normal. Normal is a word having, apparently, as many interpretations as the word "beauty," i. e. standards to which these words are applied differ, even as the individuals who use them. In order that we make clear what we conceive as normal and abnormal conditions, it is necessary to call attention to variations in structure and function, which should be recog- nized as not being far enough removed from typical condi- tions to indicate the existence of a need for corrective interference. The Ideal Normal. Our first steps in the acquirement of a medical education are practically all concerned with study of the normal. We dissect bodies which have been changed by disease and therefore we come in contact with abnormality. To counteract this we study descriptive anat- omy and idealize our real knowledge which was obtained by dissection. Ofttimes our ideal has such attributes of perfec- tion that nothing ever comes up to standard and hence ap- pears to us to be defective. This hypercritical attitude leads to exaggeration of the interpretation put upon symptoms and hence leads to misdirected efforts at correction. Variations in Structure and Function. We need there- fore, first of all, a fairly good knowledge of the variations in structure and function which may be recognized as consid- erable departures from type, but still not abnormal in the sense we use that term when speaking of disease. No tissue 28 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY in the body is unyielding and hence will adapt itself to even a very moderate force, if that force is long continued. This is well illustrated by the great changes which can be pro- duced in the alignment of the teeth under corrective bracing. Adaptation. The changes in structure, which are fre- quently recognized, may be evidence of adaptation, i. e. they are the final result of the body's effort to maintain its exis- tence at the highest point of efficiency of which it is capable. With this thought ever in our minds we may safely observe the character of structures and draw more just conclusions as to the existence of normal or abnormal conditions. Normal Health. People usually seek the services of a physician because they suffer some degree of discomfort. True it is that some seek a cosmetic effect, but this may hardly be seriously considered. Normal health means a con- dition wherein we are unconscious of bodily distress and are able to do what is ordinarily counted as our share of work. This state of bodily comfort, under the ordinary stress of labor, is not necessarily based upon symmetry of structural development, i. e. absolute conformity to our ideal of struc- tural perfection. Comfort and Efficiency. Normality from the cradle to the grave seems to be a personal equation, i. e. bodily com- fort under the stress of moderate physical and mental exer- tion. Increase of physical or mental exertion either, through adaptation, produces increased capacity, or, through failure of adaptation, produces destructive changes. Comfort and efficiency are the real attributes of normality. If these are present in average degree there is little likelihood of a physi- cian being consulted. Variation of the Normal. The normal of any individual varies at different periods of life and following accidents or severe illnesses. The physician is frequently consulted with the hope that the normal of later years might be raised to the degree consciously possessed at a former time, or in the hope of being restored to the normal which existed previous to an accident or severe illness. The new normals which PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 29 constitute the result of repair after injury and illness do not measure up to the previous standard in most cases. Con- sciousness of a decrease in efficiency leads many people to the hope of securing an increase by some specific means. Distress and Inefficiency. The physician is constantly dealing with two classes of patients, those who suffer bodily distress, and those who are conscious of bodily inefficiency, in some degree, and hence suffer mental distress. It is allur- ing to sufferers of either class to think there is a specific re- movable cause of their distresses, hence any form of treat- ment, aiming to specifically attack the cause, has a captivat- ing character. Difference in Belief as to Causes. All forms of treat- ment are, at least in fancy, based on the desire to remove the cause of the ailment. The reason there is such wide dis- crepancy in methods is because of differences in belief as to causes. In other words, if all forms of disease were thor- oughly understood, i. e. as to cause as well as manifestations, there would very quickly develop an agreed form of treat- ment. It appears so, but there is another factor to consider. The same disease, due to the same cause, does not manifest itself the same in every individual, therefore the same means used to remove the cause does not bring the same reaction in every individual. This has led to a multiplicity of meth- ods even where the cause is known. It is certainly a great gain to have but one unknown quantity, the vitality of the patient, instead of the two that previously existed, i. e. the cause of the illness and the vitality of the patient. This de- sire to have but one unknown quantity has frequently led to the development of medical dogmas based on a belief in the existence of certain causes of disease. The germ theory and the lesion theory are good present day examples. Both the germs and the lesions are so universally found that both form convenient foundations for dogmatizing. Interpretation of Phenomena of Disease. Although these studies are directly concerned with the phenomena of lesions there is no desire on our part to exalt any group of 30 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY phenomena out of its comparative value with any other group. It is hoped that by presenting, as well as we are able, the lesion theory of disease, we may be able to show paths of convergence leading to a better interpretation of disease phenomena and thus the truths which underlie the lesion theory will not become distorted into fantastic vagaries. We do not wish to be understood as claiming for osteopathy the discovery of the cause of disease. There are many causes, widely divergent in character. Osteopathy brings to your attention a cause, frequently found and of sufficient definiteness to warrant concentrated attention. Favorable Reaction to Environment. Since we are mechanisms of living tissues, our survival depends .upon re- acting favorably to environment. We find the elements, air, light, heat and cold all affect us adversely at times. They become destroyers of bodily comfort and efficiency when intensified. Changes in atmospheric pressure, intensifica- tion of light, increased heat or cold, affect us seriously. Known Causes of Disease. Chemical poisons, such as lead, arsenic, mercury, phosphorus, carbon monoxide and other gases, are causes of profound injury. The organic poisons, alcohol, opium, morphine, cocaine, food poisons, snake venoms, autointoxications, play no small part in caus- ing bodily discomfort and inefficiency. The vegetable or- ganisms, fungi and bacteria claim abundant recognition as causes of disease. Protozoa are properly listed as causes, for have we not the wonderful discoveries concerning ma- larial fever, sleeping sickness, amoebic dysentery and yellow fever; sufficient scientific achievements to startle the world. The fluke, cestode and round worm infections have long been recognized causes of disease. Add to the foregoing all those adverse conditions imposed by the nature of our crowded existence in cities, noise and unrest, surfeit and poverty, fatigue and worry, it is little to be wondered at that we find ourselves searching almost hysterically for some thing to aid us to survive it all. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 31 The Tenacity of Life. It is marvelous how our bodies adapt themselves to all the vicissitudes of environment, sur- vive the effects of inorganic and organic poisons, invasions of bacteria or protozoa, maintain existence in spite of defi- cient food and rest. The tenacity of life in human tissues, the adaptations and compensations that are developed, are worthy the pen of some scientific genius who has the literary ability to make the layman have faith in natural law. Lesion-Disease Association. With all these causes of disease we may well ask ourselves what relation the spinal or other joint lesion has. It would be difficult to find any disease process that does not exhibit a spinal or other joint lesion, in the sense we osteopaths recognize. This coin- cidence of disease and spinal, or other, joint lesion does not necessarily indicate a sequence of events starting in the le- sion. As scientists, rather than special pleaders for a theory, we want to know the significance of this association. It is our aim to devote the pages following to an analysis of this lesion-disease association. We aim to write helpfully, ana- lyzing our failures that we may know our weaknesses, an- alyzing our successes so that we may make our solid prin- ciples more widely recognized. Remove the Cause of Disease. No great amount of analysis of the various causes of disease is required before we realize that to "remove the cause" we must do something more than treat individual members of society. There is a phase of medical practice which requires us to view the good of the community rather than any portion of it. Some lives are sacrificed because we have no cure for the individual. We cure the community, the race, by sacrificing the individ- ual. Public health requires what seems to be cruelty toward the individual from whose disease we must be protected. Preventive Medicine. As fast as causes of certain dis- eases have been demonstrated, plans for prevention take precedence over treatment of the individuals who suffer from those diseases. Thus a new class of physicians is developed, i. e. those trained to cope with the problems of preventive 32 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY medicine rather than meet the exigencies of treating in- dividual patients. It is the necessarily aggressive advance of preventive medicine which arouses antagonism and social discord. No one could successfully contend that all preven- tive methods, thus far enforced, are satisfactory. Then, too, it is not possible to demonstrate quickly to all the members of a community the necessity for certain procedures. Sacri- fice of the individual, be it ever so slight, for the good of the whole, is not agreeable to the victim or his friends. Altho we are developing methods primarily applicable to the in- dividual rather than serving the aggressive purposes of pre- ventive medicine, that which makes the individual an effi- cient member of society subserves public health. Symptoms. Diseases manifest themselves by certain phenomena which are designated as symptoms. Symptoms are abnormal degrees of normal reaction. This is made evi- dent by the fact that some symptoms represent sub- and others supernormal functioning. The supernormal function- ing represents a reaction, on the whole favorable to recovery, whereas the subnormal reaction is not favorable. Since the symptoms represent phases of reaction or non-reaction in tissues, the effort put forth by the body, as a whole, to re- cover, is in proportion to the energy contained in its cells. In a restricted sense the cause of disease is in the cells of the body. They contain the stored energy, i. e ., po- tential energy. When this potential energy is re- leased by some force, or stimulus, we have kinetic energy. Potential energy does not transfer itself spontaneously into kinetic energy without first being affected by some other force, which may be called a stimulus. The amount of po- tential energy converted into kinetic is not proportional to the amount of the stimulus used to initiate the process. All stored energy, i. e., potential energy, requires a certain strength of stimulus to start the process of conversion into kinetic. When this strength of stimulus is known, it is called the normal. There are usually several kinds of stimuli, each one having a varying degree of intensity. For example, the PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 33 potential energy in a muscle fiber will be converted into ki- netic energy as a result of mechanical, thermal, chemical or electrical stimuli. Certain amounts of each of these stimuli are required to initiate the change in the form of energy. A Normal Stimulus. The potential energy in a muscle fiber has a certain degree of resistance to stimuli. A definite amount of any one of the four forms of stimuli named is necessary to cause the muscle fiber to contract. This defi- nite amount, which is capable of stimulating the muscle to an average contraction, is called the normal stimulus, and the action of the muscle is called the normal contraction. If the muscle should contract more vigorously than usual in response to this normal stimulus, the resistance of the po- tential energy of the muscle fiber is below normal. The strength of stimulus and discharge of energy may vary greatly in their proportions within normal limits, but there are well marked lines above or below which resistance is spoken of as above or below normal. A Change of Resistance. When the resistance of the potential energy is below normal, a normal stimulus causes too great an effect, that is, too much potential energy is transferred into kinetic energy. When the resistance of the potential energy is normal, and the stimulus above normal, there also results an excessive discharge of potential energy. Therefore, excessive discharge results from lowered resis- tance, or increase of stimulus. Resistance is a quality of the cell protoplasm. The stimulus is an external force. The cell depends on proper surroundings in order to maintain its resistance to external stimuli, such as bacteria. The strength of bacteria may also be increased or decreased by the nature of their surroundings. Cause and Effect. After potential energy has been changed into kinetic energy, this latter may generate more potential energy, and this also may be converted into kinetic. Thus cause is converted into effect and effect into cause. This is an endless chain. When such a process is beyond the normal, as in the body when varying symptoms present 34 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY themselves, therapeutic efforts must be concentrated on some particular reflex in order to break the chain. Cell Relations. The relations of a cell with its fellows, that is, its structural relations, are the basis upon which its resistance, in large measure, depends. Therefore, anything which disarranges its normal relations will, in all proba- bility, change its resistance to stimuli. All therapeutic methods which aim at lessening the too rapid conversion of potential into kinetic energy, that is, increasing cell resist- ance, must see that correct structure is attained. Excessive Stimulation. In cases where almost com- plete exhaustion of potential energy has resulted from low- ered resistance and we find that even increased strength of stimulus fails to evoke a response, the same structural fault may exist. We know that stimulation, when excessive, passes into inhibition. Perhaps it is truer to state that over- activity of a cell leads to exhaustion of its potential energy. The stage of exhaustion, in this sense, is consonant with in- hibition. As an example: In case of structural changes in the lower dorsal region, there may result a change in re- sistance in the secretory and contractile cells of the intes- tines, due to changed blood supply. Diarrhoea results for a time, followed by constipation. At the beginning of the .rapid conversion of potential into kinetic energy the muscles feel tense. After the constipation, or period of exhaustion, sets in, they are flabby. Structural Defects. Structural defects may result in lowered resistance in groups of cells. They also act as stim- uli to set free the potential energy in these cells. In many cases we note only a predisposition to yield to weak stimuli. This is the condition in individuals who are "fairly well," but cannot endure any of the normal stimuli in average amount. They cannot exercise freely without a bad reac- tion. A slightly heavier meal than usual, the excitement due to the presence of many people, arouses "symptoms." Their physiological processes are easily perverted by normal stim- uli because a structural defect, either directly or indirectly, PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 35 has decreased cell resistance. Cases of lowered resistance, supposed to be due to heredity, should be carefully exam- ined for structural defects. It is not improbable that many an ancestor is wrongly accused of transmitting a "predispo- sition." While cell resistance remains below normal, all ex- ternal stimuli, such as atmospheric changes and the presence of bacteria, even if in only normal amounts, may call forth "symptoms of disease." Cell Life Dependent on Circulation. The individual cells of the body depend on the supply of nourishment brought to them by the circulating fluids of the body. The protoplasm of the cells is a complex, chemical substance made up of an enormous number of complex molecules. These molecules, on account of the looseness of combina- tion of their atoms, require sufficient crude material brought to them to maintain the proper atomic tension. Upon this tension is based the resistance to normal or abnormal stimuli. The necessary food for cell protoplasm is brought to the cells by blood and lymph. Since cell protoplasm is entirely dependent upon the circulating media, any disturbance of these media changes the metabolism of the cell, and hence a change in resistance results. This resistance may be varied by failure on either the arterial or venous side of the general circulation, resulting in changed lymph circulation. The constant removal of katabolic products is of as much im- portance as the constant renewal of material for anabolism. Intracellular Tension. Intracellular tension, i. e., the cohesiveness of the atoms of each molecule, is dependent on lymphatic circulation ; this upon arterial and venous circula- tion. If there is abnormal variation in any of these circula- tory fluids, there results a change in resistance of the cells. Therefore, a normal stimulus may provoke too great a trans- ference of potential into kinetic energy and thus initiate a chain of such transferences of one form of energy into an- other. As a rule, the kinetic energy which results from the release of potential energy, in excessive amounts, acts as a stimulus to release still more potential energy and so on to 36 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY the point of exhaustion of the supply of such stored energy. This change is exemplified in the series of symptoms which appear in many diseases. Each liberation of a new supply of energy gives rise to a new system. If the potential en- ergy resides in a gland, excessive secretion results; if in mus- cle, excessive contraction, etc. The way in which the kinetic energy is manifested depends upon the manner in which its cause, i. e., potential energy, is stored. The secretion or the contraction may act as a stimulus to liberate still more po- tential energy. Scientific Therapeutics. Therapeutic methods become scientific just in proportion as they are based on the known structure and function of the tissues and the exact cause of the disturbed condition of the tissues, i. e., the disease. The effort to develop scientific therapeutics has led to various ways of looking at the problem. We have mentioned the fact that each case of illness is a problem with two unknown quantities, i. e., the cause of the illness and the reaction pow- er, i. e., the resistance of the individual. The cause, in many instances, may be sufficiently well known to govern the method of treatment, at least the treatment appears scien- tific if we think only of the cause. The possible weak point in the plan of treatment is the fact that no consideration has been paid to the existence of the second unknown quantity, i. e., the resistance of the tissues to the disease as well as to the treatment. The treatment of typhoid fever by intestinal antiseptics appears scientific because it appears to bring the cause of typhoid and the means of destroying it in proper relation. The treatment has not proven successful because of the second unknown quantity and because that which is destructive to the cause is likewise destructive to the tissues. The Problem as a Whole. The development of scien- tific therapeutics is evidently not easily accomplished, even when we know the cause of disease. There are those who treat diseases and those who treat individuals, i. e., those who attack causes, with little regard for the reactions of the PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 37 individual, and those who aim to support the reactions of the individual without any direct attack on the cause. It is evi- dent that neither method is altogether right, hence scientific medicine is ever striving to evolve a treatment suited to the problem as a whole. Take for example the problem of rid- ding the body of an intestinal parasite, such as a tape worm. Methods of treatment differ, altho based on a known cause and a known condition for elimination of the parasite. There are many ways of making the parasite sick enough to loose its hold on the walls of the intestine. The question is : Which way will be least disturbing to the host? The prac- tice of osteopathy is full of such problems, the majority of them nowhere near as simple as the one used as an illustra- tion. The human body is disturbed by many specific causes, varying in destructive power, which bring forth series of symptoms, which, taken together, give us a picture of a cer- tain disease. To these causes all human beings react in ap- proximately the same way. The symptoms pass through varying degrees of intensity, run a characteristic course and disappear. We recognize that the reaction power of the body has triumphed over the cause of the disease. The fact that the majority of sick people get well under all sorts of treatment naturally leads us to believe that the body is able, in a majority of instances, to conquer the cause of the dis- ease. Recognition of the healing power of Nature leads to the development of two views as to how disease should be met. There are those who distrust and decry all therapeutic methods. Such are fond of pointing to past therapeutic failures and are, in fact, therapeutic nihilists. Natural Recovery. It is not enough to recognize the fact of recovery. We want to know how natural recovery takes place, then we may be able to assist, at least not hin- der, the forces acting for recovery. The study of structure and function of human tissues is the foundation for under- standing how Nature cures. We believe that osteopathy has brought, and is now bringing, very valuable additions to the sum of human knowledge as to how Nature cures. It 38 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY is building its portion of scientific therapeutics based upon a knowledge of causes and reactions. Extrinsic Causes of Disease. The causes of disease previously mentioned, i. e., environmental conditions, poi- sons, parasites, etc., are all external influences, in the sense that they are not a part of normal tissue structures. The causes noted especially in osteopathic diagnosis are a part of the structure of the body. The structural relations are sufficiently altered to compel the body to react on its own structural imbalance. Inherent Recuperative Power. Since it has inherent re- cuperative power to overcome the effects of external causes of disease, there is no doubt but that it usually survives lo- calized structural lesions of this inherent character. It adapts itself as well to internal structural conditions as to diseases produced by other causes. We have noted the necessity of a normal molecular intracellular tension in order to main- tain the efficiency of the cell, also the necessity for proper relations between the cells and the circulating fluids. Any structural fault which interferes with this relationship com- pels the body to react to this fault either in a way to correct it, or, if it threatens the life of the whole body, get rid of it. We see in these reactions just such phenomena as we ex- hibit in our social relations, i. e., a sick member of the com- munity causes no great reaction in the body politic until his illness menaces the whole people. Disturbed Tissue Relations. Osteopathy emphasizes the disturbances in tissue relations. It sees in these both predisposing and exciting causes of disease; predisposing, in that tissue resistance to outside influences is weakened; ex- citing, in that, in many instances, the reactions take on the character of acute diseases. Injuries are so very frequent that there is scarcely an individual who has not put the struc- tural tissues to a severe test. These strains, usually of suffi- cient severity to produce local distress and healing reactions, leave their influences, and if a long time for healing was re- quired, perhaps influenced the general statics of the body. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 39 The Biological Relation of Function and Structure. The author does not look upon the so called osteopathic le- sion as being an evidence that structure determines function, biologically considered. The structural lesion is an inter- ruption of the biological concept that function fashions the structure. This interruption disturbs function, but the bio- logical law is sure to assert itself in the recuperative process. Since "biology has no statics," living tissues are always be- ing rebuilt to serve the function which brought them into being. This ability to repair an injured tissue and make it serve the special function for which it was intended, is the foundation for adaptation and compensation, those phe- nomena which we see exhibited by the body in so many forms in its struggle to survive. The True Art of Healing. If we can study these phe- nomena, understand what Nature is trying to do, assist ac- cordingly, then we are indeed physicians. "In no case can anything appear in the form of disease which was not pre- viously present in the body as a predisposition ; external forces are able merely to make this predisposition apparent. When the physician, by thorough observation and investi- gation, knows the conditions that influence a given predis- position in a definite way, when he is scientifically trained and has a true conception of hygiene, and is at once physi- cian and naturalist, then he is able to cure disease by use of the very same forces which serve to create or alter the hu- man constitution. In this simple sense there is a true art of healing." 40 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY CHAPTER II. THE LESION AS A CAUSE. Definition. The principles of osteopathy take their nat- ural beginning in the consideration of "the lesion." The word "lesion" is used by osteopaths to designate something more than "an injury, hurt or wound in any part of the body" (Gould). Any structural change which affects the func- tional activity of any tissue is called a lesion. There may be structural changes, abnormal development, which are very evident to palpation but do not affect functional activity and, therefore, are not lesions. A lesion is not only a structural change, but such a change as influences function detri- mentally. Fig. 112 illustrates a structural change without detrimental influence on function, while Fig. 113 illustrates a true lesion. The relation of these structural lesions to the media of communication and exchange, nerves and blood vessels, is believed to be the chief element active in pro- ducing and maintaining functional disorders. This is the central principle of osteopathic practice. Characteristics of a Lesion. Lesions may be present in any tissue, but their existence is most easily recognized in bone, ligament and muscle. Dislocations and subluxations of bones, thickened ligaments and contracted muscles con- stitute the usual varieties of lesions. A true lesion is usually palpable ; the functional disturbance is related anatomically and physiologically; there is hyperaesthesia at the palpable area. These three conditions constitute the characteristics of the lesion as it is designated by the osteopath. Its palpa- bility may vary between very wide limits ; the location of the structural change and functional derangement rnay be direct PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 41 or indirect, the hyperaesthesia distinct or indistinct; still, the diagnostician is justified in centering attention upon the lesion if a reasonable amount of association can be detected. Classes of Lesions. Lesions, according to osteopathic theory, may be of two classes, i. e., first, change in size of tissues ; second, change in position. Generally speaking, a change in size is far more difficult to overcome than a change in position, because the former is a result of more profound changes. Tissues may increase in size as the result of ef- forts to repair injury, e. g., the formation of callous in bone, or thickening of ligaments following a sprain. Causes of Lesions. The causes of lesions fall under two general divisions: First, violence; second, failure to react to environment. In the first division all the lesions are primary in character, i. e., the violence immediately changes the rela- tions of structure, and this change becomes an obstruction to vital activity of the body fluids. If the lesion is not cor- rected by the recuperative power of the body itself or by out- side efforts, the change in position is very apt to become complicated by a change in size. The injury results in thick- ening of the ligaments or other fibrous tissues. Secondary Lesions. The second division of lesions is a very large one. These lesions develop as an evidence of the failure of the organism to become perfectly adapted to its food, clothing, labor or general environment. They are, therefore, secondary in character and must be recognized as objective symptoms of one functional derangement, while at the same time they operate primarily to cause functional derangement elsewhere. Thus they may be removed by manipulation and cease to act as an active cause of func- tional change, but will return again so long as environ- mental forces are overwhelming. Effect of Violence or Fatigue. The first division or pri- mary lesion may result from sudden violence or from a force comparatively weak but long continued. In other words, a lesion may be developed immediately, under great force, or 42 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY slowly as the result of great fatigue. An example of a lesion developing under fatigue is noted in the faulty positions as- sumed by the body following prolonged effort or in perform- ing certain tasks. Failure of Adaptation. The second division or sec- ondary lesions may result from failure to react properly to changes of temperature. The temperature of the surround- ing air may be the same at various times, but the character of the clothing may necessitate a greater effort at adaptation. There must be suddenness in the change of temperature or clothing in order to produce the lesion, i. e., the responsive- ness of the tissues must be overtaxed. The first effect of failure of adaptation is the contraction of muscle and ac- companying sensitiveness. The distortion of the bony struc- ture is consequent on the contraction. Ordinarily, if the shock is not too great, the adaptive forces of the organism will exert sufficient power to correct the condition, but when the environment is not suitable the lesion may be- come permanent. Humidity or electrical conditions of the atmosphere may operate to produce these lesions. Chemical Causes of Spinal Lesions. We have noted that these lesions have been discovered coincident with vis- ceral disorder. We may, therefore, safely assume that food which is too difficult of digestion or the usual food taken during fatigue, may act chemically to produce spinal lesions. In this instance they are certainly objective symptoms of visceral disease, but as stated before they must be primary causes of other disorders. To remove such a lesion by man- ipulation is helpful to the organism, but the patient must know that dietetic indiscretions or eating when fatigued was the real starting point of the disease. Here is where dietetic and hygienic knowledge must be a portion of the physician's therapeutics. If the pointing out of structural changes as a result of functional disturbance due to indiscretions in eat- ing and other appetites will lead patients to simpler living, the physician may feel that he has performed a duty more valuable to the patient than the removal of his secondary PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 43 lesions. There can be no doubt but that the removal of a primary lesion due to violence is absolutely essential, but when we maintain that all lesions must be removed before function can right itself, we become absurd. Furthermore, if we contend that a structural lesion antedates all func- tional disturbances we make of life a series of accidents, in- stead of a force governed by fixed laws. The Reason for the Persistence of a Lesion. The ques- tion arises, why does the muscular contraction persist after the proper changes in habits have been made? This ques- tion can not be answered at present. Scarcely one of us will voluntarily make the change in habits until forced to do so by failure of the body to respond to our demands. Many things of a sociological character are at work to compel peo- ple to labor after fatigue is evident, to eat, sleep and dress unhygienically. Viewed from this standpoint, the practice of medicine is a problem in sociology. The original irrita- tion which causes the tension probably causes more or less congestion of blood. The congestion results in over-growth of tissue, which becomes a fixed condition maintaining the lesion, i. e., it is a portion of the lesion. The Sequence of Lesion Phenomena. We have con- sidered three points concerning lesions hyperaesthesia, muscular contraction, and subluxation. They have been considered in this order merely on account of historical ref- erence. In osteopathic practice, they are reversed. We note first the structure, then the tension which accompanies the change in structure, then the hyperaesthesia. Variations in Development. It is not uncommon to find changes from the usual forms of the bones. Sometimes these changes may be very deceptive, but when analyzed with reference to the existence of functional disorder in the area of their normal influence and the presence of hyperaesthesia, they will be recognized as morphological changes due to natural causes. Lesions which might have been active at a former time are sometimes nonactive on account of laws of accommodation which are always active in the body. If the 44 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY body has succeeded in recuperating from the effect of these lesions, it is unwise to disturb them. As an example of an accommodated lesion, we may mention the formation of a new socket for the head of the femur, following dislocation. There are variations in development all through the body, and each physician should strive to become acquainted with them. Palpation of a Lesion. The first sign of a lesion is noted by palpation, i. e., the change in structure is felt. Ac- cording to what we have just said, this is not sufficient evi- dence of the existence of an active lesion. It must be ac- companied by other signs. First, try to eliminate the ap- parent existence of the lesion by having the patient "assume different positions." Second, note whether the bony land- marks in that area vary from the normal. Third, note whether the lesion causes the patient to assume any special attitude. Fourth, test the amplitude of movement in the articulation to determine the changes in its extent. If there is perfect flexibility it is scarcely probable that a lesion ex- ists, for an active lesion is quite inconceivable without ten- sion. Fifth, feel of the soft parts of the joint, muscles and connective tissues. Note any swelling or change in tempera- ture. Sixth, inspect the surface as to color and texture. Seventh, test sensibility by pressure. Ordinarily an exam- ination of the body for lesions consists in comprehensive palpation, which notes synchronously the existence of posi- tional change, tension, temperature, swelling and sensitive- ness. The existence of tension is sufficient evidence of de- crease of flexibility. When violence is the cause of the le- sion, it is necessary to correct structure directly. When the osseous lesion is the result of muscular tension due to reflex stimulation, methods differ according to the viewpoint of the physician. Some manipulate for direct reduction, others re- lax muscles and thus remove the cause of the osseous lesion. The really comprehensive plan should take into account the cause of the tension which occasions the osseous lesion. Having done this, the physician may manipulate the lesion PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 45 to secure direct reduction with the feeling that the problem has been undertaken wisely. Description. Theories of the causation of disease are capable of being spun out to the point where concrete use- fulness is very doubtful. In order that we may not wander too far in theoretical speculation, we will seek to keep the phenomena, which we are trying to describe, of such a tan- gible character that the reader will not have to draw on the imagination. Find the Lesion. Osteopathy has developed as a school of medicine exploiting "the lesion" as a caus*e of disease and its correction as the efficient cure of disease. This theory has been so enthusiastically adhered to that many have been more than willing to attribute failure to cure a given case as due to the practitioner's inability to find or cor- rect the lesion. The desire to maintain the adequacy of a theory is thus apparent. This book is written to present the usefulness of osteopathy but not the extremes of theoretical speculation. Inspection of the Back. In order that we may quickly have before us characteristic lesion phenomena for discus- sion and elucidation, let us observe some well recognized pe- culiarities noted in the inspection of the dorsum of the body. A mature male patient, stripped for inspection, will present, as a general rule, some peculiarities which the trained diag- nostician will recognize as adaptation due to labor or mode of life. Closer inspection of the spine, as to its curves, will show adaptation of even more significance, i. e., to body weight, general vitality and visceral conditions. As a rule the diagnostician is trained to note these latter conditions from other points of view. The point is here emphasized that the spinal column is a good recorder of all these things. Palpation of Vertebral Structures. Digital palpation of the vertebral and paravertebral structures will, in most cases, show some degree of localized unilateral deviation in verte- bral alignment or muscular tension. These apparent changes from what we conceive as the ideal normal are present in 46 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY practically all people, sick or well. It remains, therefore, necessary that we add to these physical changes something of a determining character in order to recognize an active lesion. Tenderness to pressure is the determining sign. Having located a lesion, i. e., an osseous deviation with mus- cular tension and tenderness in the same spinal segments, we can now proceed to analyze it with reference to its ex- istence as cause or effect. The spinal vertebral lesion just noted may involve two or more vertebrae with their at- tached tissues. Some observers claim that a lesion of a single vertebra is rare. Since osteopathy has fostered the view that structure affects function in preference to the re- verse, the author feels justified, solely by historical consider- ations, in beginning all analyses of lesions from that view- point. It is candidly understood that in doing this the author is not holding a brief for either side of any contro- versy which circles about the question whether the egg pre- ceded the chicken or the reverse. History of Accident. In any case under examination the diagnostician desires to uncover the history of the lesion, hence the most direct question possible is asked, i. e., "Is there any history of accident?" If a history of accident is given having direct bearing on the lesion under considera- tion then we are quite justified in believing it to be the pri- mary cause of disturbed function. For example, a patient when attempting to alight from a street car just before it stopped, found his footing insecure and hence clung to the handrail of the car with one hand in an effort to protect himself. The forward motion of the car rotated him and wrenched his back. He was able to go to his home without feeling more than a sense of weakness and pain in the area of the dorso-lumbar articulation. The next morning he was quite unable to rise. Examination showed great muscular tension in the muscles controlling the movement of the twelfth dorsal and first lumbar. Pressure on the spinous processes of these vertebrae caused intense pain. The bowels became constipated and the cutaneous areas supplied by the PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 47 twelfth dorsal and first lumbar pairs of spinal nerves gave some subjective symptoms of being disturbed. This case recovered in a few weeks under the influence of hot packs to the injured area, rest in bed, and after acute soreness abated, passive motion. This case, for many years, has had attacks of "lumbago." These attacks usually follow changes in the weather and some exertion beyond the ordinary. The lesion always exhibits its old characteristics, viz., tenderness, mus- cular rigidity and loss of motion in the arthrodial joints be- tween the twelfth dorsal and first lumbar. Usually an osteo- pathic treatment to establish relaxation and movement is sufficient to secure rapid recovery. Traumatic Lesion. We have in this case a condition similar to the results of a sprained wrist or ankle. This is a case of such evident traumatic origin that no one would think of it from any other standpoint. The lesion is a char- acteristic one, derived in a characteristic manner and fulfills our classical picture of localized spinal injury. It is fairly mild in its disturbance of function of the nerves from the in- jured area. It was recovered from to such an extent that the patient has considered himself well except at such times as the formerly injured tissue failed to function properly under somewhat unusual conditions. There has never been com- plete recovery of function in the articulation. This is evi- denced by partial loss of flexion and extension, hence "the lesion" is always apparent to the trained sense of touch. This lesion presents the same characteristics so commonly noted in peripheral joints which have been sprained and re- covered from with partial loss of motion. It is usually many months before the point of attachment of a strained liga- ment is free from sensitiveness to pressure or tension. Weight Carrying and Balancing Function Disturbed. With an injury of this character located where it has a weight carrying and balancing function to perform, forming part of the protective covering of the spinal cord and its membranes, as well as being a part of the wall of a visceral cavity, there are many far-reaching influences which may be 48 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY attributed to it. The rigidity which nature manifests first as a protective reaction, i. e., to prevent motion in the in- jured part, will be maintained as a constant factor in any case of joint injury which heals with a partial return of mo- tion. By this is meant that before the motion of the joint reaches its limit the muscles assume the function of liga- ments, so as to protect the weakened ligaments. This ac- tion of the muscles we note as a protective rigidity which under the influence of passive motion may be absent but re- appears when the joint is put through its voluntary func- tional tests. Thus the fact that the lesion under discussion involves structures forming a part of the weight carrying and balancing mechanism of the body makes it more diffi- cult of recovery. In order to protect it from movement rigidity exists in segments just above and below it. A lesion at the point mentioned will tend to produce a straight spinal column because it is situated at the junction of two curves, the dorsal posterior and the lumbar anterior. Any exaggera- tion of these curves necessitates greater movement in this joint. Therefore, if this joint be injured and its movement limited there is greater rigidity in both curves in order to protect the injured joint through which their compensating movements operate. The tension of the posterior spinal muscles is met by counter-balancing contraction of the psoas magnus, the diaphragm and the abdominal muscles. The tension of the diaphragm results in lessened respiration. The tension of the abdominal muscles subtracts one factor in the maintenance of bowel action. Lessened oxygenation and elimination are thus possible results on a purely mechanical basis. To compensate for these decreases the whole body metabolizes at a slower rate and, without the sympathetic nervous system is vigorous, the decrease in visceral activity soon makes itself so apparent that the patient may be con- sidered constitutionally ill. Thus it appears that a spinal lesion may influence body metabolism adversely as a result of the natural healing reaction as manifested in rigidity. The decrease of rhythmical movement in the walls of the abdo- PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 49 men and thorax is the immediate consequence of spinal rig- idity. These functions are less interfered with when the weight carrying function of the spine is least called upon, hence the horizontal position is naturally assumed to lessen pain and get rid of the demand for compensatory tensions. Lack of Physiological Rest. While these injuries are acute we note easily the compensatory reactions just de- scribed, but no doubt the majority of such cases feel the press of economic necessity and hence try to adapt them- selves to labor through hours more than sufficient to pro- duce a fatigue akin to sickness. The lesion develops a chro- nicity, or rather has never had a chance to heal under the benign influence of physiological rest. This chronic lesion necessitates permanent compensatory changes such as we have noted. This patient develops periodical digestive weak- ness, synchronous with his times of fatigue. He visits a doc- tor and from then on "suffers many things of many physi- cians." Through time and the compensatory changes in this patient's body the original lesion and its significance are lost to view. The effort made to correct or palliate the di- gestive disturbance probably has no reference to anything but the prominent symptoms. It is such cases as these, suffering from chronic illness, whose history of traumatic lesion is discovered by the osteopathic examination, which have given prestige to osteopathic therapeutics. The treat- ment given by the osteopath to this old lesion reestablishes movement in the joint and, therefore, the compensatory ten- sions in the back, abdomen and chest are lessened. Influence on Circulation and Innervation. Having thus followed the mechanical influence of this traumatic lesion through some of its compensations we can with profit turn our attention to the far more subtle influences upon circula- tion and innervation. The trauma under consideration has been sufficient, in some degree, to rupture tissue continuity and therefore requires increase of circulation for repair. The swelling, occasioned by the congestion of the circula- tion, being under the spinal apponeurosis, does not evidence 50 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY its presence by a localized tumefaction. Some fibers of an intrinsic spinal muscle, i. e., one of the fifth layer, according to Gray's grouping, has been injured, hence our repair in- flammation is deep seated. The deeper seated the lesion, the more pressure will be exerted on the branches of nerve trunks emerging from the intervertebral canal and the more likelihood will there be that the patient will complain of some symptoms of a character which might be interpreted as of central origin, especially if bilateral. The subjective symptoms, pain and paraesthesia, in the area of cutaneous distribution of the twelfth dorsal nerve are usually unilat- eral, hence showing that the lesion causes a peripheral neu- ritis or, at least, a pressure on the nerve sufficient to cause the brain to register as though the peripheral distribution of this nerve was irritated. Segmental Coordination. A segment of the spinal cord coordinates the impulses reaching it over its afferent fibers, hence, in the case of our lesion, the bombardment of this segment with impulses from the injured tissue as well as from the nerves subjected to pressure as a result of the re- pair inflammation will cause efferent impulses to be sent to somatic and splanchnic areas supplied from this segment. These outgoing impulses are influencing motion, secretion, nutrition which are probably disturbed if the sensory nerve impulse which calls forth the reaction is a disturbed one. It is hardly probable that reactions of the kind here men- tioned tend to remain active within one spinal segment. The nerve centers involved are vertical, i. e.. extend through one or more segments and hence our reactions tend to spread. As soon as visceral activity is disturbed by vas- omoter changes a train of reflexes of a compensatory char- acter are initiated and without we hold firmly in mind the character and location of the lesion and realize the probable, as well as possible, compensatory reactions of a mechanical, circulatory and nervous character dependent upon it, we are quite apt to be led astray by the boldness with which some obscurely related symptom crowds its way into the fore- LLE' PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 51 ground of our attention. The persistence with which many of the older osteopaths have worked upon the lesion and re- fused to be led away, in fruitless efforts to palliate symp- toms, has contributed much to the success of their school. Example of Fatigue. Another phase of the lesion as a tenable cause of disease is found in those cases whose struc- ture suffers on account of fatigue or effort to become adapted to position. We will take two lesions commonly associated, i. e., muscular tension with a variable amount of distortion over the splanchnic area, and muscular tension centered over one or all of the upper three cervical verta- brae. A bookkeeper fatigues his back muscles by his posi- tion. The effort to see clearly, especially if there is any in- trinsic defect of vision or of the coordinating power of the occular muscles requires compensatory action of the cervical muscles to maintain the head in the most favorable position for seeing. The fatigue resulting from many hours of this compensatory effort, supplemented by other events of daily life, produces a so-called "bony lesion," usually about the second or third cervical or even as low as the fourth dorsal. By carrying the weight of the head forward of the center of the body the strain on the extensor cervical muscles is eased somewhat by rounding the shoulders, depressing the thorax, shortening the distance between the end of the sternum, costal arches and the pelvic brim, thus relaxing the abdom- inal muscles and permitting gastro and enteroptosis. This sagging of the stomach and bowel must be checked if pos- sible, hence the extensor muscles over the splanchnic area contract to maintain the normal erect attitude, but fail even- tually because the body is not planned to sustain the weight of the head in a position constantly off the center of the body. This illustrates the gradual development of lesions due to efforts of adaptation. Loss of Muscular Tone. Loss of tone in muscles will allow those tissues to which they are attached to yield to the force of gravity and, hence, lesions will be produced. As example, one of my surgical cases complained bitterly, on lUT/VnOHTcO nO HSHJJOO ?'H038fiUc -5 cliMOlcYti^ 52 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY the third day after a hysterectomy of pain in the back and at the lower end of the abdominal wound. Inspection of the wound showed nothing unusual. The course of the pain was examined and it was found to follow the course of the twelfth dorsal nerve. The feebleness of the patient allowed all her tissues to sag, with the result that the right twelfth rib lay against the transverse process of the first lumbar ver- tebrae. A pressure thus exerted on the twelfth dorsal nerve produced pain in the area of its distribution. A small pad of gauze and cotton, sufficient to keep the rib away from the transverse process for a few days until general body nutri- tion reasserted its tonic effect, was sufficient for relief. As heretofore stated, it isn't the acute lesion, so easily recognized, that has contributed so much prestige to oste- opathy. It is the lesion having been overlooked or mis- treated and considered a negligible quantity as a causative factor. Experimental Lesions. As a foundation for better clin- ical observation and understanding, experiments have been conducted, notably by Dr. Louisa Burns, in the Physiologi- cal Laboratory of the Pacific College of Osteopathy, Los Angeles, and by Dr. Carl M. McConnell of Chicago. These experiments consisted in producing artificial lesions on small animals, usually dogs, and noting the immediate and remote effects, then killing the animals and making a careful path- ological study of the changes in the lesioned tissues. Dr. McConnell's description of the manner in which he produced experimental lesions is as follows : "The production of the lesion is a simple but still very important matter. It can- not be performed successfully in a haphazard manner. Strict attention to the thorough relaxation of tissues about the field of operation and definite application of mechanical prin- ciples are demanded. After selecting a healthy animal (a small or medium size dog is best), surgical anesthesia is instituted. Complete relaxation under anasthesia is neces- sary. Following this, further relaxation of the area of in- tended operation by traction is essential for ease of lesion PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 53 production. Next, having determined the character of osteo- pathic lesion desired, that is, right or left rotation, or hyper- extension, or hyperflexion, or combination of these, the second essential is to apply definite mechanical principles. Bringing the fulcrum to bear at just the desired point when the tissues are thoroughly relaxed is as necessary in pro- ducing a lesion as in adjusting one. Much strength can be wasted if the leverage is not right ; otherwise comparatively few pounds exertion will accomplish the result. A simple way is to place the animal flat upon its belly, completely un- der surgical anesthesia, then while an assistant bears down with his thumbs upon the selected vertebra the operator grasps the animal by the rear legs and exerts traction in line with the spinal column until the spinal muscles thoroughly relax and stretch, then immediately, while still maintaining the traction, hyperextend and rotate the spine until the de- sired point is felt to give and slip. It is simply a question of applying the indicated mechanics. Various leverages may be utilized. Frequently we place a small block trans- versely under the animal, especially in producing rib lesions, in order to help separate the ribs, as well as to secure a sta- ble fulcrum. "The traumatism is not carried to a point where tis- sues are torn or lacerated. The object is to obtain a slight slipping or maladjustment of the articular surfaces. If done correctly, that is, specifically, little force is required. The immediate noticeable results are malalignment of the verte- brae, malposition of the ribs corresponding to the deranged vertebrae, if the lesion is a dorsal one, and contraction of the spinal muscles of the same segments. These changes are readily palpated. After recovery from the anesthesia and during the ensuing time the above characteristics are evident with the added ones of tenderness and rigidity. Muscular contraction usually subsides, but not always, un- til only the deep spinal muscles are palpably contracted and these corresponding to the local lesion. In some cases the animal exhibits upon movement that the back is stiff and 54 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY tender; others do not and shortly show no apparent ill ef- fects. Later on, a number present more or less systemic dis- turbances, depending upon the locality of the lesion. The periods of observation have ranged from three to eighty days, that is, the time from production of the lesion to autopsy." Loss of Motion. The moveable vertebral and costo- vertebral articulations are arthodial, i. e., gliding, hence any change in one of these articulations, short of dislocation, is in a normal direction. In other words, the lesions which we recognize are partial fixations, hence it isn't the position which constitutes the lesion so much as it is the loss of mo- tion, i. e., the loss of function and the exaggerated muscu- lar contraction which maintains the fixation and the charac- ter of the injury which is the cause of these changes. Necessity for Study of Structure. Based on this idea of what the lesion is we must study the normal structure and function of every vertebral and costo-vertebral articula- tion, so that we may recognize not only the compensatory changes on the immediate group affected, but also those widespread compensations of a mechanical, circulatory and nervous character which are part of every reparative and adaptive effort of the body. Since pathology is the study of the perversions of the normal we can not understand what the body is trying to do in any given case without taking into account the successes and failures of compensa- tion as are made evident by this division of medical science. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 55 CHAPTER III. THE LESION AS AN EFFECT. Analysis of the Causes of Lesions. As previously noted, the inspection of the vertebral and paravertebral tis- sues in almost all cases of illness involving the trunk of the body will show physical signs of compensatory reactions. These physical signs we call "lesions." They seem to be identical in character with those which we noted as trau- matic lesions, i. e., there is deviation in osseous alignment, muscular contraction and hyperaesthesia. It may be impos- sible to secure from the patient any history of trauma as the foundation of this lesion, therefore two explanations are open to us ; either we must wilfully hold to the hypothesis that a trauma did occur of so light immediate effect as to escape the notice of the patient, or use the facts of anatomy and physiology to build up a rational theory of normal reac- tions. It is much easier to declare trauma as the cause than analyze the protective reactions of the body. This fact has led the exponents of the various forms of spinal adjustment to explain every lesion by claiming an obscure trauma as the cause. Since no one ever goes through life without many slips, falls and other strains which can be called to mind, it is easy for the patient to be convinced that some remote ex- perience of this kind is in fact the foundation for all the trouble. The Attractiveness of the Traumatic Lesion Theory. The theory that an obscure trauma in the spinal tissues is the essential and adequate cause of bodily disorders is cap- tivating both to the physician and the patient. It has so many definite elements which are evident both to the mind 56 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY of the physician and of the patient. The physician's palpat- ing finger feels the change in osseous alignment and muscu- lar tone. The patient recognizes the difference in sensitive- ness between this lesion area and those outside the lesion influence. Specific manipulation having for its aim the cor- rection of alignment in the lesioned area gives so frequently almost instant sense of relief that it is no wonder physician and patient become convinced that the hypothesis of trauma is correct. Under the influence of such a theory as this our osteopathic literature is well spiced with statements tending to belittle the influence of all other causes of disease. The writer wishes to emphasize the fact that lesions can be di- vided into two great classes, i. e., primary and secondary. The first class is made up of those of traumatic origin and are undoubtedly causes of disorder in their areas of influ- ences. The second class is made up of those lesions which are physical sign of the body's efforts at adaptation and compensation. Classification of Lesions. A given lesion can be classed as primary or secondary only after careful study of all those factors which constitute the history and symptom- otology of the case. Visceral lesions cause muscular con- tractions in the spinal area from which they receive their cerebro-spinal nerve communications. They also cause pain in areas of higher sensibility, cutaneous areas, with which they are associated by innervation from the same segment of the spinal cord. These referred pains and contractions of spinal muscles are beginning to be recognized by specialists in pulmonary, digestive and renal diseases. There has been no well ordered effort to coordinate the facts which lie at the foundation of these phenomena. It is hoped that we may make for our students a beginning in this work by what is to follow. Examples of Secondary Lesions. As examples of var- ious secondary lesions we will call attention to the lesion phenomena found usually to be synchronous with envolv- ments of some of the organs of the body. Rather than rush PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 57 into an analysis of lesions, we deem it more to the student's interest to have a clear picture of the phenomena we desire to analyze later on. Our practitioners who are devoting much time in treating the eye recognize that in diseases of the eye and orbital tissues there are points in the neck which are rarely free from tenderness. Along with the tenderness are found muscular contraction and malalignment, these completing our trinity of localized lesion phenomena. Such lesions may be located as low as the second dorsal. The Spinal Lesion an Objective Symptom. Disturb- ance of circulation in the tonsil is associated with spinal le- sions. These lesions vary in number and extent according to whether the disease process is simple and decidedly local, or is of enough severity to produce constitutional symptoms such as chill, fever, etc. The spinal lesions multiply and in- tensify in proportion to the extent and severity of the dis- turbance of the body. This is the case no matter in what organ or tissue our original disturbance made its appear- ance. Just as the symptom complex varies according to the severity of a disease, so the spinal lesions proportion them- selves in like manner. Therefore, in this sense, spinal lesions are physical signs: objective and subjective evidence of dis- turbance in tissues innervated by branches of nerves from the same segment of the spinal cord. Visceral Reflexes. Each viscus, or localized tissue, such as glands, mucous or serous membranes, tend to es- tablish reflex lesions in the spinal area tissues which are supplied with nerves from the same spinal cord segment as they themselves are supplied. In proportion to the amount of compensatory assistance required by any organ or tissue from those parts of the body ordinarily called upon for such assistance, our spinal lesion increases in extent and inten- sity. As a common example of the foregoing, the stomach may fail to do its work thoroughly and thus throw added work on the small intestine and its related glands, liver and pancreas. If these are somewhat overtaxed by their com- pensatory efforts, our spinal lesion which represented the 58 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY stomach, extends further down over the spinal areas from which the liver and pancreas receive a portion of their in- nervation. Such examples as this can be recognized in a majority of cases. Pleurisy. Disease processes in the lungs produce spinal lesions of various kinds, according to their intensity and destructiveness. Pleurisy produces so great contrac- tion in respiratory muscles, which act particularly on the ribs lying over the inflamed area, that friction of the pleural surfaces at this point is reduced to a minimum. Physicians, taking their plan from this natural compensatory contrac- tion, frequently reinforce natural efforts by strapping over the contracted area with adhesive. The thorax adapts itself to the state of its contents, hence when a portion of the lung is destroyed the antero-posterior diameter of the chest is les- sened in proportion. The vertebral and costo-vertebral ar- ticulations enter into this adaptive process and hence ex- hibit decided lesion phenomena. Cardiac Lesion Patterns. In case of heart lesions the body is called upon to make extensive compensatory reac- tions and hence our spinal lesion phenomena may be limited to the area of the heart's innervation, or extend in propor- tion as the heart's condition involves the pulmonary circu- lation, the portal circulation or the kidney. Unity of the Body. Disease processes in the pelvic vis- cera produce their characteristic spinal lesion phenomena just as the thoracic and abdominal organs. The point we desire to emphasize is that the unity of the body is exempli- fied by the spinal lesion phenomena. No organ or tissue can or does suffer injury without other tissues being drafted to compensate for its condition so as to maintain not only existence but the most satisfactory life of which the organ- ism is capable. If the spinal lesion is viewed not only as a possible cause but, also, as a quite probable effect of tissue disturbance elsewhere, we will appreciate more fully the manner in which the body strives to live up to its best. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 59 CHAPTER IV. SPINAL HYPERAESTHESIA AND MUSCULAR TENSION. Osteopaths are not the first or only physicians who have used the spine as a means of diagnosis as well as an area upon which to concentrate therapeutic methods. It is interesting and instructive to note the steps in the develop- ment of the knowledge of spinal conditions and of the indica- tions of remote functional disturbances which are registered there. Subjective Symptoms. Subjective symptoms precede any attempt to discover objective evidences of disease. It was early noted by physicians that patients could not be re- lied upon to interpret their own symptoms. This led to ef- forts to discover symptoms which were independent of the patient's imperfect perceptions. Palpation would naturally be used at the areas complained of by the patient. Since the brain takes cognizance of only the peripheral areas of distribution of sensory nerves, instead of the whole course of the nerve fibers, the physician might still be misled in ap- plying palpation, because he would be largely governed by the patient's sensory impressions. Palpation made with ref- erence to a realizing sense of the distribution and function of the nervous system, becomes a more satisfactory means of diagnosis. As the knowledge of the nervous system in- creased, attention was called more and more to the spinal column, on account of its relations to the great nervous mass within it. Palpation of the spinal column demonstrated the existence of sensitive areas, -associated with visceral or other disorders ; therefore, hyperaesthetic areas are the first 60 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY diagnostic points mentioned in medical literature, in regard to the spinal lesion. Such hyperaesthetic areas were con- sidered as evidence of spinal irritation ; that is, irritation of the spinal cord. Irritation of the Spinal Nerves. The first reference to spinal irritation which I have found is contained in a monograph entitled "A Treatise on Neuralgic Diseases Dependent on Irritation of the Spinal Marrow and Ganglia of the Sympathetic Nerve," by Thomas Pridgin Teale, 1834. He quotes a letter from Mr. R. P. Player to the editor of the Quarterly Journal of Science "On Irritation of the Spinal Nerves," dated December 10, 1821, as follows: "I take the liberty to submit to your notice a pathological fact which has not, to the best of my knowledge, been generally remarked and attention to which, so far as my own experience goes, promises some diminution of those difficulties with which the healing art has to contend. Most medical practitioners who have attended to the sub- ject of spinal disease, must have observed that its symp- toms frequently resemble various and dissimilar maladies and that commonly every function of every organ is im- paired whose nerves originate near the seat of the disorder. The occurrence of pain in distant parts forcibly attracted my attention and induced frequent examinations of the spinal column ; and after some years' attention, I considered myself enabled to state that in a great number of diseases morbid symptoms may be discovered about the origins of the nerves which proceed to the affected parts, or of the spinal branches which unite; and that if the spine be examined, more or less pain will commonly be felt by the patient on the application of pressure about or between those verte- brae from which such nerves emerge. Spinal Treatment. "This spinal affection may, per- haps, be considered as the consequence of diseases, but of its existence at their commencement any one may satisfy himself; and this circumstance, combined with the success which has attended the employment of topical applications 61 to the tender parts about the vertebrae, appears to indicate that the cause may exist there. Prejudice sometimes oper- ates against ideas of connection so remote ; but in many instances patients are surprised at the discovery of tender- ness in a part, of whose implication and disease they had not the least suspicion." Control of the Body by the Nervous System. Dr. Teale brings to his aid in the exposition of his subject, some interesting corroboratory observations made by others and recorded in the medical literature of that period. He quotes Dr. Darwell in an interesting paragraph which is a faint distant undercurrent of Dr. A. T. Still's oft-repeated state- ment concerning the interaction of nerves and the blood stream. The passage is as follows : "If, however, the nerv- ous system is more or less connected with every function of the animal body; if the circulation of the blood, the phe- nomena of the respiration and the operation of intellect, cannot be carried on without its intervention, the manner in which it is disregarded can not but be a most important defect. It has perhaps in great measure arisen from always contemplating the brain as acted upon by the circulation and never reversing the order of review." A Concept of the Nervous System. One of the best expressed concepts of the nervous system I have read, is Dr. Teale's introduction to his monograph. It is the con- cept which is being more clearly taught in osteopathic col- leges than in those of other schools of medicine : "The term Neuralgia which was originally employed to designate certain affections of nerves attended with severe pain has of late with great propriety been extended from its original and literal signification, to many other morbid affections of nerves, which are not characterized by pain, but by some other perverted state of their functions." Neuralgia. "Neuralgia includes within its range a great variety of diseases, presenting an endless diversity both in their symptoms and in the parts where they are seated." That such variety should exist, ceases to excite surprise, 62 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY when we consider how varied are the functions of the dif- ferent nerves and how diversified the tissues and organs to which they are distributed. "To the attentive observer of diseases, neuralgic affec- tions, under the more extended signification, must repeat- edly present themselves. The skin, for instance, may be the seat of every degree of exalted or diminished sensi- bility, from the slightest uneasiness to the most acute suf- fering and from the most trivial diminution of sensibility to the complete obliteration of feeling, symptoms not de- pendent upon disease affecting the different tissues of the part but solely referable to a morbid condition of the sen- tient nerves. The voluntary muscles may in like manner indicate in a variety of ways a morbid condition of the nerves with which they are supplied. They may be affected with weakness, spasms, tremors, or a variety of other dis- ordered states included within the two extremes of con- vulsion and paralysis. The involuntary muscles may have the harmony of their actions interrupted from a morbid condition of their nerves; the heart may be affected with palpitation; the vermicular motion of the stomach or the peristaltic action of the intestines may be subject to irreg- ularity. The sensibility of the internal organs may like- wise be affected, the heart, the stomach, the intestines, being the seat of pain, referable to their nerves, and inde- pendent of inflammation, or any alteration of structure. The secretions may also undergo alterations, both in quan- tity and quality, from a perverted agency of the nerves upon which they depend. Such is a -very imperfect recital of the various morbid affections which may be included under the term Neuralgia, and so frequent is their occur- rence that they must be familiar to every practitioner. They are, however, often perplexing in their treatment and not unfrequently exhaust the patience of the afflicted sufferer, and also of the medical attendant. "The difficulty and embarrassment which have attended the diagnosis and treatment of these affections, I am in- PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 63 clined to believe, has principally arisen from mistaken views of their pathology. They have too often been regarded as actual diseases of those nervous filaments which are the immediate seat of the neuralgia instead, of being consid- ered as symptomatic of disease in the larger nervous masses from which those filaments are derived ; hence the treat- ment has too frequently been ineffectually applied to the seat of neuralgia ; instead of being directed to the more remote and less obvious seat of disease. "It is now pretty generally admitted as a pathological axiom, that disease of the larger nervous masses, as the brain and spinal marrow, is not so much evinced by phe- nomena in the immediate seat of disease, as in those more remote parts to which the nerves arising from the diseased portion are distributed. In the more severe forms of dis- ease, this principle is readily admitted and recognized. When for instance one-half of the body shall have lost its sensibility and the corresponding muscles their power of action, the skin and the muscles are not regarded as the seat of disease, but the brain is immediately referred to. In the slightest forms of disease of the brain and spinal marrow, such as do not completely obliterate but merely impair or pervert the functions of the nerves such as do not paralyze the sentient and muscular powers of the part but produce weakness, tremors, spasms, etc., in the mus- cular system, and numbness and prickings, pains and other morbid feelings in the nerves of sensation, this important principle, which as strictly obtains as in the former instance, is too often entirely overlooked; and a numerous class of complaints of very frequent occurrence, are regarded as nervous or spasmodic diseases of the part affected, instead of being considered as actual diseases of that portion of the brain and spinal marrow from which the nerves of the part are derived. Visceral Disturbance Due to Disturbed Nerve Control. "The same pathological principle is, I believe, equally applicable to the sympathetic system of nerves; although 64 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY it may be difficult to establish this opinion by actual ex- periment, yet I think it may be rested upon a well grounded analogy, which will justify us in regarding the nervous masses of the ganglionic system as bearing the same rela- tion to the nerves derived from them, as the large nervous masses of the cerebro-spinal system bear to their respective nerves. Hence many nervous affections of the viscera ought not be considered as diseases of the viscera themselves but as symptomatic of disease in those particular ganglia whence their nerves are derived. Co-existence of Spinal Tenderness. "Influenced by such considerations, I have for a few years been in the habit of treating many of these nervous affections as dis- eases of some portion of the spinal marrow or ganglia; and have been still further confirmed in my opinion by the frequent and almost uniform co-existence of tenderness on pressing some portion of the vertebral column and the circumstances of the tender portion of the spine being in a particular situation where the nerves of the affected part originate. Symptoms of Spinal Irritation. "The symptoms of spinal irritation consist in an infinite variety of morbid functions of the nerves of sensation and volition which have their origin in the spinal marrow, and the parts in which these morbid functions are exhibited, of course, bear reference to the distribution of the spinal nerves. "The morbid states of sensation include every variety, from the slightest deviation from the healthy sensibility of any part, to the most painful neuralgic affections on the one hand, and to complete numbness or loss of feeling on the other; including pains which may be fixed or fugitive or darting in the direction of the nerve, pricking and ting- ling sensations, a sense of creeping in the skin, of cold water trickling over it, and numerous other states of per- verted sensation of which words are inadequate to convey a description. In the muscular system we find weakness PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 65 or loss of power, tremors, spasms or cramps and sometimes a tendency to rigidity. "These symptoms sometimes exist in so slight a degree that the patient considers them unworthy of notice, and only admits their existence when particular inquiry is made respecting them ; the only complaint which he makes be- ing of an unaccountable sense of weakness and inability of exertion. In other cases the tremors have excited alarm ; sometimes the neuralgic pains in the scalp or the fixed pain in the muscles, particularly when it occurs in the in- tercostal muscles, have suggested the idea of serious disease in the brain or in the lungs; and when the pain is seated in the muscles of the abdomen, a fear that some organic disease of the abdominal viscera has taken place harasses the mind of the patient. The muscular weakness in some cases tending to paralysis often suggests the fear of apoplexy or paralysis from cerebral disease. Duration of Affections Due to Spinal Irritation. "The affection is often of very protracted duration, undergoing alternate variations from the sanative powers of the con- stitution and the different existing causes of disease. There are many individuals in whom the complaint has existed, in varying degrees of intensity for a series of years, with- out its real nature having been suspected ; the patients and their medical attendants having regarded it throughout as a rheumatic or a nervous affection. "In this complaint tenderness in the 'portion of the vertebral column which corresponds to the origin of the affected nerves, is generally in a striking and unequivocal manner evinced by pressure. In some instances the ten- derness is so great that even slight pressure can scarcely be borne, and will often cause pain to strike from the spine to the seat of spasm or neuralgia. "This affection of the spinal marrow occasionally exists throughout its whole extent; more frequently, however, it is confined to some particular portion, and occasionally is seated in different and remote portions at the same time; 66 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY the particular symptoms and tenderness on pressure indi- cating the affected part. "The symptoms of course vary considerably, according to the particular part of the spine which is affected, and bear reference to the distribution of the different spinal nerves. Affections of the Upper Cervical Region. "When the upper cervical portion of the spinal marrow is diseased, we frequently find neuralgic affections of the scalp ; the pain strikes in various directions over the posterior and lateral parts of the head ; sometimes the twigs in the neighborhood of the ear, sometimes those which ascend over the occiput to the superior part of the scalp, are more particularly the seat of the complaint; the nervous twigs distributed to the integuments of the neck are occasionally affected, the pain darting across the neck to the edge of the lower jaw, and sometimes encroaching a little upon the face. These neu- ralgic diseases frequently assume an intermittent form, the paroxysms generally occurring in the evening. A stiff neck or impaired action of the muscles moving the head fre- quently attend the affection of the upper cervical portion of the spinal marrow; and occasionally the voice is com- pletely lost, or suffers alteration, and the act of speaking is attended with pain or difficulty. Irritation of the Lower Cervical Region. "Irritation of the lower cervical portion of the spinal marrow gives rise to a morbid state of the nerves of the upper extremities, shoulders, and integuments at the upper part of the thorax. Pains are felt in various parts of the arm, shoulder, and breast; sometimes the pain takes the course of the anterior thoracic branches of the brachial plexus, occasionally the pain is fixed at some point near the clavicle, scapula or shoulder joint at the insertion of the deltoid, or near the elbow or shoots along the course of some of the cutan- eous nerves. Frequently one or both of the mammae be- come exquisitely sensible and painful on pressure, and some degree of swelling occasionally takes place in the PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 67 breast, attended with a knotty and irregular feeling, when the neuralgic pains have existed a considerable time in that part, prickling and numbness, tingling and creeping sensations are often felt in the upper extremities; and also a sensation of cold water trickling over the surface. On rubbing the hands over the part affected a soreness is frequently felt, which is described as not merely situated in the integuments but also in the more deep seated parts. In the muscular system are observed most frequently a weakness of the upper extremities sometimes referred par- ticularly to the wrists, tremors and unsteadiness of the hands; also cramps and spasms of various degrees of in- tensity. Occasionally there is an inability to perform com- plete extension of the elbows, the arm appearing restrained by the tendon of the biceps; and tightness being produced in this part when extension is attempted beyond a certain point. As far as I have observed, the pain and other mor- bid feelings in the upper extremities and chest are felt more frequently and more severely on the left than on the right side. "Females of sedentary habits appear particularly sub- ject to these affections of the upper extremities, and it is not uncommon for them to complain of being scarcely able to feel the needle when it is held in their ringers, and that their needles and work frequently drop from their hands. Irritation in the Upper Dorsal Region. "When the upper dorsal portion is affected, in addition to various mor- bid sensations similar to those in the extremities, there is often a fixed pain in some part of the intercostal muscles, to which the name pleurodynia has been assigned ; and when this pain has existed a long time, there is tenderness on pressing the part. Irritation in the Lower Dorsal Region. "When the lower dorsal half of the spinal marrow is the seat of irri- tation, or subacute inflammation, the pleurodynia, when it exists, is felt in the lower intercostal muscles; frequently there is also a sensation of a cord tied round the waist; and 68 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY oppressive sense of tightness across the epigastrium and lower sternal region ; and soreness along the cartilages of the lower ribs or in the course of insertion of the diaphragm. Various pains, fixed and fugitive, are also felt in the par- ietes of the abdomen, throughout any part of the abdom- inal and lumbar muscles ; the pain is frequently fixed in some portion of the rectus muscle and not infrequently in the oblique muscle or transversalis, a little above the crest of the ilium, particularly when the origin of two or three of the lowest dorsal nerves is diseased. Irritation in the Lumbar and Sacral Regions. "The affection of the lumbar and sacral portion of the spinal cord often produces a sensation of soreness in the scrotum and neighboring integuments; and the lower extremities be- come the seat of various morbid sensations, spasms, tremors, etc., for the most part resembling those which have been described as occurring in the upper limbs. The patients also complain of a sense of insecurity or instability in walking; their knees totter, and feel scarcely able to sup- port the weight of the body. The Effect of Recumbency. "In some cases very con- siderable relief is found from recumbency, the pain fre- quently being diminished as soon as the patient retires to bed, independently of any paroxysmal remission. Irritation of Spinal Marrow Not Necessarily Dependent on Disease of Vertebrae. "This irritation or subacute in- flammatory state of the spinal marrow is not necessarily connected with any deformity of the spine, or disease in the vertebrae. It may co-exist with these as well as with any other diseases, but it so repeatedly occurs without them that they can not be regarded as dependent upon each other. Where, however, inflammation and ulceration of the vertebrae or intervertebral cartilages exist, it is prob- able they may predispose to, and in some instances, act as an exciting cause of an inflammatory state of the nervous structures which they contain ; for we not frequently find inflammatory affections of the vertebrae in conjunction with PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 69 symptoms of irritation of the spinal marrow. But these two affections, although co-existing, bear no regular relations to each other; and during the progress of the vertebral disease the affection of the nervous structures is subject to great changes and fluctuations. The local remedies em- ployed for arresting the disease in the bone often alleviate the affection of the spinal marrow at the very commence- ment of the treatment, long before the vertebral disease is suspended ; but as the neighboring inflammation in the bones appears to predispose or excite the nervous mass which they contain to disease, relapses of the nervous af- fections are repeatedly occurring during the whole course of the complaint. Lateral Curvature. "The affections of the spine, termed lateral curvature and excurvation, appear to have no necessary connection with the disease which I have been describing; and the proportion of cases in which they are found united is so small that lateral curvature can scarcely be considered even as predisposing to this disease. The most extreme degrees of deformity are frequently ob- served without any affection of the nerves; and when lateral curvature does occasionally co-exist, local antiflo- gistic treatment will often speedily remove the nervous symptoms while the curvature remains unrelieved. Hence there is an impropriety in considering these nervous symp- toms as a result of the deformity and in explaining them upon the mechanical principle of pressure and stretching, to which the nerves are supposed to be subjected as they issue from the intervertebral foramina. If the pressure and stretching produced by the curvature were the cause of the nervous symptoms, they ought to continue as long as the deformity remains.' Treatment. "When the different neuralgic symptoms which have been enumerated can be traced to this morbid state of some portion of the spinal marrow, the treatment that ought to be pursued is readily decided upon. Local depletion by leeches or cuping, and counter irritation by 70 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY blisters to the affected portion of the spine, are the prin- cipal remedies. A great number of the cases will fre- quently yield to the single application of any of these means. Some cases which have even existed several months I have seen perfectly relieved by the single application of a blister to the spine, although the local pains have been ineffectually treated by a variety of remedies for a great length of time. A repetition of the local depletion and blistering is, however, often necessary after the lapse of a few days, and sometimes is required at intervals for a con- siderable length of time. In a few very obstinate cases issues or setons have been thought necessary; and where the disease has been very unyielding, a mild mercurial course has appeared beneficial. "When my attention was first directed to this subject, I considered recumbency a necessary part of the treatment; it is, for a moderate length of time, undoubtedly beneficial and frequently very much accelerates recovery, but sub- sequent observation has convinced me that it is by no means essential. I have seen several instances of the most severe forms of those complaints occurring in the poorer classes of society, where continued recumbency was im- practicable, which have, nevertheless, yielded without dif- ficulty to the other means of the treatment, whilst the indi- viduals were pursuing their laborious avocations. "These observations, howefver, are not intended to apply to those cases in which there is actual disease of the vertebrae. "When there exists a tendency to relapse, I have thought it advantageous to continue the use of some stim- ulating liniment to the spine for a few weeks after the other means of treatment have been discontinued. A lini- ment consisting of one part spirits of turpentine and two of olive oil is what has generally been employed. Ganglia of the Sympathetic Nerves. "The ganglia of the sympathetic nerves appear subject to a state of disease PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 71 similar to that which has been described in the preceding chapter, as occurring in the spinal marrow. "As the disease may be confined to one part of the spinal marrow, or exist simultaneously in different por- tions, or may even pervade its whole extent, so the af- fection of ganglia may be confined to one of these nervous masses, may exist in several which are contiguous, or in ganglia remote from each other; and as there is reason to believe the whole chain may occasionally be affected. "The disease of the ganglia is seldom found, except in conjunction with that of the corresponding portion of the spinal marrow, whereas the spinal marrow is often affected without the neighboring ganglia being under the influence of disease. Thus we frequently find symptoms of disease in a portion of the spinal marrow without any evidence of its existence in the corresponding ganglia, frequently the symptoms of both combined, and occasionally, but rarely, symptoms referable to the ganglia without the spinal mar- row being implicated. Symptoms of Irritation of Sympathetic Ganglia. "The principal symptoms resulting from irritation of the ganglia of the sympathetic are to be found in those organs which derive their nerves from this source. They consist of per- verted functions of these organs, and are exemplified by a variety of phenomena. The involuntary muscles, deriving their power from the sympathetic, have their action altered as is evinced by spasms and irregularity in their contrac- tions. The heart is seized with palpitations, the large ves- sels with inordinate pulsations; the muscular fibers con- necting with the bronchial apparatus are thrown into spasms, constituting a genuine asthma independent of bronchial inflammation. The muscular fibers of the stom- ach and intestines become the seat of spasms and various other deviations from their natural operation. The sensi- bility of the organs, which derive their sentient power ffom the great sympathetic, is variously perverted, the nervous filaments being the seat of pain. The heart and lungs, for 72 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY instance, are subject to morbid sensations bearing great analogy to those which have been designated 'tic doulou- reaux' when occurring in the spinal nerves. The stomach and intestines are liable to similar neuralgia, to which the names gastrodynia and enterodynia have been applied. The kidneys, the bladder, and the uterus are liable to the same perverted state of their sensibility. The secretions also undergo alterations, products being formed, which in health have no existence. This is exemplified by the enormous secretions of air which sometimes occur in the stomach. Large quantities of clear transparent liquid are also secreted by this organ, constituting what is called pyrosis. The secretions of the stomach undergo variation in their quan- tities, rendering them unfit for digestive process. It is probable that the secretion of the liver also experiences some alteration in these complaints. The urine is some- times influenced, and I am inclined to suspect that some forms of diabetes partake of neuralgic character. Leu- corrhoea is frequently a concomitant of these diseases, and ceases on their removal; but I am not prepared to say that it is ever symptomatic of them. Irregularities in the cata- menia are often observed, the discharge often being gen- erally in excess. Middle and Lower Thoracic Sympathetic Ganglia. "The ganglia most liable to the disease are the middle and lower thoracic, from which the splanchnic nerves are de- rived, giving rise to various disorders of the stomach and digestive organs, which will hereafter be more fully dis- cussed. Next in frequency is the affection of the cervical ganglia, producing painful and spasmodic states of the heart. The symptoms denoting disease of other ganglia, al- though occasionally met with, are less frequent in their occurrence. Irritability of temper and depression of spirits often attend these complaints, particularly when the stom- ach is the part which suffers. "The disease of the ganglia, like that of the spinal marrow, is not necessarily connected with disease of the PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 73 vertebrae or distortion of the spine. It may co-exist with these complaints, and, when it does so, the symptoms proper to the ganglionic disease are often erroneously sup- posed to be produced by distortion or by disease of the vertebrae ; they are, however, frequently relieved by treat- ment, whilst the disease of the bones remains uninfluenced by it, and the most extreme distortion of the spine or de- struction of the vertebrae from inflammation may exist without there being any symptoms attributable to neuralgia of the sympathetic nerves. "In conjunction with the symptoms denoting disease of the ganglia, tenderness to a greater or less degree may generally be found on pressing some part of the spine, and the tender portion invariably corresponds with the symp- toms; or rather, the seat of tenderness is near the part occupied by the particular ganglia from which the nerves of the disordered organ are derived ; for example, when the heart is affected the tenderness is found in some of the cervical vertebrae, and when the stomach is the seat of complaint, it is in some of the middle or lower dorsal ver- tebrae. Spinal Treatment. Hyperaemia. "With respect to the treatment, I have but little to add to what has been said in the preceding chapter respecting the treatment of irrita- tion of the spinal marrow. Leeches, cuping, blisters, etc., to the neighborhood of the affected ganglia constitute the essential part." Muscular Tension. Following the observation of spinal tenderness came the noting of muscular tension accompany- ing it. As near as I can determine from perusing medical literature, muscular tension was not recognized until after the advent of Osteopathy. Since the attention of medical writers was called to the conditions of the spinal column called "lesions" there are frequent passages descriptive of these in medical literature. One of the best of these ref- erences is found in Boardmen Reed's work on "Diseases of the Stomach and Intestines," and is as follows : 74 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY "Dr. John P. Arnold has recently called attention to a novel objective sign which may be recognized upon pal- pation over the sensitive .regions along side of the spinal' vertebrae, and sometimes in such regions which are not sensitive to pressure, though in all cases he maintains that the part of the body supplied by the vaso motor nerve fibres immerging in the corresponding intervertebral space will be found to present some abnormal condition. The peculiarity described by him is, in such cases, a somewhat doughy, and in chronic ones, a gristly tense, cord-like feel- ing of the band of longitudinal muscular fibres which run up and down on either side of the spine. This abnormality is supposed by Arnold to be due to a congested or infiltrated condition of the muscle while the cord itself is anaemic, probably in chronic cases. Hammond believed the spinal cord to be anaemic in such cases. The findings obtained by a careful palpation over the spine should thus assist in di- recting our attention to the organ or part of the body which may be suspected of being diseased. Digital Examination of the Spinal Area. "You should make it a rule to examine carefully the spines of all chronic invalids by pressing deeply with the finger tips (or with the thumbs, as Flint advised) close to the vertebrae and then exert gentle traction in a lateral direction outward from the spine on either side. The patient should be lying upon his right side while you palpate along the left side of the vertebrae, and should then change to his left side in order that you may palpate upon the right side of the latter so that the tissues may be in the utmost condition of relaxation practicable. In both cases you will find it best to stand in front of the patient and reach over his upper side to make palpation along the .region of the upper side of the spinal column. "In numerous patients, especially those suffering from digestive derangements, you will be likely while palpating in the way described to recognize in the longitudinal muscles running parallel and close to the spine the tense, cord-like PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 75 sensation above mentioned. If, simultaneously with your recognition of such a condition the patient complains of sensitiveness in the same regions, the accuracy of your finding will be at once confirmed." The Use of Spinal Muscular Tension in Diagnosis. The use of these tense cord-like muscles as diagnostic evi- dences of disease has been a constant practice of Osteo- paths from the beginning of Dr. Still's work. Judging from the quotation the true significance of these contractions has not been apprehended by the medical profession in general. It is very evident that a contracted muscle is shorter and thicker than when relaxed, also that when contracted it exerts force to draw its extremities together. The ends of the muscle being attached to bones forming portions of a movable articulation, a change in the relation of the bones must follow. This change is called a subluxation and is described more in detail in another chapter. Cause or Effect? Having noted that sensitiveness and muscular contraction are well recognized conditions found along the spinal column, the question arises, are these merely objective symptoms of disease or are they to a large extent causative factors in the origin and maintenance of diseased conditions of the areas of peripheral distribu- tion of spinal nerves? Are they causes or effects? They have been noted almost exclusively as efficient causes of disease. Furthermore, osteopathic therapeutics have been administered from that standpoint with marked success. This change in position and size of tissues is recognized as an obstruction to the movements of fluids, and therefore is a condition operating in the system to cause disease. 76 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY CHAPTER V. THE SEGMENTATION OF THE BODY. The Lesion as a Guide in Diagnosis. Since the spinal lesion may be either cause or effect, i. e., a trauma or an ex- pression of the body's protective reaction, we need certain fundamental facts upon which to base judgment. No mat- ter whether the lesion is cause or effect the physician must recognize it as a guide for the unravelling of a series of phe- nomena which are quite sure to be present in any case. It is a well recognized fact that effects become causes and thus a cycle of reflexes become established making it difficult to recognize where the series began. Any diagnosis worthy the name must be based on structure and function. Much of the phenomena we are called upon to interpret is difficult to understand, unless we know not only normal structure but the development processes whereby this present structural formation was achieved. The Spinal Segment. The far reaching influence of a cervical lesion can readily be understood when we study the embryological development of cervical structures. To men- tion a nerve to a diagnostician should instantly bring to his mind all the structural associations of that nerve, its origin and distribution. The thought of its origin and distribution would naturally bring to mind an association of all the tis- sues depending on it for innervation. We would thus have a picture of a localized community of interests. Considering the similar distribution on the opposite side of the body we have pictured a sort of transverse division of the body. Every pair of spinal nerves, with the tissues directly under their influence, should form in our minds an entity, a mech- PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 77 anism in which reactions tend to take place independent of all other segments. Although we may think of a segment as a unit, the development of the body has coalesced its various structures in such a way as to locate the nervous control of any one structure, such as a muscle, in more than one seg- ment of the spinal cord, hence the controlling nerve to a muscle usually contains fibers from more than one segment. Ixisi persisting cephalic myotomes First three cephalk rriyotomcs Ceroicol m^otomes Caudal myotomcs Lumbar niyo tomes Sacrol myotomes PIG. 2. Scheme to illustrate the disposition of the myotomes in the embryo in relation to the head, trunk and limbs. Drawn by John Coms'tock (after Cunningham). 78 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY It is readily seen that there is an element of protection in this fact. A slight central lesion, i. e., an injury to the spinal cord, its membranes; or a pressure lesion due to disease of the bone, as in Pott's disease, might not produce complete loss of function in any single muscle because the governing nerve to that muscle is made up of fibers from two or more cord segments. Injury of a Single Nerve. Example : Posterior Thoracic. Complete paralysis of a single muscle is indicative of serious injury to its governing nerve at some point exterior Dorsal musciilatur IVirsnl division -f- uf a >[>inul / nerve Vjiluni ln'tiiT'Tii ilor.Mil tmcl vi>iilnil trunk musculature. FIG. 3. Diagram of a segment of the body and limb. Drawn by John Comstock (after Kollmann). to the central nervous system; in fact, beyond the point of coalescence of the fibers which form it. As an example of in- jury of a single nerve we may take a case of paralysis of the Serratus Magnus. This large muscle which acts to hold the posterior border of the scapula close to the thorax, when one is pushing with the hand or when taking a deep inspiration, is innervated by the posterior thoracic nerve which is made up of fibers from the upper portion of the brachial plexus, PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 79 fifth, sixth and seventh cervicals. Evidently an injury capa- ble of involving all the fibers of the posterior thoracic nerve and no others must be peripheral to the point of junction of its fibers from the fifth, sixth and seventh cervicals. A patient came to me in 1901 complaining of a peculiar loss of power of the right arm. He was a large, powerfully FIG. 4. Paralysis of right serratus magnus. Shows the promi- nence of the scapula, when it is the foundation for a move- ment such as extension of the arm to the side. built young man whose occupation, as a lumber shover, un- loading lumber on the San Pedro docks, was lost as a result of his condition. He gave a history of perfect health at all times. Said that two days previous, on Sunday, he had erected a tent for himself and as he was tightening the guy ropes he felt a sharp pain under his right shoulder blade, 80 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY which was immediately followed by inability to push with the right arm. The pain was of short duration. He de- scribed his position as a somewhat awkward one, i. e., he was kneeling on his right knee facing one of the tent guy rope pegs. With his right hand grasping the wooden clamp FIG. 5. Paralysis of right serratus magnus. Shows loss of power to rotate the scapula on the thorax. on the guy rope, he attempted to draw the guy rope taut. His great strength enabled him to do this, even though his right hand was considerably behind him. Figs. 4 and 5 show the effects of the paralysis of the Serratus Magnus in this case. A second case presenting exactly the same symptoms was seen in the clinic of the Pacific College of Osteopathy PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 81 a short time later. A telephone lineman, while engaged in stringing wire from pole to pole, made a vigorous awkward pull with the right hand some distance back of his hip. His legs were entwined about the crosspieces of the pole. At the time of greatest effort he felt a severe pain under the FIG. 6. Paralysis of right serratus magnus. Shows the "winged" condition of right scapula when arm is extended forward. right shoulder, followed by a profound sense of weakness in the shoulder and arm. The scapula immediately took a wing position and the patient could not shove with the right arm. These cases serve to give us a picture of the influence of position and motion of the shoulder as governed by one 82 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY nerve taking origin from three cervical segments. The lesion was not a spinal one, i. e., such as we have before de- scribed, neither was it one involving the cells of origin of this nerve in the spinal cord. The awkward position of the patients and their naturally great strength operated to in- FIG. 7. Paralysis of right serratus magnus. Shows outline of the vertebral borders of the scapulae when arms are extended forward. jure them in much the same way as the various nerve holds practiced by the jiu-jitsu wrestler. The pressure where the nerve crossed the ribs became too great and, hence, caused a severe trauma of the nerve. A Unilateral Cervical Spinal Lesion. The foregoing cases present the classical first symptoms of a severed motor PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 83 nerve. In order to present the symptoms accompanying a cervical lesion of the spinal lesion type we will describe a case which has been under observation for a long time. A woman, 41 years of age, has been under my professional care for three years. At the time of my first examination FIG. 8. Shows digitations of the FIG. 9. Paralysis of the right ser- serratus magnus and normal po- ratus magnus. No digitations are sition of the scapula. apparent. The scapula takes an extreme "wing" position. she appeared to be constitutionally ill, but careful examina- tion failed to discover any organic disease. Functional rhythm seemed discordant everywhere, hence our first ef- forts were to see that environment was fairly normal. Rest, nutritious diet and an optimistic atmosphere served to elim- inate many of the irritating symptoms. 84 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY The first examination of the spinal area discovered a lesion between the sixth and seventh cervical vertebrae. There was muscular ankylosis controlling this articulation and any attempted movement of the whole cervical area, sufficient to make demand on this joint, caused pain of a sharp neuralgic character to radiate into the left shoulder and arm. This pain could be produced most easily by either voluntary or passive rotation of the head to the left. A per- sistent effort to rotate the head in this direction caused the hand and arm to become numb. The hand would become bloodless, cold and moist; power to pick up a book or cup was greatly lessened. These symptoms would wear off in twenty-four to thirty-six hours, but the pain would leave her in almost a state of collapse. Massage of the arm and hand would bring no reaction ; heat also failed to stimulate cir- culation. These attacks had been brought on by any sort of house- work, at first only sweeping or such work as required arm leverage. Later it seemed as though the attacks came with- out any mechanical reason. They were accompanied by se- vere headache, tachycardia, meteorism, cold extremities and subnormal temperature. As might be expected in such a case the spinal lesion picture was a mixed one and it seemed, in view of so many symptoms of auto-intoxication, as though the mid-dorsal lesions were more nearly primary than the others. The sensitiveness of this spinal column was so great and so many compensations were in evidence that it was deemed best to attempt at first merely to simplify the symptom complex as much as possible by giving the spinal column physiological rest. The patient was kept in bed, thus reducing the demand on the weight carrying func- tion of the spine. This, and the psychological influence of trying a new plan under optimistic circumstances, served to reduce the number and complexity of symptoms, but in no wise changed the character, or viciousness, of the reactions arising from any disturbance of the articulation between the sixth and seventh cervical vertebrae. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 85 Treatment. Direct extension, slow and gentle, was at- tempted with marked success. Great care had to be exer- cised when releasing the extension, else the closure of the cervical articulations acted as though a nerve had been caught by direct pressure. Gradually the muscular tension around this joint was decreased and a slight degree of rota- tion toward the lesion, i. e., in this case the left side, could be accomplished without arousing severe pain. Digital pres- sure made against the left side of the sixth cervical spine would always cause a severe reaction. It was not possible to use any quick leverage or thrusting movements in this case for correction of the lesion until about eighteen months after we gave our initial treatment. A fairjy wide range of movement is now possible. The patient can voluntarily rotate the head to the left, but the sensitiveness on the left side of the cervical spine has never entirely disappeared. She lives a normal existence as a busy housewife. She has gained thirty pounds in weight. In this case the lesion is nearer center, i. e., closer to the spinal cord. The symptoms it presents are nearer in character to those of true central origin, except that they are unilateral. The local symptoms, pain, muscular tension, anaesthesia and vaso-constriction, are manifested in the area of distribution of the brachial plexus. Although the spinal muscles, whose tension constituted an ankylosis of the artic- ulation between the sixth and seventh cervical vertebrae, are innervated by branches of the posterior division of the lower cervical nerves, the reflexes, through the cells of origin of the lower cervical nerve trunks in the spinal cord, were manifested in all divisions of the brachial plexus, not only in the plexus but overflowed into the sympathetics, as shown by the vaso-motor disturbance and rapid heart action. There is a history of accident in this case which classes this lesion as traumatic. We have its effects shown in the reaction of the cerebro-spinal and sympathetic systems. In other words, the somatic and splanchnic structures, inner- vated by nerves from the lower cervical group, act and react 86 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY upon each other in an effort to adapt themselves to this lesion. As time went on the whole body was engaged in a losing effort at adaptation, simply because the lesion area was never given physiological rest, i. e., eliminating all de- mand on the weight carrying and balancing functions of the joint. The manipulation of this spinal joint was also in the nature of physiological rest because it reduced the hyper- tension and gradually reestablished normal functional move- ments. I i" FIG. 10. Paralysis of the trapezius and clavicular division of the sterno-cleido-mastoid due to death of some of the central cells of the spinal accessory nerve. Involvment of the Central Nerve Cells. The next step in severity in lesions is the involvment of the contents of the spinal canal, either through direct invasion of the tissues of the cord, or by pressure due to destruction of sections of the spinal column. The point we wish to illustrate is that the diagnostician must, in order to do scientific work, make a diagnosis based on the facts of anatomy as interpreted by embryology. If symptoms were noted and interpreted with the same precision with which the trouble man on a tele- phone system works out his problems we would not find so PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 87 many fantastic medical theories. It is, in large measure, the failure to teach the fundamentals of anatomy, physiology and pathology in a thorough manner that is responsible for the vagaries in medical practice. We are not forgetting the FIG. 11. Atrophy of right trapezius. fact that the public is not educated to this view and, there- fore, the one who attempts to act irrespective of the public's state of education has a hard row to hoe. Cervical Muscles. In the first case described, wherein the Serratus Magnus was paralyzed, we noted that it re- ceives its innervation from the cervical region. This makes it a cervical muscle. In this same sense the trapezius and latissimus dorsi are cervical muscles and will necessarily enter into any reactions involving the segments of the spinal cord which give origin to their nerves. In order to bring to your attention some of these peculiar changes which have 88 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY taken place in the development of the body, we will review a few of the most notable which will aid us in the interpre- tation of the effects of lesions. Embryology. Embryology is the "histology of very young beings." We may question here what contribution FIG. 12. Shows atrophy of right trapezius. the study of embryology has made which has practical sig- nificance in the diagnostic and therapeutic work of our prac- titioners. Since we have a "division of labor," as evidenced by a variety of tissues having special functions, and since self-preservation for purposes of perpetuating organisms of a similar character is a prime requisite of life, groups of tis- sues are associated into mechanisms. Comparative embry- ology has helped us to recognize, in part, these mechanisms. The recognition of the segmental arrangement of the body is one of the great contributions of embryologists. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 89 Segmentation. Early in the development of the em- bryo the mesodermic cells on either side -of the longitudinal groove show transverse divisions which form a series of seg- ments called protovertebrae or mesodermic somites. With- PIG. 13. Paralysis of right trapezius and portion of the sterno- cleido-mastoid. out our going into a lengthy description of the arrangement of the mesodermic cells to form the spinal column and its muscles, we want this early series of divisions kept in mind. "The appearance of the mesodermic somites is an im- portant phenomenon in the development of the embryo, since it influences fundamentally the future structure of the organism. If each pair of mesodermic somites be regarded as an element and termed a metamere or segment, then it may be said that the body is composed of a series of meta- meres, each more or less resembling its fellows, and succeed- ing one another at regular intervals. Each somite differen- tiates, as has been stated, into a scleratome and a myotome, and, accordingly, there will primarily be as many ver- tebrae and muscle segments as there are mesodermic 90 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY somites, or, in other words, the axial skeleton and the voluntary muscles of the trunk are primarily metameric. Nor is this all. Since each metamere is a distinct unit, it must possess its own supply of nutrition, and hence the pri- mary arrangement of the blood-vessels is also metameric, a branch passing off on either side from the main longitudinal arteries and veins to each metamere. And, further, each pair of muscle segments receives its own nerves, so that the ar- rangement of the nerves, again, is distinctly metameric. "This metamerism is most distinct in the neck and trunk regions, and at first only in the dorsal portions of these re- gions, the ventral portions showing metamerism only after the extension into them of the myotomes. But there is clear evidence that the arrangement extends also into the head and that this, like the rest of the body, is to be regarded as composed of metameres. There is reason, therefore, for be- fieving that the fundamental arrangement of all parts of the body is metameric, but though this arrangement is clearly defined in early embryos, it loses distinctness in latter periods of development. But even in the adult the primary metamerism is clearly indicated in the arrangement of the nerves and of parts of the axial skeleton, and careful study frequently reveals indications of it in highly modified mus- cles and blood-vessels "Although the dermal mesenchyme is unsegmental in character, yet the nerves which send branches to it are seg- mental, and it might be expected that indications of this con- dition would be retained by the cutaneous nerves, even in the adult. A study of the cutaneous nerve-supply in the adult realizes to a very considerable extent this expectation, the areas supplied by the various nerves forming more or less distinct zones and being, therefore, segmental. But a considerable commingling of adjacent areas has also oc- curred. Thus, while the distribution of the cutaneous branches of the fourth thoracic nerve, as determined experi- mentally in the monkey (Macacus), is distinctly zonal or segmental, the nipple lying practically in the' middle line of PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 91 the zone; the upper half of its area is also supplied or over- lapped by fibers of the third nerve and the lower half by fibers of the fifth, Fig. 14, so that any area of skin in the zone is innervated by fibers coming from at least two seg- m Dorsol YDorsol 3S"Dorsol FIG. 14. Showing overlapping of segmental sensory nerves Drawn by John Comstock (after Sherrington). mental nerves (Sherrington). And furthermore, the dis- tribution of each nerve crosses the mid-ventral line of the body, forming a more or less extensive crossed overlap. "And not only is there a confusion of adjacent areas, but an area may shift its position relatively to the deeper structures supplied by the same nerve, so that the skin over a certain muscle is not necessarily supplied by fibers from the nerve which supplies the muscle. Thus, in the lower half of the abdomen, the skin at any point will be supplied by fibers from higher nerves than those supplying the un- derlying muscles (Sherrington), and the skin of the limbs may receive twigs from nerves which are not represented at all in the muscle-supply (second and third thoracic and third sacral)." Widespread Influence of a Spinal Lesion. No skin area (or individual muscle) is supplied wholly by fibers from one segment of the spinal cord, but, in fact, is innervated by a nerve made up of fibers from two or more segments. A 92 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY spinal lesion of traumatic origin, granting that only one ar- ticulation is involved, will influence, in some cases, widely separated structures. For example: A lesion between the fourth and fifth cervical vertebrae might influence the dia- phragm, latissimus dorsi and trapezius, and through the spinal accessory the muscles of the larynx. Such apparent- ly widely separated structures must be kept in mind when considering a lesion at the location under discussion. Xor is this enough, because skin areas must be reckoned with. To learn these tissue associations, through the study of anatomy, is quite possible, but embryology furnishes an interpretation which tends to keep them in one's mind. When we know that the diaphragm^ trapezius and latissimus dorsi are essentially cervical muscles which have migrated but remain under the control of cervical nerves, we cease to think of one as the dividing wall between thorax and abdo- men, a great muscle of respiration; the others as constitut- ing the first layer of dorsal muscles. Association of Muscles Innervated by the Same Seg- ment. Such structures, as we have just mentioned, have migrated far from their original segments and have taken on functions and are concerned in reactions which are no longer segmental but have for their aim the preservation of the whole body, hence any injury to one, or all, of them would tend to produce a reflex localized in the segment from which they received their innervation. Compare with these migrated structures a segmental muscle of primitive charac- ter like the intertransversalis or interspinalis. The influence of these primitive muscles is wholly on the one articulation, but they are part of the mechanism supplied from the same segment as the migrated muscles. These small muscles, which are the intrinsic muscles of the spinal arthrodial joints, are important prime movers in the effort to maintain the erect position, i. e., they enter into the weight carrying and balancing functions of the spinal column. In case of their injury, a spinal lesion, the lost motion in the joint causes widespread influences, as heretofore mentioned. The PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 93 fifth layer of dorsal muscles, according to Gray, consists of a network of small muscles, the deepest of which extend between portions of two adjoining vertebrae; more super- ficially placed layers extend greater distances so as to influ- ence the movements between more than two vertebrae. The next layer of muscles, consisting of the erector spinae and its continuations, influence a greater number of vertebrae and bring rib positions under the influence of cervical nerves. The splenius capitis et colli, of the third layer, and the rhom- boids, of the second layer, are likewise supplied by cervical nerves. Thus we find the nerve which takes its exit between the fifth and sixth cervical vertebrae supplies a series of over- lapping muscles, the first one supplied, intertransversalis, being wholly intrinsic to the spine and the one on the sur- face of the body, the latissimus dorsi, having a very wide- spread influence. Effect of Sectioning Single Spinal Nerve. To cut the fifth cervical nerve at its exit from the intervertebral fora- men would not paralyze any but the intrinsic spinal muscles between the fifth and sixth cervical vertebrae. All muscles beyond that point would be weakened in proportion to the number of fibers their governing nerves received from that cut trunk. In other words, it appears probable that the sev- ering of the pair of nerves, the fifth cervical, could weaken the gross movements made by muscles innervated by them, but since only the intrinsic spinal muscles of one interverte- bral articulation are wholly supplied by them there would be no complete muscular paralysis apparent. The sixth cer- vical nerves innervate about twenty-eight pairs of muscles in the neck, chest, shoulders and upper extremities and back, and the diaphragm. Developmental Changes in Muscles. This gives us some idea of the great changes that have been consummated in the development of the body. The many changes in posi- tion and direction of fibers are recognized through the fact that they remain under the nerve control of the one seg- ment. The various changes in the development of muscles 94 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY are thus described by McMurrich : "It may be seen that the changes which occur in the myotomes may be referred to one or more of the following processes : "1. A longitudinal splitting into two or more portions, a process well illustrated by the trapezius and sternomas- toid, which have differentiated by the longitudinal splitting of a single sheet and contain, therefore, portions of the same myotomes. The sterno-hyoid has also differentiated by the same process, and indeed, it is of frequent occurrence. "2. A tangential splitting into two or more layers. Examples of this are also abundant and are afforded by the muscles of the fourth, fifth and sixth layers of the back, as recognized in English textbooks of anatomy, by the two oblique and transverse layers of the abdominal walls, and by the intercostal muscles and the transversus of the thorax. "3. A fusion of portions of successive myotomes to form a single muscle, again a process of frequent occur- rence, and well illustrated by the rectus abdominis (which is formed by the fusion of the ventral portions of the last six or seven thoracic myotomes) and by the superficial portions of the erector spinae. "4. A migration of parts of one or more myotomes over others. An example of this process is to be found in the latissimis dorsi whose history has already been referred to, and it is also beautifully shown by the serratus anterior and the trapezius, both of which have extended far beyond the limits of the segments from which they are derived. "5. A degeneration of portions or the whole of a myo- tome. This process has played a very considerable part in the evolution of the muscular system in the vertebrates. When a muscle normally degenerates, it becomes converted into connective tissue, and many of the strong aponeurotic sheets which occur in the body owe their origin to this pro- cess. Thus, for example, the aponeurosis, connecting the occipital and frontal portions of the occipito-frontalis is due to this process and is muscular in such forms as the lower monkeys, and a good example is also to be found in the apo- PRINCIPLES OF OSTEPOATHY 95 neurosis which occupies the interval between the superior and inferior serrati postici, these two muscles being contin- uous in lower forms. The strong lumbar aponeurosis of the oblique and transverse muscles of the abdomen are also good examples. "Indeed, in comparing one of the mammals with a mem- ber of one of the lower classes of vertebrates, the greater amount of connective tissue compared with the amount of muscular tissue in the former is very striking, the inference being that these connective-tissue structures (fasciae, apo- neurosis, ligaments) represent portions of the muscular tis- sue of the lower form (Bardeleben). Many of the accessory ligaments occurring in connection with diarthrodial joints, apparently owe their origin to a degeneration of muscle tis- sue, the fibular lateral ligament of the knee joint, for in- stance, being probably a degenerated portion of the per- oneous longus, while the sacro-tuburous ligament appears to stand in a similar relation to the long head of the biceps femoris (Sutton). "Finally, there may be associated with any of the first four processes a change in the direction of the muscle-fibers. The original antero-posterior direction of the fibers is re- tained in comparatively few of the adult muscles and excel- lent examples of the process here referred to are to be found in the intercostal muscles, and the muscles of the abdominal walls. In the musculature associated with the branchial arches the alteration in the direction of the fibers occurs even in the fishes, in which the original direction of the muscle-fibers is very perfectly retained in other myotomes, the branchial muscles, however, being arranged parallel with the branchial cartilages or even passing dorso-ven- trally between the upper and lower portions of an arch, and so forming what may be regarded as a constrictor of the arch. This alteration of direction dates back so far that the constrictor arrangement may well be taken as the pri- mary conditions in studying the changes which the branchial musculature has undergone in the mammalia." 96 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY Please note that, "since the relation between a nerve and the myotome belonging to the same is established at a very early period of development and persists throughout life, no matter what changes of fusion, splitting or migra- tion the myotome may undergo, it is possible to trace out more or less completely the history of the various myotomes by determining their segmental innervation." In view of this the clinician ought to be well versed in the knowledge of an- atomy, i. e., the gross structures innervated from the same segment of the cord. Much of the physical diagnostic work of the osteopath is based on the fundamental facts of em- bryology and anatomy, i. e., metamerism. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 97 CHAPTER VI. THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. The Medium of Communication. A masterful knowl- edge of nerve tissue and its arrangement in the body to form the nervous system is an absolute prerequisite for success in osteopathic practice. Every vital phenomenon calls for interpretation by the skillful physician. Interpretation can- not be attempted without a definite knowledge of structure and function of that tissue which acts as a medium of com- munication between all other elements of the body. The name of our system, Osteopathy, calls attention primarily to osseous structure, but it is only in connection with its effects on the tissues of communication and ex- change, vital phenomena, we are actually interested. The Attributes of Nerve Tissue. All physiological phenomena are characterized by the manifestation of at- tributes of nerve tissue, irritability, conductivity and tro- phicity. Motion, sensation and nutrition are the vital phe- nomena whose perversion constitutes disease. Therefore, whatever the pathological condition may be, we are called upon to note a change in some one or all of these attributes of nerve tissue. Nerve and Muscle Irritability. Scarcely any thought of muscle is ever complete without the nerve impulse which controls the muscle is also considered. For convenience sake we may separate nerve and muscle when teaching their spe- cial attributes, but for all practical purposes they are never separated. Muscle and nerve are both irritable, but we pay no attention to the irritability of muscle because under nor- mal conditions we do not see any evidences of specific mus- 98 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY cular irritability. We view muscular irritability as the re- sult of nerve irritability. Therefore nerve tissue is the chief irritable tissue. Irritability is an attribute of cell proto- plasm whereby chemical and physical phenomena are en- acted in response to irritants. Irritants may be mechanical, chemical, thermal and electrical. Practically all that physi- ologists know of the reactions of nerve tissue to irritants has been derived through experimentation by means of the elec- trical current. Osteopathists are bringing to light many facts concerning mechanical stimulation. Hydrotherapists have demonstrated the utility of thermal stimuli. Drug therapy makes use of the chemical form of stimulation. Conductivity. Nerve tissue is not only irritable but possesses the ability to transmit its irritability to other tis- sues and cause certain activities to be initiated there. Con- ductivity, the second vital attribute of nerve tissue, is the power to carry impulses from the point of irritation to other points in the nervous system. Irritability would be of small moment if conductivity were not present to transmit the message to the center and arouse response. The nerve cell and its axis-cylinder are a continuous mass of protoplasm and as long as the continuity is maintained conductivity will be maintained. Trophicity. The third attribute of nerve tissue, tro- phicity, is very imperfectly understood. We do not use this term here to represent so much the nutritional influences of the cell-body over its axis-cylinder as the influence exerted by nerve tissue over other body tissues, causing them to grow and prosper. This nutritional influence over other tissues is an attribute which we are compelled to note quite frequently in practice. There are individuals in whom motion and sensation are normal but nutrition fails, hence we note that in some cases mechanical lesions may cause only a slight change in the nerve tissue upon which they impinge, and this change is manifested by variation in nutrition of the part controlled by the irritated nerve. It is probably this attribute of nerve tissue which is perverted or lost when PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 99 the tissues refuse to take up certain chemical elements which are ordinarily normal to them ; for example, iron. In osteo- pathic practice we consider nutritional, disorders as being the result of perverted trophic influence of nerves. Of course in cases where it is known that the ingested food does not contain the required element or elements we must regulate the diet. But there are many cases where all conditions ap- pear normal, except that the tissues do not take up nourish- ment as they should. In these cases we search for lesions in the same way we would if motion or sensation showed perversion or loss. This phase of our subject can best be considered at another time. Unity of the Nervous System. The unity of the nervous system is a physiological fact, and this brings deep and superficial areas in close relation. Every portion of the body is able through the medium of the nervous system to work in harmony with every other part. Physiologists divide the nervous system into central and peripheral portions, but for practical purposes this division is of little use to us when attempting to make use of the irritability and conductivity of the nervous system for therapeutic purposes. Since all portions of the nervous system are connected there must be some place where impressions made upon terminal nerve filaments may be assembled, co-ordinated and responded to harmoniously. Wherever large numbers of nerve cells are assembled we expect to find such duties performed. Other Systems of Integration. Any influence which we have upon the body through therapeutic methods must be based on the unity of the body. That the body is a unit must be constantly borne in mind, not only a unit because of the nervous system but also a mechanical unit, formed by its fibrous tissues and a chemical unit through its circulating media. The nervous system is so preeminently the master tissue that, when we think of any integrative reaction, we attribute it to this tissue, which not only takes note of im- pressions secured by contact but reaches out into surround- ing space and causes the body to react to things at a distance. 100 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY Mechanical Irritation. The particular therapeutic pro- cedures with which we are here dealing are aimed to affect by contact and hence we are most interested in those re- flexes originating through stimuli applied to skin, visceral and somatic tissues. Structural displacements in the human body act as mechanical irritants to nerve tissue, changing the chemical and physical condition of the protoplasm and thus altering its irritability, either plus or minus according to the intensity of the stimulation. The displaced structures may have other detrimental influences on nerve tissue, for instance the pressure brought to bear on the nourishing liquids surrounding the nerve, i. e., the blood and lymph, may cause sufficient chemical change in these liquids to materially affect irritability of the protoplasm of the nerves which they are expected to nourish. Effect on Conductivity. Conductivity is not destroyed by these slight mechanical pressures. If the protoplasm of the cell and axis-cylinder were unable to conduct impulses and project them in such manner as to reach other cell bodies of the nervous system our work would be very lim- ited. Conductivity depends on the continuity of protoplasm. The mechanical irritations we deal with in osteopathic prac- tice seldom destroy conductivity. If they did so they would cease to become irritants the moment conductivity was lost. Other irritants may act for a time on the severed portions of protoplasm, but the original lesion* would have destroyed the continuity of the protoplasm. Afferent and Efferent Fibers. The fibers composing a nerve bundle may be efferent or afferent so far as direction of impulse is concerned. Efferent fibers may be further dif- ferentiated by the names, motor, vaso-motor, secretory, ac- cording to the structures in which they end. Afferent fibers are usually termed sensory to denote their function of carry- ing impulses to the central nervous system. Nerve trunks contain all of these various fibers, therefore, pressure will irritate all of the fibers and conductivity of individual fibers .will transmit the impulses in the direction of the normal -I -. I, I- I- , (J (- CGU.EG-E GF OS PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 101 nerve impulse, thus causing contraction in the voluntary or involuntary muscles or activity of secretory tissues; sensory impulses will be transmitted to the central nervous system and will purport to come from the terminal distribution of the sensory nerve. If the afferent impulse is such a one as will reach the patient's consciousness, we find that the cen- tral cells are misled as to the location of the stimulus and hence manifest a response in the supposed area. It is not necessary for the patient to be conscious of any irritation in order to bring about this result. Organization of the Nerve Bundle. The organization of the nerve bundle complicates our ideas of irritability and conductivity in the protoplasm of the cell and axis-cylinder of a nervous unit. Complexity of action and reaction in- creases as we near the central nervous system. We have considered that all impulses generated in the protoplasm of a nerve cell and axis-cylinder have been transmitted to all parts of that unit of nerve tissue, but have not in any way influenced any other unit. We have not considered the rela- tions of cell bodies in the central system. It is sufficient for our present purpose to note that the afferent fibers enter the spinal cord as the posterior roots and that their cells are in the ganglia of these posterior roots. Intraspinal Fibers. The efferent fibers leave the cord as its anterior roots and their bodies are located in the an- terior cornua of the gray matter of the cord. Upon careful study of the spinal cord there are found other cells and axis- cylinders which do not leave the cord but serve to connect the afferent and efferent elements and distribute impulses within the cord. These latter are found in enormous num- bers in all portions of the central nervous system. Segmentation of the Spinal Cord. The first fact of great interest to us, osteopathically, is the segmentation of the spinal cord. This is only relative in character, but yet is apparent, not only histologically but pathologically. We note that according to distribution of afferent fibers in the T/V}Q3T20 3 102 303JJ0 1 " PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY - N.to rcctus lateral;! .M . antic, minor. .- Anastomosis uii' ' -Anastomosis uwth pneumogastnc. -N. to rectus antic. major. N. to mastoid region Qreat auricular N. -Transvene cervical N. r ---H. to trapezius, Ang. scop, and Ehomboki -.-Supra clavicular N. Supra acroimai H. -Phrentc r-N.to tevatgr ana. scop. ti.io rnomboias Subicapular N. aubclavvcular N. N.to pectoralis major. -Circiunfle* N. MusaUo cuwuvtl Median. W. Radial N. -Dinar N. Internal cutaneous N. internal cutaneous N. Ilio-hypogastrtc N. - Uto-vnguvnal N. Ext. cutaneous N. -Qenito-crural N. Anterior crural (kmora^N. Obturator N. 'Superior gluteal N. N.to pyriforrms . N to gemellui superior M to gemeilui inferior. \ 14 t. Quadratui Small sciatic N 3ciatvc.N FIG. 15. Diagram of spinal segmentation, showing relation between the points of origin of the spinal nerves and their points of emergence from the spinal column; also their distribution to the muscles. Drawn by John Comstock (after Dejerine et Thomas, modified by Starr). PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 103 spinal cord impulses are diffused both above and below the point of entrance. The cell bodies of the anterior roots are also somewhat diffused, but in practice we note that afferent and efferent impulses seem to be correlated within compara- tively narrow limits in the spinal cord. How the impulses set up in the protoplasm of an afferent fiber are transmitted from it to the protoplasm of other cells located in the spinal cord and thence transmitted to the protoplasm of efferent cells is not known, nor is it necessary for us to thoroughly understand the method in this instance so long as we recog- Pifeterior root FIG. 16. Diagram showing two segments of the spinal cord. nize the results. Our specific knowledge must comprehend the exact point of entrance to and exit from the spinal cord of each nerve bundle and the peripheral distribution of the same. Having a knowledge of the structure, the function comes naturally as a result. Segmental Integration. A segment of the spinal cord, i. e., that portion giving rise to a pair of spinal nerves may be conceived to act independently of other segments. Of course it would be difficult to demonstrate this, but for pur- poses of analysis we may be permitted to segregate the various divisions and nervous elements so as to better un- derstand the structures with which we are dealing. The 104 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY central nervous system is constantly receiving impulses from afferent fibers and co-ordinating them. We are almost entirely dependent on reflex action for the effects we secure on deep tissues. Our manipulations affect sensory nerves in Muscle PIG. 17. Diagrammatic representation of a single spinal segment and a simple reflex arc. Drawn by John Comstock. skin, muscle and synovial membranes. These impulses are carried to the central nervous system and transformed into efferent impulses. Ceaseless Play of Reflexes. During life there is no period when the body is not dependent on external stimuli. These ordinary mechanical and thermal stimuli keep a con- stant stream of impulses entering the central system to be translated into stimuli of muscle and gland. This ceaseless PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 105 play of reflexes may vary in intensity, but so long as life lasts they are demonstrable. We expect the reflex to be initiated by the sensory side of the reflex arc, therefore the intensity of muscular contraction and glandular secretion is governed by the intensity of the initiatory impulse. The Simple Reflex. The simplest reaction in the ner- vous system may be conceived as a sensory impulse trans- mitted to the spinal cord over a sensory nerve and from the cord over a motor nerve. The tissue in which the motor or efferent nerve ends will express reaction to the stimuli com- ing over the sensory or afferent side of this reflex arc. The Sensory Side of the Reflex Arc. The sensory side of the reflex arc is the one upon which we must depend to initiate reactions. The segment coordinates the sensory im- pulses reaching it over the afferent roots of its nerve trunks. By following the distribution of its nerves we can determine what cells its afferent fibers arise in and what cells its effer- ent fibers innervate. Taking a mid-dorsal segment we find its pair of nerve trunks dividing and branching so as to sup- ply skin, muscle and viscera. All of these parts must have sensory and motor fibers and since our spinal nerves are mixed nerves, i. e., have afferent and efferent fibers, we know that a segment receives sensory impulses from skin, muscle and viscera and the segment integrates these impulses and sends out efferent impulses coordinated for the best good of itself and the tissues it innervates. Protective Reactions. A reflex is primarily a protec- tive reaction. It is an effort on the part of the structures entering into the reaction to protect that of which they are a part. It seems that the sole object of a reflex is self de- fense. Therefore a study of reflexes will tend to make symp- tomatology far more interesting. The integration expressed in the reactions of a spinal segment mirror the manifold re- lations existing between the cells which constitute the ac- tive elements in a metamere or body segment. The seg- mental structure of the cord and the reflex action manifested therein show that, on the whole, a definite muscle group and 106 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY a definite cutaneous area are innervated from a limited por- tion of the central system. Therefore we may count on the stimuli originated in the cutaneous area being reflexed to the definite muscular area. Example. An example in practice is as follows : Pa- tient's head is drawn slightly to the left side. Complains of pain shooting to the left shoulder and over the left clavicle whenever movement is attempted. History of exposure to draught of cold air. Physical examination discloses con- traction of left trapezius, levator anguli scapulae and sca- leni. Pressure upon these muscles causes pain. When in- structed to take a full inspiration, patient says he cannot on account of pain, which is sharp and darting in character and radiates over the intraclavicular portion of the left chest. When we consider the muscles involved and the area of painful sensations, our attention is immediately called to a definite segment of the cord, in this case the point of origin of the third and fourth cervical nerves. The cold air striking the skin intensified the normal stimuli and the efferent im- pulses from that segment of the cord were intensified as the direct result of the cutaneous irritation. The point of irrita- tion, the cutaneous area, governed the location of the reflex. So long as the original stimulus was only moderately inten- sified all the reflexes emanated from one segment of the cord, but if they had been more intense or continued longer, we might have found a greater area reflexly affected. The stim- uli which would have reached the cord would have been more widely diffused above and below the point of entrance. Comparative Segmentation. Since we know that the highly organized spinal cord of man is not to be compared with the same structure in lower forms of animal life and that segmentation in it is illy defined, the practical question arises as to how much dependence we can put upon reflexes in the human nervous system. Will the reflexes guide us to definite segments of the spinal cord? Experience teaches us that a thorough knowledge of the distribution of afferent and efferent nerves in man will interpret reflexes with suffi- PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 107 cient exactness and invariably lead the investigator to a spinal segment which is itself affected or is coordinating im- pulses from a known sensory area. Efferent Impulses. When we follow the efferent im- pulses to their points of distribution our work is greatly complicated. To reason from contracted voluntary muscle to cutaneous sensory area is a comparatively simple pro- cedure, but to start with the sensory impulse and trace it through the central system and thence along efferent path- ways, to estimate its final effects, as mechanical work done by muscle and gland in many combinations, requires a con- siderable knowledge of structure and function of all parts of the human system. Efferent Fibers to the Sympathetic Ganglia. Many of the efferent fibers of the cerebro-spinal system take their course through the sympathetic ganglia and are distributed in that system to plain muscle and secretory cells of the body. It has been ascertained by various careful observers that these efferent fibers, after entering the sympathetic system, either end in the ganglia nearest their point of emer- gence from the cord or pass up or down to ganglia above or below the one originally entered. Some fibers pass through these ganglia and end in the more peripherally placed plexuses. Ganglionic Control. Wherever nerve cells are accumu- lated a certain amount of independent action is probably carried on. Terminal filaments of efferent fibers in sympa- thetic spinal ganglia are in relation with a large number of cells and the number of fibers leaving the ganglia is greater than those entering. Therefore diffusion of impulses from these ganglia must be very great. The accumulation of sensory impulses in these ganglia may be equally as great. Each ganglion must have a dominant influence over a cer- tain visceral area, and this influence is subsidiary to the control exercised by the segment of spinal cord to and from which the larger number of fibers proceed. 108 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY Gland MU5d. Vessel PIG. 18. Diagram of sensory and motor fields co-ordinated in a spinal segment; and the inhibitory influence of the brain. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 109 Three Fields for Reception of Sensory Impressions. The three original layers of the embryo, epiblast, endoblast and mesoblast, forming skin, mucous membrane and the intervening tissues, are represented by sensory fibers which connect them with the central nervous system. The outer surface of the body is supplied with extero-ceptive, the in- ternal surface with intero-ceptive and the intercellular sur- faces with proprio-ceptive fibers. The coordination of these various receptive fields is the duty of the segment. We have reactions in this segment which represent the effort of the segment to adapt itself to external conditions. The external surface registers in the segment the conditions of the out- side world, so far as the special endings of its sensory nerves are capable. The internal surface takes cognizance of the presence of material in contact with it which in most cases may serve as food. Not all spinal segments have this vis- ceral division represented in them. Proprio-ceptive Field. The surface of the individual cells, which compose the bulk of the body, are represented in the segment by a large number of sensory fibers which register their conditions and needs. This proprio-ceptive field is an exceedingly large one and is usually little thought of when considering the reactions of the nervous system. It is the proprio-ceptive nerves which are affected in any trauma of joints or other deep structures. The sense of po- sition, muscular tension and weight are to a large extent de- pendent on these fibers. Segmental Coordination. The segment of the spina! cord governing a metamere receives sensory stimuli from three different receptor fields, the external and internal sur- faces and the bulk of the tissue between these surfaces. The harmonious functioning of the whole segment is the result of the coordination of all the impulses from these three re- ceptor fields, expressed in effector tissues, muscle and gland. These reactions represent the segment's effort to meet the conditions of its environment, plus its own inter-cellular 110 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY condition, to the best advantage. In other words, its reac- tions represent its effort to maintain its existence. Plurisegmental Control. Just as no skin area, or mus- cle, other than a distinctly segmental one. as mentioned in Chapter V, no viscus is wholly under the influence of one segment. Therefore one segment is merely a contributor of a partial influence over skin, muscle and internal organ. One segment may furnish the majority of fibers to a certain per- ipheral nerve, but complete control is divided between two or more segments. This seems to indicate that physiologi- cal centers in the spinal cord consist of series of cells, placed vertically, whose fibers thus emerge at various levels. With this fact in view we recognize that any reaction to stimuli, arising in any one of the three receptor fields, will be ex- pressed in effector tissues belonging to at least two or more metameres. Therefore any protective reaction in spinal areas will involve more than one spinal articulation. Clinical Evidence, Group Lesions. This agrees with the clinical findings. Take spinal tenderness for example : A point is usually found which shows considerable tender- ness and this tenderness shades off through a metamere above and below the most sensitive point. Contraction of a spinal muscle, i. e., of a portion of the erector spinae, extends over two or more metameres. Osseous lesions are usually of the group character. The approximation or separation of two spinous processes represents the involvement of at least four vertebrae, i. e., one above and one below the center of the lesion. Likewise, the lateral deviation of a spinous pro- cess means the involvement of three vertebrae. Thus we see that all reactions are practically pluri-segmental instead of segmental. The vertical arrangement of the governing cells in the spinal cord is the foundation for this. Just as we noted the migration of muscles for purposes of better guard- ing of the body, so also we note that segments have divided their influence with adjoining ones. Differentiation of Spinal Lesions. In view of these facts it is hard, in fact impossible, to differentiate spinal le- PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 111 i.e. MOTOR Stevno-mastoid 3 ^ Trapezium 4 } Diaphragm 5 \5erratu5] J '5houVder Arm Hand . (Ulnar loiueit) Intercostal muscles Abdominal tnusciu $ 1 \ Fkxon> , Hvp. 3 E>* J J jAdductow(z) hip y I [Adductors. ^-^on.Knce. >Muids> of U< moving foot ) Pcrineal ^nnd anal I muiclej 3EN30BY | Neck and scalp > NecK and shoulder Shoulder Arm- Hand Front of thorax. I Xiphoid area Abdomen (Umbilicus, 10 th) [Buttock, I upper part l(3roin and scrotum (front) 'outer side Thigh- front vnncr side Leg, inner side Buttock. loujer part Back of IhigH L 9l except and-f inner part footj jPmnccum and anus 5km from coccyx to anus REFLEX Scapular ^Epigastric . Abdominal Cretnaaterc >Knt joint uluteul Foot v.tonu.- r"lol co*d I Internal ctiroi artery Superior ceivicol ^ donglion 2nd dorsol <4oru5lvorv y y FIG. 23. Diagram showing cilio-spinal center and the course of the nerves governing accommodation of the eye to light and distance. Drawn by John Comstock (after Schultz). the cornea. This condition was present for five years. The inflammation had traveled to the nasal duct, and as a result it was closed. The duct had been opened by the surgeon's knife long before we saw the case. A close examination of the center likely to be irritated in such a condition disclosed the fact that the area between the first and third dorsal vertebrae was exceedingly sensitive, and, most interesting of all, pressure on this area caused intense pain in the in- flamed eye, and caused the pupil to dilate. The muscles in PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 137 the interscapular area were very much contracted. Treat- ment was given, and in proportion to the amount of relaxa- tion gained in the interscapular area, the inflammation in the conjunctiva subsided. After one month's treatment, the patient could see to thread a needle, using only the formerly diseased eye. Pressure at the third dorsal spine still causes the patient to speak of a sense of pressure or swelling in the eye. (Two years have passed since this was written. The patient has continued to have perfect use of the eye.) The following extract from "The Osteopath" in regard to this case is of interest to us while considering the sympa- thetic nervous system : "It is not surprising that diseases of the eye should affect the sympathetic nerve, and that by that path the center known as the 'cilio-spinal.' But by what sensory path would the influence of pressure be carried to the eye? We know of none. From the first two dorsal nerves, which are identical with the cilio-spinal center, sympathetic fibers are distributed to the dilating muscle fibers of the iris, and when stimulated cause dilatation of the pupils. From the third dorsal nerve fibers are distributed which regulate the caliber of the blood vessels of the eye. Under the pressure, either set of these fibers may be af- fected. The first may be stimulated, dilating the muscles of the iris so as to press upon filaments of sensitive nerves; or, the pressure may inhibit the vaso-constrictor function of the other nerve, and by dilating the arterioles cause pressure upon the sensitive nerve; or, both causes may operate and thus induce the pain. The abundant supply of sensory nerves to the ciliary muscle, iris and cornea, from the nasal branch of the ophthalmic division of the fifth nerve and the short ciliary branches from the ciliary (lenticular or ophthal- mic) ganglion makes it conceivable that any change of ar- terial pressure might affect these nerves to the extent of causing pain. It seems reasonable to conclude that there was no inflammation, but congestion, and partial paralysis of the vaso-constrictor nerve." (A. E. Brotherhood, D. O., D. Sc. O., in "The Osteopath," Vol. V., No. III.) 138 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY Effects of Treatment, First to Seventh Dorsal. Treat- ment in the interscapular region, first to seventh vertebrae, may reasonably be expected to affect the heart beat, the nu- tritional circulation in the lungs, and the circulation in the upper extremities, head, neck and face. The remainder of the dorsal area constitutes what is called the splanchnic region. Three splanchnic nerves are given off from this region to be distributed to the preverte- bral plexuses in the abdominal cavity. The Great Splanchnics. The first is called the Great Splanchnic and takes origin from the sixth to the tenth dor- sal nerves, and probably receives many filaments from the upper dorsal nerves. It is a large nerve trunk and contains many medullated nerves from the cerebro-spinal system. Its course is downward and inward, perforates the crus of the diaphragm and ends in the semilunar ganglion. Some fibers end in the renal and suprarenal plexuses. Lesser Splanchnic. The Lesser Splanchnic arises from the tenth and eleventh ganglia and their connecting cord. It also takes a downward and inward course, piercing the <;rus of the diaphragm, and ends in the Coeliac Plexus. It communicates with the Great Splanchnic, and sometimes sends fibers to the renal plexus. Least Splanchnic. The Least, or Renal Splanchnic, arises from the last thoracic ganglion and ends in the renal plexus. It sometimes communicates with the lesser splanch- nic. Functions. First, vaso-constriction ; second, viscero- inhibition. I mention merely those functions which have been well demonstrated by physiological experiments and osteopathic practice. Theory. The osteopath reasons as follows concerning this Splanchnic area : Since the Great Splanchnic ends in the semilunar ganglion, from this ganglion and plexuses around it fibers are distributed to the blood vessels of the stomach, liver, spleen and intestines ; therefore, we operate in the area between the fifth and tenth dorsal spines for PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 139 vaso-motor effects on the above-mentioned viscera. Again, the Great Splanchnic sends viscero-inhibitory fibers to the muscular layers of the stomach and intestines; hence, we control excessive muscular activity in these viscera by re- moving obstructions to the normal inhibitory influence of these nerves. The Lesser Splanchnic has the same func- tions, but exercises its functions chiefly on that portion of the intestinal muscular layer comprised in the area supplied by the superior mesenteric artery; therefore, the tenth and eleventh dorsal area is a vaso-motor and motor-inhibitory center for a segment of the intestines. The renal splanch- nics exert a vaso-constrictor influence on the blood vessels of the kidneys, and the osteopath secures vaso-motor effects on the blood vessels of the kidneys, and hence effects secre- tion by removing obstructions to the normal influence of this nerve. The twelfth dorsal spine marks a renal center. These nerves contain sensory fibers which carry sensation from the prevertebral plexus in the abdomen to the spinal cord. Therefore, a disturbance in the viscera can reflex its painful sensations to the area of greater sensibility which is in close central connection with the seat of disturbance. It should be borne in mind that the power of movement resides in the muscular wall of the intestine and is initiated by the Automatic Ganglia in its walls, which are excited by the pressure of food. We may state that the intestines pos- sess an intrinsic nerve apparatus which initiates peristalsis, but the control of the movement after it is initiated is exer- cised by cerebro-spinal nerves. The pneumogastric nerve exercises a decided motor influence over the intestines. As previously stated, the great and lesser splanchnics are inhibitory nerves to the musculature of the intestines. Lumbar Ganglia. Four small ganglia, connected above and below by intercommunicating fibers, constitute the lumbar portion of the sympathetic ganglia. These ganglia are connected with the cerebro-spinal lumbar nerves by rami-communicantes. The first and second ganglia are the 140 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY only ones in this region receiving white rami-communi- cantes. The functions which we found were exercised in the lower dorsal area are continued into the lumbar ganglia as far as the second. These ganglia send fibers to the aortic plexus, the hypogastric plexus, and thence to the pelvic plexus. They also send branches, as in other regions, to the blood vessels supplying the bones and ligaments of the spinal column. Since vaso-constrictor fibers do not enter the sympa- thetic ganglia below the second lumbar, we may reasonably expect to influence the circulation of the lower extremities by manipulations in this area. The descending colon and rectum are supplied with vis- cero-inhibitory fibers from this area. Vaso-constrictor fibers are supplied to the blood vessels in the lower portion of the abdomen. The influence exerted by the lumbar sympa- thetics may be tabulated as follows : 1st: Viscero-inhibitory to descending colon and rectum. 2nd : Vaso-constrictor to lower abdominal blood vessels. 3rd : Vaso-constrictor to the blood vessels of the penis. 4th : Vaso-motor fibers to the blood vessels of the blad- der. 5th : Vaso-motor fibers to the blood vessels of the uterus. 6th : Vaso-constrictor to the blood vessels of the pelvic viscera. 7th: Motor to vas deferens (male), round ligament (female). 8th : Vaso-constrictor to the blood vessels of the lower extremities. Sacral Ganglia. The pelvic portion of the sympathetic chain usually consists of four ganglia situated along the inner side of the sacral foramina, and communicates with the four upper sacral nerves. These ganglia are connected with each other, as in other regions. The two chains con- nect by the Ganglion Impar on the anterior surface of the coccyx. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 141 Distribution. The rami-efferentes are distributed to the pelvic plexus; or a plexus on the middle sacral artery, and to vertebrae and ligaments in the sacral region. "Through the pelvic plexus, the pelvic viscera are sup- plied with motor, vaso-motor and secretory fibers." (Ger- rish's Anatomy, page 648.) The rami-communicantes in the sacral region are gray, hence, the influence of the cerebro-spinal system is carried down from the upper lumbar ganglia. "Below the second lumbar vertebra they are also of the gray peripheral variety." ("Abdominal Brain," page 31.) In the sacral region the spinal nerves are distributed directly to the pelvic viscera; some fibers pass into the pelvic plexus, thence to the viscera. The sacral region offers an area in which the osteo- path can secure an influence on pelvic viscera without the extensive sympathetic connections encountered in other regions of the spine. Function. These sacral nerves are : 1st: Vaso-dilator to the vessels of the penis and vulva. 2nd : Motor fibers to the rectum. 3rd : Motor fibers to the bladder. 4th : Motor fibers to the uterus. Cardiac Plexus. The three great prevertebral plex- uses must now engage our attention. The first one, the car- diac plexus, is situated at the base of the heart, and in the concavity of the arch of the aorta; this portion is called su- perficial, while the deep portion lies between the trachea and the aorta. Position and Formation. The cardiac plexus is formed by fibers from the pneumogastric and cervical cardiac sym- pathetics. "It is very common to find upper cervical cardiac branches of the vagus and sympathetic united to form a common trunk. In other cases, the nerves branch and com- municate with each other in a plexiform manner." (Mor- ris's Anatomy.) 142 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY The cardiac nerves form the cervical sympathetic chain ; all enter the cardiac plexus, but their distribution is varia- ble. The superficial plexus receives the "left superior car- diac nerve of the sympathetic and the left inferior cervical cardiac branch of the pneumogastric." (Morris's Anat- omy.) The deep cardiac plexus "receives all the other cardiac nerves." From the superficial cardiac plexus branches pass to the plexus around the right coronary artery and pass to the left lung to join the anterior pulmonary plexus. From the deep cardiac plexus branches are distributed to the anterior pulmonary plexus of both sides, the left coro- nary plexus, right auricle, superficial cardiac plexus, and right coronary plexus. Pulmonary Plexus. The anterior pulmonary plexus is formed by a branch of the pneumogastric and the sympa- thetic. It is situated on the anterior surface of the bronchi and the branches enter the lung on the bronchus. The posterior pulmonary plexus is formed by the pneu- mogastric and fibers from the second, third and fourth tho- racic ganglia of the sympathetic. Its branches enter the lung on the posterior aspect of the bronchus. Physiology. Physiological experiments have demon- strated that the pneumogastric is motor to the muscles of the bronchioles, sensory and trophic, while the sympathetics are vaso-motor and trophic. Therefore, the function of the lungs and heart can be affected by operating on the inter- scapular region. Functions. The functions of the thoracic plexus are : 1st: Cardiac augmentors, per sympathetics. 2nd : Cardiac inhibitor, per pneumogastric. 3rd : Vaso-constrictor to coronary arteries, per pneumo- gastric. 4th : Vaso-constrictor to bronchial arteries, per sympa- thetic, first to fifth dorsal. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 143 5th: Sensory fibers to the pleura and lungs, peV sympa- thetic, first to fifth dorsal. 6th : Sensory fibers to heart and pericardium, per sym- pathetic, second to fifth dorsal. 7th : Broncho-constrictor, per pneumogastric. 8th : Broncho-dilator, per pneumogastric. 9th : Sensory fibers to mucous lining of air passages, per pneumogastric. Treatment. A true inhibitory treatment would pro- duce greatest effect on the heart, if administered over the middle and inferior cervical ganglia. The heart would be slowed. Such a treatment is rarely given, because nearly every case presents some physical lesion which, if removed, allows normal impulses to meet in the cardiac plexus and be re-organized for proper distribution. Always bear in mind that a plexus is a re-organizing center for nervous impulses, and we can hope only to regu- late the function of an organ by attempting to equalize the impulses reaching its controlling plexus. This equalizing process is not ordinarily secured by the administration of inhibition to a definite nerve trunk which ends in the plexus, but by removing a lesion, usually bony or muscular which is affecting the nerve fiber in the direction of increase or decrease of function. The region between the scapulae is in close central connection with the lungs, pleura, heart and pericardium ; hence, painful sensations originating in these organs may be referred to this area. The muscles in this area will contract reflexly from irritation of these organs, or from exposure of the skin over them to a change of temperature. Hence, in the first instance the contraction is a secondary lesion; in the latter, a primary one. Pressure in this area practically causes relaxation of muscles, removes a lesion ; but the patient experiences a cessation of pain, freer respiration, and less rapid action of the heart. 144 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY Restilts. After administering inhibitory pressure, the osteopath realizes that the muscles under his fingers are softer than formerly; then he knows that he has actually changed the physiological condition of an important tissue. Argument. Coincident with the softening of the mus- cles, the heart beats slower; therefore, he has removed an irritant to the augmentor fibers of the heart ; the respiration is deeper, therefore a change has been secured in the ac- tivity of the walls of the thorax, and in the circulation of blood in the bronchial and pulmonary blood vessels ; the pain has decreased, therefore the sensory nerves in the lung tissue are no longer irritated by hyperaemic pressure or toxic substances in the blood. This illustrates to you why the osteopath studies and treats the interscapular region so carefully. Solar Plexus. In the abdominal cavity we find the so- lar plexus, which on account of its great size and wonderful distribution, Byron Robinson calls the "Abdominal Brain." Location and Formation. It is placed in front of the aorta at its entrance into the abdomen, and surrounds the Coeliac Axis. It consists of two semilunar ganglia, which are placed on each side of the coeliac axis, and are connected by a large number of fibers which pass above and below the coeliac axis. From this circle of ganglia and nerves, fibers are given off which are joined by branches of the right pneu- mogastric, and by both small splanchnics. The great splanchnic ends in the semilunar ganglion. Distribution. The branches of distribution from the solar plexus are prolonged on the branches of the abdominal aorta as subsidiary plexuses, taking their names from the arteries they accompany, as splenic, gastric, hepatic, dia- phragmatic, suprarenal and renal, superior mesenteric, in- ferior mesenteric, aortic and spermatic. The ultimate dis- tribution of the branches of the solar plexus is to the mus- cular and secretory tissues of all the abdominal viscera, and PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 145 to the muscular coat of the arteries supplying these viscera. This great plexus is the vaso-motor center for the ab- dominal viscera. "It is connected with almost every organ in the body, with a supremacy over visceral circulation, with a control over visceral secretion and nutrition, with a reflex influence over the heart that often leads to fainting, and may even lead to fatality." "Abdominal Brain," page 76. Function. We find that the great and the small splanchnics and right pneumogastric are the chief contribu- tors to the solar plexus, and in order to get a clear idea of the functions of this plexus, we may tabulate them as fol- lows: 1st: Viscero-motor to stomach, small intestines, as far as sigmoid flexure, per pneumogastric. 2nd : Sensory to stomach and small intestines, per pneumogastric. "If the pneumogastric nerve be divided during full di- gestion in a living animal, in which a gastric fistula has been established, so that the interior of the stomach can be examined, the muscular contractions will be observed to cease instantly; the mucous membrane to become pale and flaccid; the secretion of the gastric juice to be arrested, and the organ to have become insensible. There can be no doubt, also, that stimulation of the pneumogastric nerves causes the stomach to contract, and that digestion may, to a certain extent, at least, be re-established by stimulation of the peripheral extremities of the divided nerves."' (Chap- man's Phys., page 680.) 3rd : Viscero-inhibitory, per splanchnics. 4th : Vaso-motor, per splanchnics. 5th : Sensory, per splanchnics. 6th : Sensory, per pneumogastric and splanchnics. The fibers of the great and small splanchnics come from the sympathetic ganglia in the dorsal region, sixth to eleventh. 146 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY These ganglia may receive fibers from some of the up- per dorsal. Centers. The facts just stated give us a foundation for osteopathic treatment to influence motion, sensation, se- cretion, and vaso-motion in the abdominal viscera. The area in the vertebral column which we may consider as con- taining centers for these various functions lies between the sixth and eleventh dorsal spines. The fibers from this region have a segmental distribution to the abdominal viscera; therefore, the stomach, liver, gall bladder, spleen and in- testines each have a limited portion of this area which is their special center; at least, painful sensations are reflexed from them to a definite point in the vertebral column be- tween the sixth and eleventh dorsal spines. The enormous regulative influence which can be excited by an osteopathic treatment in this area is being demonstrated daily. We have already mentioned the fact that the intestines will contract after being separated from the body, thereby proving that the intrinsic power to cause movement lies in the nervous mechanism in the gut walls. Keep constantly in mind the regulative character of the impulses which enter the "abdominal brain" over the pneumogastric and splanchnic nerves. The vaso-motor phenomena in this area have been dis- cussed in another chapter. Hypogastric Plexus Location and Formation. The great re-organizing center for the pelvic viscera is called the hypogastric plexus, which lies anterior to the fifth lum- bar vertebra. It is formed by a continuation of fibers from the aortic plexus which are joined by fibers from the lum- bar sympathetic ganglia. In front of the sacrum the plexus divides into two portions, which join the pelvic plexuses lying on each side of the rectum and bladder, in the male, and of the rectum, vagina and bladder in the female. Pelvic Plexus. These pelvic plexuses contain many small ganglia, and are joined by fibers from the upper sacral PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 147 sympathetic ganglia, and by direct branches of the second, third and fourth sacral cerebro-spinal nerves. Distribution. The branches of these plexuses are dis- tributed on the coats of the arteries to the pelvic viscera, and frequently enter the substance of the organ. Subsidiary Plexuses. According to the artery fol- lowed, we have subsidiary plexuses, called hemorrhoidal, visceral, prostatic, vaginal and uterine. Functions. The functions of the pelvic plexus are as follows : (1) Vaso-constrictor, (2) vaso-motor, (3) sensory, (4) viscero-inhibitor, per hypogastric plexus. (5) Motor to rectum, vagina and bladder, (6) sensory to rectum, vagina and bladder, (7) vaso-dilator to sexual organs, erectile tissue, (8) viscero-constrictor to neck of uterus, per second, third and fourth sacral. Summary. With the arrangement and functions of these nerves well in mind, we recognize two paths over which we can influence the pelvic viscera : (1) Sensory influences may be reflexed through the hypogastric plexus, and thence to the second lumbar; or, they may pass over sacral nerves to the same point, second lumbar. In connection with disturbance of the pelvic vis- cera, pain may be reflexed on to the back of the sacrum, or to an area around the second lumbar. Disturbance of function in the uterus causes reflex sensitiveness at fourth and fifth lumbar. (2) Vaso-constrictor influences come through hypo- gastric plexus from spinal nerves about second lumbar. (3) Vaso-dilator influences come directly to the pelvic plexuses from second and third sacral nerves; nervi erigentes. (4) Viscero-motor influences chiefly from second, third and fourth sacral. (5) Viscero-inhibitory influences, chiefly through hypo- gastric plexus, probably from upper lumbar spinal nerves. 148 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY We have therefore a vaso-constrictor center for pelvic viscera at second lumbar; a vaso-dilator and motor center at second and third sacral. Automatic Visceral Ganglia. The last portion of the sympathetic is but little known, and physiologists have refrained from speculating on it until more definite knowl- edge is obtained. Byron Robinson mentions a number of "automatic visceral ganglia" situated in the walls of the hollow viscera. The fact that the heart, intestines, uterus, bladder and fallopian tubes will contract rhythmically in response to mechanical stimulation after all nerve connections are severed, seems to prove the existence of ganglia in the walls of these viscera which are capable of receiving sensation and sending out motor impulses. Conclusions. We will therefore conclude that the sympathetic system can act independently of the cerebro- spinal; that it receives sensation, and initiates motion; gives tone to the arteries, and controls secretion. We in- fluence the functions of the sympathetic through its con- nection with the cerebro-spinal system. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 149 CHAPTER IX. CIRCULATORY TISSUE. From the histological standpoint, blood conforms to the general definition of a tissue, being composed of a cellular and intercellular substance. The intercellular sub- stance, being liquid, differentiates it greatly from other tissues. It contains cellular elements which differ from each other in form and function. Then, too, it is a moving tissue enclosed in a system of closed tubes. Functions. The blood performs many functions. These may be stated in general terms as follows : 1. To convey nutrition to all other tissues. 2. To remove waste products from the tissues. 3. To convey oxygen for tissue respiration. 4. To distribute heat. 5. To repel invasion of bacteria. Lymph. Lymph is another liquid tissue, less rich in corpuscular elements, but greater in total bulk than the blood. The lymph comes in direct contact with the ele- ments of the tissues. Stewart states the relationship tersely when he says, "The blood feeds the lymph and the lymph feeds the cell." Since we think of individual tissues as possessing some one well developed attribute or function, it is well to call blood and its congener, lymph, the media of exchange. This expression covers at least four of the functions pre- viously mentioned. With this comprehensive but short statement of the relation of these liquid tissues to the structural, contractile, irritable and secretory tissues, it seems hardly necessary 150 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY to discuss so self-evident a proposition as that health pri- marily depends on a perfect circulation. It is not even necessary to add to this the fact that the blood should be pure, because under ordinary circumstances if the blood circulates properly it will become purified. All schools of medicine have a therapeutic principle around which their practice is built. From its earliest iri- ception the osteopathic idea has been that a perfect circu- lation is the foundation for perfect health. The proportion of blood to body weight is about one- twelfth of the whole, i. e., twelve pounds of blood in a body weighing 150 pounds. This amount of blood is dis- tributed approximately as follows : One-fourth to the heart, lungs and great blood vessels; one-fourth to the liver; one-fourth to the resting muscles; one-fourth to the re- maining organs. There is not blood enough in the body to maintain all of its activities at the maximum at the same time. Therefore it is difficult to do the best physical or mental labor just after digestion has begun. The splanchnic blood vessels are capable of containing so large a proportion of the whole amount of blood that death may result from lack of sufficient blood returning to the heart to cause it to beat. Distribution of the Blood. Granting that the blood possesses all these functions, the question still confronts us, how can we affect its distribution? This question leads us to a consideration of the physiological distribution of the blood. It is believed by the writer that nothing be- sides the use of water has so great an effect on the circu- lation of the blood as manipulation according to osteopathic methods. These methods do not depend on a mere physi- cal assistance of the venous flow by means of centripetal stroking, such as is employed by a masseur. Effects on circulation are obtained in nearly all cases by knowing where definite nerves which control the action of the heart and blood vessels are placed and what their action in re- sponse to irritation may be. All manipulations are given LIEfclE GF PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 151 with a definite knowledge of the location of blood vessels and the nerve centers which control their variation in caliber. The response secured is a new coordination of the whole circulation brought about under the control of the nerve centers. It has been stated that the blood is contained in a closed system of tubes. A short resume of the most im- portant points in the anatomy and physiology of the cir- culation may prepare us for a clearer insight of the modus operandi of osteopathic methods. The Circulatory Apparatus. The circulatory appa- ratus consists of the heart, arteries, capillaries, veins and lymphatics; some writers include the spleen. Muscular tissue is found in the heart, small arteries and veins. The heart is practically all muscle, and its con- tractions are governed by two sets of nerve fibers from the cerebro-spinal system; the first set is called accelerator; second, inhibitory. Likewise, the small arteries and veins have two sets of fibers which increase and decrease the intensity of the contraction of their muscular fibers, and thus change the caliber of the vessels. The capillaries are short, narrow tubes, having a thin wall composed of nucleated cells which possess the power of contraction. So far as known, the capillaries expand and contract in response to the degree of physical pressure exerted by the blood current coming from the arterioles. Thus the change in the caliber of the capillaries is pas- sive. The lymphatics begin in small irregular spaces in the cellular tissue outside of the blood vessels. They are found in direct relation with the cells of perivascular tis- sues, thus bringing the lymph to each cell. These open- ings lead to small lymphatic vessels which convey the lymph to the lymphatic glands which are situated so as to filter out the impurities, after which it is emptied into the venous circulation by the lymphatic ducts. The lym- C iO 323JJOO cllAKMC^ HS 152 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY phatic vessels possess power of contraction. The lymph equals about one-third of the body weight. The blood is a passively moving tissue. It is kept in constant circulation within a closed system of tubes by a combination of forces. The propulsion of the blood is al- most entirely accomplished by the contraction of the heart. This initial force is supplemented by the aspiration of the chest during respiration, and the contraction of the skele- tal muscles of the entire body. It is a debatable question whether or not the muscular coat of the arterioles and venules assist in the direct propulsion of the blood passing through them. It is the function of the heart to maintain a compara- tively uniform tension of the blood in the large arteries. The arterioles and capillaries are concerned in maintain- ing resistance to the passage of the blood. The degree of resistance in the capillaries, in large measure, determines the amount of nourishment received by the tissues. The relation between capillary resistance to the passage of the blood and the metabolism carried on in perivascular tissues is a point of great importance. The current of blood ordinarily passes through the capillaries very slowly, at a rate of one inch in two minutes, and under low ten- sion, thus giving ample opportunity for the escape of nour- ishing material for the surrounding tissues. Tension in the arteries is maintained by three factors : (1) The initial force of the heart beat; (2) friction in the vessels; (3) elasticity of the vessel walls. The first and third of these factors are under nerve control which act according to a large number of stimuli. The capillaries being passive in action, the tension of the blood stream in them is mainly dependent on the ten- sion in the arterioles. It may be profitably noted that after the initial impulse is given to the blood stream by the heart, the distribution of this blood depends solely on the arteries, arterioles and capillaries. This peripheral distributive mechanism is therefore responsible for the 153 nutrition of the tissues, and its resistance offered to the passage of the blood regulates the amount of force ex- erted by the heart. Manipulatory treatments, according to the best authori- ties writing on massage and Swedish movements, have for their object the acceleration of the blood flow on the venous side of the general circulation. Osteopathic man- ipulations are essentially directed to the active instead of the passive side of the circulation. The osteopath makes use daily of the v-aso-motor nerves in order to control the circulation of the blood in local areas; therefore, it is necessary to make a detailed study of this wonderful mechanism in order to achieve the best results in practice. The more we know of structure and function, the more rational ought our methods of treatment to be, because we will then have no excuse for using methods which do not have a scientific basis to recommend them. The Heart. In order to affect the active side of the circulation our manipulations must affect the heart beat. There are two sets of nerve fibers arising in the cerebro- spinal system which exert a regulating influence on the beat of the heart. Heart muscle possesses an inherent power of rhythmical contraction. It will beat rhythmical- ly for hours if the muscle be kept moist with a one per cent salt solution. Contraction begins in the auricles and ends in the ven- tricles; hence, it is thought that the auricular rhythm is transmitted to the ventricle. Any influence which changes the auricular rhythm also changes the ventricular rhythm. Regulation of Contraction. Since the heart possesses inherent power of rhythmic contraction, the nervous sys- tem acts as a regulator of the rate of contraction. The two centers of cardiac control act in a manner to increase or decrease the rate. The speed of the blood current is dependent on the rate and strength of the cardiac con- tractions. The pressure of the blood is dependent on the 154 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY rate and strength of the cardiac contractions, together with the resistance offered by the arterioles and capillaries. Considering the arterioles and capillaries as possessing fixed diameters, an increase in the number and strength of the heart beats would increase the speed and pressure of the blood current. A lessened cardiac activity would have the opposite effect. The speed and pressure of the blood stream may vary within wide limits and still main- tain a fair degree of health. Coordinating Centers. The nerve impulses reaching the heart are coordinated in two governing centers in the cerebro-spinal system. These centers are located in the bulb. The inhibitory center is connected with cells in the walls of the heart by fibers which form a part of the pneu- mogastric nerve. Section of the pneumogastric nerve re- moves the inhibitory influence over the heart's action. Stimulation of this nerve slows the heart. The relaxation period is lengthened which results in greater filling of the heart and the pressure in the veins is increased while ar- terial pressure decreases. These results have been noted by many physiologists. The Pneumogastric Nerve. The pneumogastric is one of the nerve trunks which can be reached by direct pres- sure made through the skin and muscles of the neck. Its inhibitory action can be aroused by pinching the sterno- cleidomastoid muscle between the thumb and forefinger, taking care to work deeply under the internal margin of the muscle. It is no uncommon phenomenon to have a patient faint as a result of this manipulation. Individuals differ greatly as to their response to this stimulation. The stim- ulation should be a gentle pressure of a constantly vary- ing intensity. A pulse tracing is appended, Fig. 24, which shows the results of stimulating the pneumogastric in the manner just described. The gentleman upon whom the experi- PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 155 ment was made was in excellent health, and possessed a quiet, well-balanced temperament. The tracing shows that the number and force of the beats was lessened and the arterial pressure decreased. This tracing is probably ' / / / / y y / FIG. 24. Stimulation of the pneumogastric by pinching the nerve trunk in the neck. typical of the change, in a well person, in response to stim- ulation of the pneumogastric. No sensation of faintness or other disagreeable feeling was noted. The inhibitory action of the pneumogastric seems to be most active in individuals who suffer from some dis- order of the digestive tract. In such patients the constant irritation of the sensory fibers of the pneumogastric, which arise in the mucosa of the digestive viscera, seems to in- crease the irritability of the whole nerve trunk to such a delicate point that the slightest stimulation made at any point along the course of the nerve will excite its inhibitory action. Many osteopaths, just starting in practice, have had their self-possession severely tried by a patient faint- ing during manipulation of the neck. I have never heard of any fatal results from manipulation of the pneumogas- tric. Why stimulation of the pneumogastric should result in cardiac inhibition rather than in phenomena connected with its other branches seems incapable of explanation. 156 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY Sometimes spasm of the laryngeal muscles will accompany cardiac inhibition. The intensity of action of the pneumogastrics is so well known to experienced osteopaths that they are careful to test its irritableness in cases before undertaking any extensive manipulations along its course. The inhibitory center is continually active and acts according to the blood pressure within the arteries. A rise in peripheral resistance causes a decrease in number and strength of the heart beats. Accelerator Center. The accelerator center is con- nected with the heart by fibers which descend in the cord to the upper portion of the dorsal region ; here connection is made with the cells whose fibers pass to the sympathetic spinal ganglia, first, second and third dorsal, and end there around other cells whose fibers convey their impulses to the heart. FIG. 25. Sphygmograms illustrating the effect of inhibition, first, second and third dorsal. The action of the accelerator center is not so readily demonstrated as is the case with the inhibitory center. It causes the heart to beat faster and stronger, thus bringing about a rise in arterial blood pressure and a fall in venous pressure. This center acts in response to lowered per- ipheral resistance. The products of metabolism brought about by physical exercise also excite it. Deep, steady pressure made on the muscles lying on each side of the first, second and third dorsal spines causes a decrease in the rapidity of the heart's action. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 157 FIG. 26. Vaso-constrictor area, second dorsal to second lumbar. 158 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY Stimulation of the Heart. A make and break pressure made at the edge of the sternum in the first and second intercostal spaces will usually stimulate the heart. Some- times the first effect is inhibition, but it quickly passes to stimulation. The manipulation made anteriorly increases the number and intensity of the stimuli reaching the seg- ment of the cord from which the accelerator nerves pass out. All centers act according to the sum of the stimuli reaching them from all sources. Inhibition of the Heart. In cases of rapid heart beat with high tension pulse the best effects are secured by digital pressure at first, second and third dorsal spines. The pneumogastrics have too many branches to important vis- cera and act frequently with unexpected intensity. The accelerators act more slowly with less intensity and the action is sustained longer, that is, as a result of man- ipulation. Vaso-motor Control of the Coronary Arteries. A fur- ther factor in relation to the regulation of the heart's action is the blood supply for the nourishment of the heart. All organs act with greater force when their blood supply is abundant. The heart beats stronger when its coronary arteries are dilated than when constricted, therefore the power of the heart depends on the vaso-motor control of its own arteries.. The vaso-motor nerves to the coronary arteries leave the cerebro-spinal system between the third and fifth dorsal spines. In cases of angina pectoris, this area will be sensitive. Steady pressure here will dilate the coronary arteries and ease the pain. A sharp stroke with the hypothenar eminence on the fourth dorsal spine will nearly always start an attack with such patients. Angina Pectoris. Physiologists name the pneumogas- tric nerve as the vaso-motor nerve to the coronary arteries. I mention the area, third to fifth dorsal, as a vaso-motor center for the coronary arteries because clinical experience seems to demonstrate it. Other osteopaths have noted the frequency of lesions in this area in connection with PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 159 heart difficulties. The lesions are contracted muscles, lat- eral subluxations of the vertebrae or in some instances subluxations of the fourth and fifth ribs. With any of these lesions there is intense sensitiveness. Dr. George Keith of Scotland mentions digital pres- sure in the second left intercostal space as a means of in- hibiting an attack of angina pectoris, and suggests the nerve connection of the pneumogastric as being the nerve path over which the inhibitory impulse travels. Persons suffering with angina pectoris will press their hands, with all the force they possess, against the left chest. I have used heavy digital pressure on the left side of the fourth and fifth dorsal spines while the patient was in a paroxysm of pain. The pressure never failed to be grateful to the patient. A further experiment with this center was made by extending the patient in a recumbent position. While extension was maintained the angles of the ribs could be raised, the left arm could be extended over the head, a full inspiration could be taken, but as soon as the vertebrae were allowed to approximate as a result of cessation of extension, these things could not be done. Heat, digital pressure and counter irritation are capa- ble of causing vaso-constrictor paralysis, i. e., vaso-dilation, and hence increase the power of the heart in such cases. Action of the Heart Centers. The governing centers of the heart act principally according to the peripheral resistance maintained by the blood vessels. The heart pos- sesses a nerve called the depressor nerve. Its endings are in the walls of the heart and are affected by the pressure of the blood within the heart. A rise in arterial pressure is followed by a rise in pressure within the heart. The depressor nerve notes this fact and carries an inhibitory impulse to the vaso-dilator center in the medulla, thus bringing about a fall in arterial pressure. In this way the heart is protected from over-exertion as a result of too high pressure. 160 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY In cases having rapid, weak heart action, inhibit the accelerators to slow the heart, also inhibit in the area of vaso-motor control of the coronary arteries to increase the amount of blood for nourishment to the heart muscle, thus increasing the strength of the beat. In cases of rapid, high tension pulse, inhibit the splanchnics and in the suboccipital fossae to lessen peri- pheral resistance, also inhibit the accelerators or stimulate the pneumogastrics. Vaso-motor Nerves. In 1840 Henle discovered and demonstrated the muscular coat of the arteries, and as a result of this step forward we have our present knowledge of the vaso-motor nerves. Associated with the demonstra- tion of these nerves we have the names of Brown-Sequard, Bernard, Waller and Schiff. It has been proven that two sets of fibers innervate the muscles of the arteries ; a vaso-constrictor set, which causes a decrease in the caliber; and a vaso-dilator set which causes an increase in caliber. The constrictors were demonstrated first. Henle said "the movement of the blood depends on the heart, but its distribution depends on the vessels." We have followed the phenomena in connection with the first part of this quotation, hence it remains for us to study the part played by the vessels in the distribution of the blood. In order to carry our thoughts along in a proper man- ner, we will commence at the center and work toward the periphery. The chief vaso-motor center is in the medulla. De- struction of this center causes an immediate fall of blood pressure all over the body. Stimulation of this center causes a general rise of blood pressure. There are subsidiary centers situated at various levels in the spinal cord. After the spinal cord is severed, that portion which is no longer connected with the chief vaso-motor center will exercise a vaso-constrictor influence over the blood vessels PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 161 in its area of normal control. "It is probable that they are normally subordinate to the bulbar nerve cells." After all connection between the cerebro-spinal sys- tem and sympathetic spinal ganglia is cut off, the tone of the blood vessels is maintained, after a short interval, by the sympathetic ganglia. By commencing at the center and destroying- it, then the centers in the spinal cord assume control ; destruction of these leaves the sympathetic spinal ganglia active; hence by this process of exclusion we find that the true vaso- motor cells are sympathetic and lie in the spinal ganglia. From these cells in the spinal ganglia-axis cylinder pro- cesses pass as gray fibers to blood vessels. These ganglia cells are controlled by fibers from the chief vaso-motor center in the medulla which end around the subsidiary cells in the spinal cord, the neuraxons of these latter terminat- ing by filaments which surround the true vaso-motor cells in the sympathetic spinal ganglia. FIG. 27. Arterial tension is manifested in a sphygmogram by the rela- tive height of the aortic notch. The upper tracing shows the aortic notch on a straight line drawn from the top of one percussion wave to the bottom of the next. The middle tracing shows this notch very low. Since gray rami-communicantes pass from the spinal sympathetic ganglia to the spinal nerves and are distributed with them to the skin and blood vessels, we can influence the distribution of the blood generally and locally by in- creasing or decreasing the nurnber of sensory impulses, originating in the skin and muscle, which may reach the vaso-motor centers. 162 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY "The vaso-motor apparatus consists, then, of three classes of nerve cells. The cell bodies of the first class lie in sympathetic ganglia, their neuraxons passing directly to the smooth muscle in the walls of the vessels; the second are stimulated at different levels in the cerebro-spinal axis, their neuraxons passing hence to the sympathetic ganglia by way of spinal and cranial nerves ; and the third are placed in the bulb and control the second through intra- spinal and intracranial paths. The nerve cell of the first class lies wholly without the cerebro-spinal axis, the third wholly within it, while the second is partly within and part- ly without, and binds together the remaining two." Am. Text-book of Physiology. FIG. 28. The signification of a sphygmogram. The space S is the period of ventricular systole when the aortic valves are open; the space D the period of ventricular diastole; t, the tidal wave due to the ven- tricular systole; p, the percussion wave due to instrumental defect; a is the aortic notch which marks the closure of the aortic valves; d, the dicrotic wave. Vaso-constriction. The vaso-constrictor nerves which pass from the bulbar and spinal centers of control leave the cord as white rami-communicantes from the anterior roots of the second dorsal to the second lumbar nerves and enter the sympathetic ganglia to be distributed as has been de- scribed before. It is believed that all of these vaso-con- strictor fibers end in the ganglia, thus exerting their influ- ence on the true vaso-motor cells in the ganglia which alone send fibers to the blood vessels. All these constric- tor nerves are gray. Vaso-dilation. The vaso-dilator fibers are not re- stricted to any one portion of the cord or brain, but pass out with both cranial and spinal nerves, and do not lose their sheaths until they reach their destination. They PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 163 are best demonstrated in those regions of the cerebro-spinal system from which vaso-constrictors do not arise. The vaso-dilators from the head, face, salivary glands, etc., pass to their destination with the cranial nerves supplying these parts. They do not end in the sympathetics. They proba- bly leave the cord in the anterior roots of the spinal nerves and pass to the periphery without interruption. The vaso- dilators, leaving the cord in the same region as the vaso- constrictors to be distributed to the visceral blood vessels probably pass out by the ventral roots and reach their destination without losing their sheaths in the sympathetic ganglia. FIG. 29. Sphygmograms illustrating Tachycardia and Brachycardia. Up- per tracing radial pulse of a woman exhibiting great nervousness, a small goitre but no exophthalmos. Lower tracing radial pulse of a young man whose power of recalling past events of his life was suddenly lost. Result of mental shock. No distinct centers for vaso-dilator fibers have been demonstrated. They probably arise from segments of the brain and spinal cord and their influence is carried along the paths of motor nerves and is exerted in a local area. Summary. 1. The vaso-dilator nerves are cerebro- spinal ; (a) and are not demedullated in the sympathetic ganglia, (b) They are distributed principally to the ar- teries of the muscles, (c) and leave the cerebro-spinal axis with the motor nerves from all portions, (d) Their influ- ence is local. 2. The vaso-constrictors are essentially neuraxons of sympathetic cells in the spinal ganglia; (a) are gray fibers; (b) are distributed to viscera and cutaneous blood vessels; (c) and are probably continuous in action to maintain the 164 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY tone of the vascular system, (d) The vaso-motor cells in the sympathetic ganglia can act independently, (e) but are normally under the control of the cells in the spinal cord whose neuraxons end in the spinal ganglia, (f) These cells in the spinal cord are under the influence of neuraxons of cells in the medulla which constitute the chief vaso- motor center, (g) Therefore, the vaso-constrictor influ- ence is both local and general, (h) The controlling fibers leave the cord in the ventral roots of the second dorsal to the second lumbar nerves only. Sensory Nerves. We have now considered in detail only one side of the vaso-motor mechanism, the motor. We have yet to note the sensory side, that which calls forth the motor response. If there were no chief or spinal vaso- motor centers to transfer sensory impulses to the vaso-con- strictor cells in the spinal ganglia, the blood vessels in the viscera and skin could not contract or relax according to the necessity for greater or lesser amounts of heat in the -deep or superficial areas. The vaso-motor centers in the brain and cord send out impulses in response to sensory stimulation; this sen- sory stimulation is usually of a thermal or mechanical character. It is difficult to realize the extent of the distribution of sensory nerves. "They are located not only in those places usually known to be sensitive, but also in all other tissues and organs. Whether one examine the liver or the kidney, lung or the wall of a blood vessel, one always finds delicate nerve arborizations in unsuspected numbers. A large portion of them end probably in the peripherally placed end cells belonging to the reflex arc of the sympa- thetic ; another portion may very probably be traced to the spinal ganglia, and even to the spinal cord itself, es- pecially the investigations of the past two years, making use of the silver and methyl blue stains, have not only dis- closed the wealth of nerves in the different organs, but have also shown that we have regarded the sensory in- PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 165 nervation of the sensitive surfaces, as the skin and the gustatory-mucous membrane as much less fully explained than they really are. One finds there numerous plexuses of nerve fibers beneath and between the epithelial cells, and they send one, often many, fine fibrils to each cell." "In the liver, too, and the bladder, and many other places, one can find numerous examples of the abun- dant peripheral innervation. We have always given too great importance to the single end apparatus, overlooking the fact that really the major portion of the body tissues is supplied with nerves for every cell. One can hardly over- estimate the wealth of nerve fibers in the end organs them- selves, as the taste papillae and the tactile papillae. Good staining discloses with each of them plexuses of unexpected density of arborization." "For what services may such an abundant sensory innervation be provided? It occurs immediately to one that there are a great number of reflexes, very necessary to the preservation of the individual, even though he be un- aware of them. The regulation of the secretions, the blood supply to the skin in relation to the caloric body economy of the organism, the adjustment to varying illumination, the tension of the muscles and tendons through the re- spective tendon reflexes, the different response by such varying tensions according to the intensity of the volun- tary impulse, and many other phenomena could be cited. To all of them is necessary, besides the motor part of the reflex arc, a sensory part. Indeed, Exner, to whom we are indebted for indicating the importance of these short re- flex arcs and the roles they play in the organism, has pointed out how, in general, for the production of any movement the sensory innervation must be intact." "By 'sensory innervation,' however, one must not think only those processes are meant which enter into our con- sciousness, but rather all those by which from any place in the body impressions are conducted to the nearest gan- glion, or to the central axis. Whether they be conducted 166 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY farther still, or whether they be recognized by the in- dividual as they occur does not affect their nature. Sen- sation and perception are not the same thing." Anatomy of the Central Nervous System in Man and in Vertebrates in General. Edinger. Thus we find that there are abundant sensory nerves in superficial and deep tissue to receive the mechanical stimuli which the osteopath may project upon them. Recent investigations prove that many conditions which have previously been called inflammation are, in reality, congestions due to vaso-constrictor paralysis, and can be corrected by stimulation of the vaso-constrictor center governing the congested area; the stimulation of such center being secured by mechanical stimuli applied to the sensory nerves ending in the center. The vaso-motor mechanism responds quickly to osteo- pathic manipulation, and is our means of correcting any disturbance of circulation, both local and general. Since the blood carries the nourishment for the tis- sues, and the vaso-motors control the distribution of the blood, the vaso-motor nerves are trophic nerves. In the same sense they are secretory nerves. Capillary Circulation. The capillary circulation is de- pendent on the state of the arterioles. Their walls are formed by endothelial cells which are elastic, and hence respond to the force of the blood which enters them. If the vaso-constrictors are active in a local area the re- sistance offered to the passage of the blood current by the arterioles is increased, and therefore the pressure exerted on the capillary walls is lessened, allowing the capillaries to contract. If the vaso-constrictor influence over the arterioles be lessened, the blood current is allowed to exert its pressure on the capillary walls, thus increasing the caliber of the capillary. If, in a large area of the body, vaso-constrictors are active, the influence of this resistance is felt by the heart, which immediately beats harder to overcome the resistance PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 167 to the passage of the blood through the constricted arteries. The heart is usually relieved by compensatory dilatation of the arteries in some other area. The visceral and cu- taneous arteries usually counter-balance each other in this way. This counter-balancing effect is probably brought about through the sensory impressions sent out from an overworked heart to the vaso-motor center, thus causing a lessened constrictor effect in some portions of the body. The relaxation of all the arteries of the body would cause death, because the blood would gravitate to the most dependent part, and there is not blood enough to fill all the arteries when relaxed. A slight relaxation of general blood pressure causes the heart to beat more rapidly for a short time. Relaxation of the peripheral blood vessels is noted by the increased warmth and redness of the area in which relaxation takes place. Recapitulation. To recapitulate: (1) Capillary circu- lation is passive. (2) Vaso-constriction of the arterioles causes a decrease in the lumen of the capillary. (3) Vaso- dilation of the arterioles causes increase in the lumen of the capillary. (4) General vaso-constriction of the cu- taneous blood vessels slows the heart and causes it to work against higher pressure, but the heart is relieved by relaxa- tion of blood vessels in visceral areas, chiefly the splanch- nics. (5) Decrease of constrictor effect on superficial ves- sels causes a more rapid heart beat, which is quickly con- trolled by constriction in the splanchnic area. (6-) The vaso-motor center in the medulla acts according to the sum of the sensory influences reaching it from all parts of the body. (7) The spinal vaso-motor centers act according to the influences sent to them by the chief center and the sensory impulses which enter their segment of the cord. Vaso-motor Centers. The vaso-motor centers for the various viscera, organs and members are as follows : HEAD: The superior cervical ganglion. EYE : The superior cervical ganglion through the fifth nerve. 168 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY NOSE, THROAT, TONSILS, TONGUE and GUMS: By the same path. Dilator fibers for the tongue per the lingual branch of the fifth cranial nerve. BRAIN: "Sherrington and others have demonstrated the presence of vaso-motor nerves in the vessels of the brain. It is probable that the cerebral circulation is wholly dependent upon the general blood pressure, and, inasmuch as the general blood pressure is very markedly regulated by the capacious splanchnic area, it is obvious that the cerebral circulation may be better controlled by modifying the blood supply of the splanchnic area than by any at- tempts at the modification of the cerebral circulation itself." Sympathetic fibers to the anterior and middle fossae come from the superior cervical ganglion per the carotid plexus. Sympathetic fibers are distributed to the vessels in the posterior fossa from the vertebral plexus which is formed by fibers from the inferior cervical ganglion. THYROID GLAND: Middle and inferior cervical ganglion. The vaso-constrictors for the blood vessels of the head, face and neck with their contained organs leave the spinal cord in the upper dorsal, second to fifth, and pass thence through the cervical ganglion. LUNGS : Second to the sixth dorsal. INTESTINES: The vaso-constrictors for the mesen- teric blood vessels are found in the splanchnic nerves. Com- mencing at the fifth dorsal, there is a segmental distribution to the various portions of the intestines. The lowest con- strictor influence comes from the second lumbar. Vaso- dilator fibers are also found in the splanchnics. LIVER : Sixth to tenth dorsal, right side. KIDNEY : Tenth to twelfth dorsal. SPLEEN : Ninth, tenth and eleventh dorsal, left side. The vagus is a motor nerve to the muscular fibers in the trabeculae of the spleen. PORTAL SYSTEM : Fifth to ninth dorsal. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 169 EXTERNAL GENERATIVE ORGANS: First and second lumbar, through the lumbar sympathetic ganglia, second to the fifth, to the hypogastric plexus, thence through the pelvic plexuses and pudic nerves to the gen- erative organs. Function, vaso-constriction. First, second and third sacral nerves are vaso-dilators to the same organs. INTERNAL GENERATIVE ORGANS: Vaso-con- strictor influence at first and second lumbar. ARTERIES TO THE SKIN OF THE BACK: Vaso- constrictor influence from sympathetic ganglion of the cor- responding segment. UPPER EXTREMITY: Vaso-constrictor influence to the skin, from second to the seventh dorsal. LOWER EXTREMITY : Sixth dorsal to second lum- bar. MUSCLES : Dilator influence to the arteries of the muscles per motor nerves to the muscles. Conclusions. Vaso-motor nerves are of two classes, viz : Vaso-constrictor and vaso-dilator. These nerves act according to the sum of the stimuli reaching their govern- ing center over sensory nerves of skin, muscle and gland. Therefore the osteopath depends on increasing or decreas- ing the stimuli reaching the spinal centers. The heart is innervated by two sets of nerves which control it. These nerves arise from centers in the cerebro- spinal system and govern the action of the heart according to the sum of stimuli reaching their centers over sensory nerves of skin, muscle and gland, and in harmony with the resistance maintained by the peripheral blood vessels. Since perivascular tissues are dependent on the trans- fusion of nutriment from the blood, through the walls of the capillaries into the lymph, and this process of trans- fusion is dependent on the tension and speed of the cur- rent of blood in the capillaries, any condition which markedly increases or decreases this speed and tension will affect the nourishment of the tissues. 170 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY Hyperaemia. A study of hyperaemia is, in reality, a study of the vaso-motor mechanism. We have noted the fact of vaso-motor nerves controlling the caliber of blood vessels. These nerves are branches of the cerebro-spinal system. Most of them leave the spinal nerves and pass to the sympathetic spinal ganglia as rami-communicantes and then pass up and down to other ganglia of the sympathetic system. Some fibers return from the sympathetic to the spinal nerves and are distributed to blood vessels of skin, muscle and bone in the area of distribution of the spinal nerves. A few vaso-motor nerves do not enter the sympa- thetic system but pass directly tc their destination with the spinal nerves. Thus two paths exist by which vaso- motor impulses reach the blood vessels, a direct route with the spinal nerves and an indirect one through the sympa- thetics. Experimenters have long noted the return of vascular tone in an area whose vaso-constrictor nerves have been cut. This return of vascular tonicity is supposed to be due to the presence of a perivascular mechanism which is capable of acting feebly after all other constrictor in- fluences have been paralyzed. So far as methods of treatment are concerned, we have paid very little attention to the presence of vaso-dilator nerves, but physiologists seem to prove that there are fibers leaving the cord with the posterior roots of the nerve trunks which act as dilators when irritated. The vaso-constric- tor nerves are considered as constantly in action. Irritation of the dilator nerves or paralysis of the con- strictors will result in dilatation of the arterioles, so that the capillaries will be dilated to their fullest extent. Such a condition is called an "active hyperaemia." When the exit of the blood through the veins is obstructed and con- gestion results it is denoted "passive hyperaemia." The same irritants, mechanical, thermal and chemical, which are capable of stimulating muscles to unusual or un- equal contractions so as to produce marked evidences of PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 171 changed bony alignment, also cause such decided changes in the caliber of blood vessels as to cause tissues to be- come hyperaemic or ischaemic. If any hyperaemia exists in the mucosa of the stomach, palpation around the sixth dorsal spine will disclose ten- derness. This spinal tenderness is probably due either to the irritation of the dilator fibers which accompany the posterior division of the fifth dorsal nerve or to paralysis of the vaso-constrictors of that area. The resulting dila- tation impinges on sensory nerves and causes tenderness. The irritation of sensory nerves in the mucosa of the stomach causes dilatation of blood vessels in that area and in the spinal area from which its sensory nerves arise. The irritation might have originated centrally and then in- volved the stomach, thus reversing the course of the irrita- tion. These reflex hyperaemias are continually noted in practice, and it is through the reflexes that relief is ob- tained. One of the classical experiments to prove the re- flex action of vaso-.motor nerves is to immerse one hand in cold water, the temperature of the other hand will be lowered also. It is quite generally conceded that the small arteries and arterioles in all parts of the body are supplied with vaso-motor nerves. Their presence in the blood vessels of the brain has been recently proven by G. C. Huber. His demonstration of vaso-motor nerves in the cerebral blood vessels explains many of the circulatory phenomena result- ing from osteopathic manipulations. Irritation of sensory nerves in any part of the body causes vascular dilatation in the irritated area. Physi- ological experiments seem to prove that vaso-dilator fibers accompany the sensory nerves, or that irritation of sensory nerves causes paralysis of vaso-constrictor nerves. Irrita- tion of the nerves of one side of the body by pricking with a pin causes a rise of temperature on that side and a de- crease on the unirritated side, thus demonstrating that vaso-dilation follows sensory irritation. 172 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY Experiments to note the effects of direct mechanical irritation of the stomach mucosa demonstrate that dilata- tion of gastric blood vessels follows mechanical irritation. The physiological hyperaema thus produced is for purposes of increased secretion. It is well known that when this physiological congestion is continued without cessation, as in the case when meals are frequent and full, the con- gestion becomes pathological, and the secretion of mucus is rapid. The liver and intestines become chronically con- gested from similar causes. This hyperaemia leads to ex- udates and hyperplasia which further irritates sensory nerve endings and continues the dilatation of the arterioles. Thus a vicious cycle of reflexes is established which tends to ever increasing destructiveness. When the sensory nerve terminals in the stomach are irritated and hyperaemia of the gastric vessels results, the influence of the irritation does not end with gastric con- gestion, i. e., if the hyperaemia be excessive, but causes dilatation of arteries in the spinal cord around the roots of sensory nerves distributed in other parts of the body which are supplied by branches of the same nerve trunk. The brain does not always note the real location of the irrita- tion. It may refer the pain to any point supplied by a branch of the nerve trunk, one of whose branches is irri- tated. Thus in the presence of chronic congestion of the gastric mucosa, as in gastric catarrh, the irritation may not be intense enough to impress the brain with a painful sensation, but a slight increase of capillary pressure around the trunk of the sixth dorsal nerve such as would be brought about by digital pressure made upon the muscles around the sixth dorsal spine, would cause instant recognition of hyperaesthesia by the patient. Continued pressure made around the spine drives the blood out and lessens the sen- sitiveness. If hyperaemia has been intense enough to cause exudates, pressure increases the pain the longer it is continued, because the exudates have affected the venous circulation and there is no open path for exit of the blood. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 173 From personal experience I should judge that it is quite probable that hyperaemia occurs along the whole course of the nerve and the nervi nervorum are rendered more sensitive thereby. In case of absolute neuritis, man- ipulation relieves the condition temporarily, but the pain increases shortly after the treatment is given. This shows that a condition exists which is much more difficult to change than a reflex hyperaemia. Continued hyperaemic conditions cause increased nu- trition, i. e., hyperplasia of connective tissue. Connective tissue seems to be more readily formed than any of the higher grades of tissue. This may explain the rapid stif- fening of the spine in cases of visceral hyperaemia. The digital pressure test is an excellent method of differentiating the intensity of an hyperaemia. Even in cases of conscious pain in the gastric or intestinal areas, it is possible to use this test. In colic, deep pressure made gradually will give relief, but in cases of gastric ulcer or other inflammatory conditions, pressure aggravates the pain. Therapeutics. We now have before us an array of physiological facts and it remains for us to indicate how we shall use them. The osteopath treats the vaso-motor nerves as though there were no dilator fibers to be reckoned with. Practically, we consider that the vaso-constrictors are continually act- ing to maintain the "tone" of the blood vessels. There- fore, having only this one force with which to reckon, we consider all dilatation as vaso-constrictor paralysis. We noted the fact that the cutaneuos and visceral blood vessels were supplied with vaso-constrictors and that vaso-constriction in the superficial area was compen- sated for by dilatation in the deep area. A large number of sensory impressions reaching the vaso-motor centers over the sensory nerves of the skin usually result in vaso-constriction of cutaneous blood ves- 174 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY sels, hence internal congestion. Irritation of the sensory nerves in the skin may cause muscle under the skin to con- tract, thus obstructing the circulation in the skin. There- fore, our manipulations for vaso-motor effects naturally divide themselves into two classes. First, those which in- hibit cutaneous reflexes ; second, those which relax muscle in order to remove obstructions. This division is purely arbitrary on our part, but it serves to explain our work. We purposely leave out of this discussion the thought that we may have an osseous lesion causing our vaso-motor disturbance. We divide the spine into areas according to the predominating influence which issues from it; thus, the sub-occipital fossa is the first important area. It has long been known that pressure applied to this area in a case of congestive headache gives great relief. The good effects are not lost when the pressure is removed. This proves that the effect of the pressure is on the nerves of that area, and that they are in close central connection with the vaso-motor center in the medulla. This center regulates the caliber of the arteries all over the body. It has been stated that pressure at the basi-occiput retards the blood flow to the brain, the pressure being on the ver- tebral arteries. We believe a careful examination of the atlas will convince one that in the average skeleton the groove for the vertebral artery is so deep and well pro- tected that pressure on the surface of the neck cannot af- fect the artery. If our pressure effect is mechanical, why does the effect last so long? The blood stream is as swift as an ocean greyhound, and would rush into the partly filled vessel with its previous force just the moment the pressure is removed. We can only explain the result by noting the fact that a change has been made in the entire circulation. Downward pressure on the carotids is also recommended to retard the blood flow to the head. This seems impracticable since the pressure cannot help af- fecting the venous return as well as the carotid stream. The best and most lasting effects are always vaso-motor. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 175 It is a well recognized fact in the osteopathic profes- sion that pressure in the suboccipital triangles causes a lessened blood pressure all over the body. This fact is made use of daily to lower the temperature of the body in cases of fever. If pressure had a mechanical rather than a nervous effect on the circulation, we could hope for no general effect, such as we do secure. This procedure is called inhibiting the vaso-motor center. Why does it inhibit? A "vascular tone" is normal in the body in order to keep the blood equally distributed. This "vascular tone" is easily disturbed since it acts according to the sum of the sensory impulses reaching the center in the med- ulla. Pressure in the suboccipital triangles affects not only the sum of the stimuli reaching the center, but, most im- portant of all, affects the capillary circulation in this area which is in close nervous and circulatory connection with the medulla. Any external application, such as hot or cold water, local anaesthetics or counter-irritants must secure whatever internal change may be manifested, by the ef- fect these therapeutic procedures may have on cutaneous nerves. Pressure in the suboccipital triangles will relax the structures forming those triangles, thus lessening the sen- sory impulses entering the center from that source. The relaxed structures will hold more blood, hence they will in a slight degree relieve congestion of the center. These triangles are the bilateral surface centers in which we operate to cause dilatation of vessels in the skin of the trunk and extremities. We inhibit vaso-constricton of surface arteries. The next great constrictor area is the splanchnic, sixth to eleventh dorsal. This and the preceding area are the two points of vantage for the osteopath. Since the splanchnic nerves control a system of blood vessels whose combined capacity is equal to the entire amount of the blood in the body, we can quickly realize what it means to the general circulation to affect this area. In all cases of congestive 176 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY headaches, fever, hyperaemia of visceral organs, etc., we "inhibit the splanchnics." Why? The reflexes between the skin of the back and the muscles of the back are so intense that they cause vascular constriction of the cu- taneous arteries and contraction of the deep muscles of the back, thus adding a mechanical obstruction to the cir- culation of the blood in an already constricted area. Is it not possible, yes, probable, that this state of the surface tissue causes a congestion of the vaso-motor centers in the dorsal area of the cord, thus nullifying their control of the splanchnic area? Such a condition might be brought about by cold. The eating of indigestible food which re- mains a long time in the digestive tract may also be a cause. The facts are as we have stated them, we inhibit over the splanchnic area to lessen the intensity of the reflexes in that area, thereby allowing the centers to regain their control. Remember that inhibition lessens the sensory impressions reaching a center and relaxes muscle both directly and indirectly. Case Illustrations. An illustration of osteopathic methods applied to hyperaemia is afforded by the following case : A gentleman about fifty years of age was inspecting mines in the vicinity of Yuma, Arizona. He was of ple- thoric habit and hence the heat of that locality affected him quickly. About eight p. m., while in his tent pre- paring to bathe in order to get some relief from the in- tense heat, he felt a wave of weakness pass up his left side and almost instantly power of motion on that side was lost. Paralysis did not extend to the face. The gentle- man was brought to Los Angeles and came under the best of medical treatment. Electricity and massage were tried with fair success, but the left arm and hand remained helpless and were carried in a sling. The hand was badly swollen and would pit under pressure, thus showing a marked degree of vaso-constrictor paralysis. The hand and arm had been thoroughly massaged for two months PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 177 before osteopathic treatment was given. One hour's seance with the masseur would make a wonderful change in the hand, but the oedematous condition returned in a few hours. The ringers were bent into the palm, showing a marked tendency to a spastic condition. From the medical standpoint it was considered suf- ficient for this case to have the local massage of the arm and hand, with administration of strychnine. The osteopathic examination was made at the end of two months of the treatment just outlined. Slight signs of paralysis were noted at the angle of the mouth on the hemiplegic side. Examination of the neck showed marked contraction of the deep cervical muscles on the left side, extending from the occiput to the fourth cervical vertebra. Moderate digital pressure over these contracted muscles caused pain. There was also some tenderness as low as the sixth dorsal spine. The intense contraction and tender- ness in the upper cervical region was noted as a secondary lesion existing as a result of a blood clot. It was reasoned that if these contracted muscles could be relaxed cerebral circulation would be equalized and more rapid absorp- tion of the clot made possible. The spinal tenderness was brought about by the same law of irritation of sensory nerves we have previously stated. There was a dilated condition of the arterioles around the roots of the sensory nerves in the cord similar in character to that which existed at the peripheral distribution of these nerves, especially in the hand. There was decided wrist and elbow reflex, show- ing that the subsidiary nerve cells in the cord were intact, but that either the cerebral motor areas or some part of their connecting paths were injured. The vascular tone of blood vessels in all other parts of the body was good, showing that the chief vaso-motor center in the medulla was acting. Here was a case showing a perfect reflex in the arm but loss of ability to will a motion ; perfect sensa- tion and vaso-motor paralysis. 178 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY Treatment was directed to securing relaxation of the contracted cervical muscles and to breaking up adhesiions in the shoulder joint which had been allowed to stiffen. No treatment was given to the hand or arm. The patient was instructed to straighten the bent fingers with the well hand many times per day to overcome the spastic condition. Vaso-motor tone returned to the blood vessels of the hand in proportion to the amount of cervical relaxation ac- complished. At the end of one month the hand was al- lowed to hang naturally, and scarcely any oedema was noticeable. Muscular control and power have steadily increased. Another illustration is afforded by the following case : A gentleman suffering with inflammatory rheumatism in the second toe of the right foot sought relief by means of osteopathic treatment. He had used the salicylates in his previous attacks, but his stomach had become intolerant of them. The toe was red and angry looking, throbbing with pain and swollen to the size of the great toe. Examination of the spine revealed tenderness between the fifth lumbar and third sacral spines, also between the second and third lumbar spines. Why should tenderness exist at these points? The answer according to anatomy and physiology is that these spinal areas mark the point of emergence from the spinal column of the anterior crural and great sciatic nerves which are distributed to equal parts of the affected toe; the sensory nerves being ir- ritated by the deposit of faulty katabolic products in the tissues of the toe as the result of a slow blood stream. In this case the patient was caught out in the rain and got his feet wet. The peripheral irritation of the sensory nerves caused dilatation of the arterioles and capillaries. The blood vessels around the roots of other sensory nerves which were branches of the same nerve trunks also dilated in response to this irritation, i. e., hyperaemia in the spinal cord was brought about at the point of origin PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 179 of the. anterior crural and great sciatic nerves, hence the sensory nerves to the skin and muscles of the back which are innervated from the same area of the cord as these great nerve trunks will also be tender to increased tension such as that secured by the digital pressure. In a case such as this we do not desire to have the deposit in the toe taken up until the eliminating organs of the body are acting freely. To force it into the circula- tion before such time as it can be eliminated may result in inflaming another part. It is quite necessary that the throbbing pain be subdued so that sleep may be had. The patient soon learns to take advantage of venous circula- tion by elevating the foot. If pressure upon, and a gentle relaxing movement of the muscles in the spinal area is made, there will quickly be noted a decrease in spinal sensitiveness followed by lessened conscious pain in the toe. It is quite probable that pain in the toe is due to hyperaemia; sensitiveness in the spinal area is due to the same sort of condition, the difference being in degree. It is impossible to prove the presence of these transitory hyperaemias by any direct observations any more than it is possible to prove by post mortem examination that hy- peraemia or anaemia of the brain is present as a fixed pathological lesion in faulty functioning of the brain. Pressure and relaxation in the spinal area draws the blood away from its position around the nerve trunk roots and thus stops many of the impulses which would originate centrally as a result of the irritation of the sensory roots of the nerve trunk. We usually think of these reflex sensitive areas of the spine as being evidence of the ability of all the branches of a nerve trunk to express some degree of the irritation be- ing brought to bear on any one of the branches. It seems to me that in the light of what is known to happen in the area of an irritated nerve, hyperaemia, that the same change in circulation may occur around the roots of its 180 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY parent nerve trunk and be the sole reason for what we de- nominate a reflex pain. By giving the heavy movement required to replace a subluxated vertebra or even to relax tense muscles around an otherwise normal articulation, it is quite probable that inexplicable changes are wrought in the circulation at these points which immediately change the character of the nerve impulses originating or reflexing from this por- tion of the spinal cord. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 181 CHAPTER X. HILTON'S LAW. In the years 1860-61-62 a seres of lectures was delivered by John Hilton, F. R. S., F. R. C. S., "On the Influence of Mechanical and Physiological Rest in the Treatment of Accidents and Surgical Diseases, and the Diagnostic Value of Pain." These lectures were afterward published in book form under the title of "Rest and Pain." This book is a medical classic and worthy of careful perusal by all stu- dents of medicine. The careful observations and reasonings therefrom which are reported in "Rest and Pain" explain many of the phenomena noted in osteopathic practice. We desire to give all due honor to this man who was so far in advance of his time. We will quote a few paragraphs from "Rest and Pain" which have a direct bearing on osteopathic methods of diagnosis and therapeutics. The Law Stated. After careful study of the distribu- tion of nerves throughout the body, Hilton sums up his ob- servations in a terse sentence which we choose to call a law : "The_same trunks of nerves whose branches supply the groujrjs jrf muscles moving^ a joint, furnish also a_djs^ tribution of nerves to the skin over the insertion of the u same muscles, and the interior of the joint receives its nerves from the same source." Hilton further states that "Every fascia of the body has a muscle attached to it, and that every fascia through.- <>ut the body must be considered as a muscle/' 182 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY a Spinal Cord t> posterior pnmo.ru t Internal branch. ( d External bronchi t ( mu.scu.tar) . bymjoathedc f)anc)U(m , LaCeval cu-Cose is in hibition. Developing Inhibition by Training. The functional activity of nerve tissue is augmented by use, just as muscu- lar power is enhanced by proper training. Knowing this fact is evidenced everywhere in the field of educational endeavor, we feel that inhibition, as an important function of the nervous system (in fact, we may call it a protec- tive function) should be recognized and cultivated early in life. The well-trained child is the one possessing a well balanced nervous system. Such a child does not have spasms, because appetite and desire have been trained, and these virtues of self control manifest themselves in nerve power and control. Thus do we find the consideration of a purely scientific aspect of the development of the nervous system leads us into thoughts concerning moral develop- ment of the units of human society. Through such studies as this, the physician becomes an important factor in the development of a proper and healthful social life. Inhibitory Effect of Pressure. Now, to return to an- other view of our subject, we call your attention to a few of the recognized phenomena constantly presented to us, by our efforts to alleviate disease conditions. We know by many experiences that by pressure on the surface of the body, over the course of a nerve bundle, a restraining influence is often exercised over the function of the tissue receiving the terminals of that nerve bundle. Even more interesting is the observed fact that a restraining influence is often exerted on tissues remote from the point of pres- sure, which do not receive any of the terminals of the nerve which is pressed upon, but receive terminals of other nerves from the same segment of the central nervous system. We may even go farther and say that it is not an unobserved phenomenon to have functional activity restrained in very remote tissues, which do not seem 360 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY ordinarily to be immediately connected with the segment of nerve tissue directly affected. This diffusion of re- straining influences, following external pressure, would seem to point to the probability that the pressure acts as a stimulus to an inhibitory mechanism in the central nervous system. If this were not so, we could not expect any reflex restraining effects, such as we are constantly seeking. As examples of pressure effects, let us call at- tention to pressure of the suboccipital nerves in cases of headache. These nerves are in position to be compressed against bone. The effect of compression seems to be manifested peripherally by a decrease in pain. Pain in the abdominal viscera can frequently be lessened, to a very appreciable extent, by external pressure made over the proper associated spinal area. In this we have a good example of the reflex effect of pressure, which seems to uphold the idea that pressure is really stimulation of a function residing in the central nervous tissues. Pres- sure over the sacral nerves in a woman passing through the menopause, and troubled by irregular heart action, has been known to be almost immediately followed by reg- ular heart rhythm. Since the cardiac irregularity was a reflex, occasioned by disturbance of the sacral plexus, there must have been a re-adjustment of nervous activity, due to some form of stimulation. It seems very probable that a movement, which we name inhibition, may in reality be a form of stimulation which calls forth a function of the central nervous system, the resultant action of the cen- tral nervous system being merely evidence of the fact that re-adjustment takes place as a self preservative activity, i. e., a manifestation toward the normal. Dosage. We are likely to be misled into the fatuous belief that if we give just enough stimulation, or inhibi- tion, in a given case, i. e., if our dosage is just right, we will get perfect results. This is the old stumbling block of homeopathy and allopathy. Devotees of these systems beguile themselves with the idea that specificity of dosage PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 361 is the needful thing. If we observe closely, we are very cognizant of the fact that we can not exactly estimate the quantity of nerve force resident in the patient we are treating. This being so, there is no possibility of exact dosage, hence stimulation and inhibition, as thera- peutic measures, other than simply palliative procedures, are of little avail. We are continually impressed with one of the fundamental ideas in osteopathic practice, that the only measurable guiding quantity in giving an osteo- pathic treatment is the palpable tissue change, the lesion. Any case not presenting a palpable lesion, can only be treated on general principles underlying natural therapeu- tics, i. e., the tonic effect of change, re-adjustment. These changes range all the way from slight variations in diet, habits, surroundings and thoughts, up to genuine shock. Inhibition as a form of movement has a place in our prac- tice, but it is well for us to have a realizing sense of its limitations. Impairment of Function. Inhibition, as a function of the central nervous system, must necessarily impress us with a host of new ideas in connection with the mani- festation of lack of restraint of functional activity in various tissues. Enuresis in the babe is normal, but we look with suspicion on its presence in the four year old; there is retardation of development. Chorea is an evi- dence of impairment of this function, after it has appar- ently been normally developed. Paralysis agitans is an evidence of impairment of this function late in life. Physiological Activity Is the Result of Stimulation. All the functions of our body are initiated by stimuli. It must not be inferred from this statement that the author is satisfied that life consists of nothing but reflexes. So far as we can note the phenomena of muscle and gland, we are compelled to recognize the fact that most of them are re- flexes. Work done by muscle and gland is initiated prin- cipally by sensory stimuli. Excessive sensory stimuli excite 362 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY increased work in muscle and gland, sometimes to the point of exhaustion. To decrease the amount of work, we must decrease the number of stimuli. The stimuli originate at the periphery of sensory nerves. Sensory nerves are most numerous in the skin, mucous membrane and muscle. Inhib- itory influences must be applied to one or more of these structures. Skin is the surface tissue, richly supplied by sensory nerves, and under it are muscles, also well sup- plied by sensory nerves. Hilton's Law. Hilton, by showing that the skin, mus- cles and synovial membrane of a joint, or the skin, mus- cles of the abdomen and contents covered by peritoneum, are innervated from the same segment of the cord, laid a foundation for the rational use of inhibition, in osteopathic practice. Inhibition Therapeutic. Inhibition, as a terapeutic procedure, consists in a steady digital pressure made over some nerve trunk, or over an area which is closely con- nected with a spinal segment from which nerves pass to an internal viscus, which we desire to affect. In order to explain the necessity for this movement and its beneficial effects, we must note the phenomena of vaso-motion. How Vaso-motor Centers Act. Vaso-motor centers act according to the sum of the stimuli reaching them from skin, muscle, glands, etc. If the sensory nerves of one lateral half of the body are stimulated, as by pricking with needles, the temperature of that half of the body will be higher than the other, thus demonstrating that excessive stimulation of sensory nerves ends in vaso- dilation, i. e., loss of tone of the muscular coat of the blood vessels. Since excessive, i. e., over-stimulation of sensory nerves in this experiment causes inhibition of vascular tone and hyperaemia results, we argue that any procedure, which lessens the excessive amount of stimulation pass- ing to a vaso-motor center, will favor the return of the vascular tone. Therefore, since it is easily demonstrated PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 363 that digital pressure lessens pain and sensitiveness in the area pressed upon, we know that the registering power of these peripheral nerves is decreased, and there results a better vascular tone in that area. Over-stimulation Equals Inhibition. If over-stimula- tion results in inhibition of vascular tone, as the above ex- periment seems to demonstrate, then it appears rational to decrease the stimulation to a point where vascular tone is not disturbed. Digital pressure does decrease the ir- ritability; therefore we may express ourselves as follows: Inhibition of sensory nerves, in skin and muscle, which are over-stimulated, will favor the return of vascular tone in all areas which are supplied with nerves from the same segment of the cord. Over-stimulation of sensory nerves causes vascular dilatation. Inhibition lessens the irritability of sensory nerves and hence decreases the number of stimuli reach- ing the vaso-motor centers, thus allowing a return of vas- cular tone. The Guide for the Use of Inhibition. Knowing the complete distribution of any nerve trunk, we may judge the condition of the internal structures, supplied by one of its branches, by the physiological activity of surface tissues, supplied by others of its branches. In this way we are guided as to our use of inhibition. Pathological Changes Which Accompany Over-stimu- lation. If an individual eats a hearty meal, and before it is digested eats another, and continues the process, the stimu- lation of the sensory nerves in the mucosa of his digestive viscera results in a physiological hyperaemia which, under the ceaseless stimulation of the presence of food, finally becomes chronic. The liver becomes hyperaemic, and its sensory nerves are stimulated by the increased amount of blood present in the capillaries. These sensory nerves do not register their impressions on the sensorium of the brain, but do excite that area of the spinal cord with which they are connected by means of the rami-communicantes. 364 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY This area of the spinal cord lies between the sixth and tenth dorsal spines. From this area, nerves pass to the deep muscles of the back. These muscles are excited to undue contraction, and their sensory nerves are thereby made sensitive. The capillary circulation in these muscles is poor, thereby increasing the muscular sensitiveness. This muscular sensitiveness, or rather increased stimula- tion of the sensory endings in the muscles, sends a new set of impulses to the same area of the spinal cord, sixth to the tenth dorsal, and the cord reflexes them back to the sympathetic system. Thus a figure 8 is formed with the union of the circles representing the spinal cord. With impulses entering the cord from both loops, sympathetic and cerebro-spinal, the cord itself becomes hyperaemic. The constant interchange of reflexes which were originated by excessive demands on the physiological activity of the tissues involved, either ends in a spasmodic effort of na- ture to rid itself of the intolerable condition, by means of a "bilious spell," or the hyperaemia causes excessive secre- tion of mucous, hypertrophy of connective tissue, and atrophy of parenchymatous tissue. The bilious spell is nature's safety valve. Rational Treatment. After such a condition as we have described is well established, dieting merely lessens the reflexes in the sympathetic portion of our figure 8. The reflexes in the cerebro-spinal portion are still active, because the deep muscles of the back have become chron- ically contracted, and continue to over-stimulate the sen- sory nerves. These cerebro-spinal reflexes still help to maintain the hyperaemia of the spinal cord, which con- tinues to disturb the rhythm of the sympathetic. Mani- festly, the treatment must consider both portions of the figure 8. Dietetics will lessen to some extent the hyper- activity of the sympathetic loop. Digital pressure, inhibi- tion, will relax the spinal muscles, and lessen the hyper- activity of the cerebro-spinal loop. The two lines of treat- ment will decrease the number of stimuli entering the PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 365 segment of the spinal cord, sixth to tenth dorsal, hence there will cease to go out from that segment a series of impulses which have tended to pervert the secretion in the digestive viscera. The contraction of the spinal muscles may have sub- luxated a vertebra which then becomes a source of irrita- tion. In such a case, a movement to replace the vertebra in its true relation acts in the nature of inhibition, i. e., it ceases to cause excessive stimuli to enter the spinal cord. Digital pressure on contracted dorsal muscles causes sensitiveness, i. e., consciousness of the fact that the nerves in that region are abnormally irritable. The sensitive area along the spine will be in direct central connection with an internal viscus which is equally if not more sensitive. Hyperaesthesia of Sensory Areas Diagnosis. The hyperaesthesia of sensory areas along the spine is of prac- tical value for diagnostic and therapeutic purposes when we know their nerve connections. By inhibiting a hyper- sensitive spinal area, we set up a change in an area of low sensibility, i. e., a visceral area. The inhibitory pressure does not merely deceive consciousness by lessening the power of its informing nerves, which alone have power to stir up those reflexes which will tend to assist the dis- eased part to return to normal. Results of Inhibition. We know that inhibition les- sens pain in the area of conscious sensation. The result of daily practice teaches us this. Inhibition of painful areas does more than lessen pain ; it aborts those impulses which are the result of pain, and sends a counter impulse into the center which, in a measure, negatives the original impulse. If this were not so, we could not stop vomiting, intestinal peristalsis or uterine colic. We know that inhibition of a sensory area of the spine not only stops pain in that area, but also pain, if there is any, in the viscus which is in central 366 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY connection with it. Therefore, if we affect the tonus of both skeletal and involuntary muscles, sensation in the cerebro-spinal and sympathetic systems, we certainly af- fect the caliber of blood vessels and the activity of secre- tory and excretory glands. It is not too much to say that inhibition does not de- ceive consciousness by lessening the power of registering nerves, but does stop a storm of reflexes which have no reparative tendency, and that it does affect the area of low- sensibility, as is evidenced by a change in the condition of its musculature, blood supply and secretory activity. There are many osteopaths who contend that the key- note of all manipulative work, according to osteopathic principles, is the discovery and removal of a "lesion," osseous in character. With this idea carried to extreme, the author has no sympathy. In connection with this idea the student is referred to the chapter on Subluxation, page 283. The Phrase "Remove Lesions." The phrase "Remove Lesions" is a good one, and yet it is inexact in many cases. It is an elastic phrase, and capable of many and varied interpretations. Each year of active practice adds to the osteopathic idea of what lesions are. Our litera- ture contains many references to lesions which are not mentioned in Dr. Still's writings, and yet Dr. Still's basic work has made the later conception possible. Osseous lesions have always been paramount in our work and thought, but muscular lesions now hold an equal place, and bid fair to lead, when we see more clearly into the subject. The Human Body Is a Vital Mechanism. We say -that "when the anatomical is absolutely correct, the physi- ological potentiates." This conception is based on the statement that the human body is a machine. The human body is vastly more than a machine. It is a vital mech- anism, and the fact that it is vital, renders it susceptible to other influences besides mechanical, such as falls, twists, PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 367 strains, etc. We may truthfully say that when the physiological is over-active, the anatomical alignment is disarranged. The principles of osteopathy, as they were first promulgated, declared that a structural defect is at the bottom of every physiological defect. Structure al- ways affects function. A sufficient number of cases were found to give a foundation of fact to this statement. Hasty reasoning tried to make this an all-embracing prin- ciple, applicable to every case of disease. Other schools of medicine have made similar mistakes. The allopathic school promulgated the "law of contraries." The homeo- pathic school holds aloft the "law of similars." Neither of these are laws. A law is absolute, no exceptions are tolerated. If there are any exceptions to a so-called law, it ceases to be a law. Osteopathic Meaning of Inhibition. By the term in- hibition, we do not attempt to convey any other meaning than that of pressure, applied at some particular point on the surface of the body, for the purpose of lessening the hyperactivity, or hyperaesthesia, of the immediate, or some distant part of the body. The inhibition itself does in some cases remove what we may choose to call a lesion, in other cases it may make the removal of a lesion possible, but in the majority of cases, its effect is purely on the nerves, thereby acting on both the motor and sensory 1 portions of the reflex arc, lessening muscular contraction and pain. The Scientific Use of Inhibition. It has been proven many times that the osteopath is capable of checking ex- cessive functional activity in viscera by the simple means of inhibition. Some would quibble as to the cause of this activity. The original stimulus may have disappeared, but the reflexes which it initiated may be perpetuating the condition. Many cases have been treated in which no definite cause or osseous lesion could be discovered. Some of these cases came under the heading Indiscretions; others under purely mental conditions. These cases were treated 368 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY by inhibition, based on a knowledge of the anatomy and physiology of the parts involved. The treatment was successful. We are sure that such successes are just as gratifying, just as scientific, as are those in which the find- ing and reducing of a subluxation brings the glow of tri- umph to the eye of patient and physician alike. Inhibition as a Local Anaesthetic. Inhibition is a local anaesthetic, and as such, is being used universally in the osteopathic profession today. True, it is not a treatment which will secure results in a minute. We can not in- hibit for five minutes at the eighth dorsal spine, in a case of malarial fever, and expect to check the chill. The chill can sometimes be controlled as long as the inhibition is maintained. The influence thus gained over the muscular contractions seems to increase the patient's resistance. The onset of the next chill usually shows a decrease in the intensity of muscular contraction, and the duration is shortened. No one would say that we remove a physical lesion by this treatment, or the cause of the chill. Mus- cular contraction of the deep dorsal muscles comes on with the chill, but does not cause it. Surely inhibition in this case works a nervous change of a pronounced char- acter. An example of the good results of inhibition is af- forded by one of the author's cases. Woman, fifty years of age, suffered from diarrhoea, two years' duration. Five to seven bowel movements daily. No formed feces. Usually the stools were typhoid in character. Uterine fibroid removed prior to development of diarrhoea. His- tory of continuous drug treatment. Osteopathic examina- tion did not reveal any osseous lesion. There seemed to be nothing to lay the blame upon, except the once existent fibroid, or the result of the operation. Since no definite lesion existed, the treatment was planned as a test of in- hibition without any other method. At the end of three months the patient had but one movement daily, and the PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 369 feces were well formed. Pressure, and gentle stretching of the muscles extending over the area between the eighth dorsal and fifth lumbar spines, constituted the methods used. From fifteen to twenty minutes was the duration of the treatment, three times per week for two months, and twice per week thereafter. In cholelithiasis the intense pain can be modified by inhibition at ninth and tenth dorsal spines, right side. In- hibition at this point also lessens the contraction of the abdominal muscles, and thus makes direct manipulative treatment possible. The same is true in cases of appen- dicitis. We could not give direct manipulative treatment in such cases, if it were not for the power of inhibition to lessen pain in the affected area, and the consequent mus- cular contraction. How much more influence is exerted over the nerves of the appendix and surrounding region, it is hard to say. It may be that the inhibition arouses other forces of a stimulatory character to be brought into action to empty the appendix. Direct manipulation in these cases is frequently out of the question. Inhibition to Remove Lesions. Inhibition is a large and necessary part of many treatments given for the pur- pose of removing a definite lesion, for if inhibition were not first used, the true lesion could not be touched. This is the case in intestinal obstructions. The intestinal irrita- tion causes such bowel contractions, cramps, and con- traction of the abdominal muscles, that the physician's fingers cannot palpate the disturbed area. Inhibition over the spinal area from which the nerves to the disturbed area pass out, will cause relaxation of the muscles. In a case of pleurisy which came under the author's care, an opportunity was afforded to test inhibition un- hampered by any other method. The patient could not bear to have the right arm moved; respiration was exceed- ingly shallow, and the physical strength was very low. Hot fomentations had been used, but to lift the arm caused 370 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY excruciating pain in the side. It was a case of dry pleu- risy. Steady inhibition was given for fifteen minutes, be- tween the transverse processes on the right side, in the area between the third and the seventh dorsal vertebrae. After this length of time the patient could raise the right arm above the head and take much better inspiration. As a result of this treatment given twice per day, the patient made a good recovery, though all the metabolic processes were carried on in a very unsatisfactory way. Inhibition as a Preparatory Treatment. There is still another time when inhibition is of incalculable value : In making examination of the vagina or rectum, especially the former. Several times, in the author's practice, exam- ination of the vagina seemed impossible, without great dis- tress to the patient. The irritability of the mucous mem- brane of the vagina caused intense spasmodic contraction of the sphincter, but steady inhibition over the third and fourth sacral foramina for about five minutes, caused com- plete relaxation, and the examination could then be made without any trouble. Cases have been reported to the author by many osteopaths, describing the good results of inhibition in gynecological cases. These cases have ranged from simple nervous vaginismus to curettement. Since the sacral nerves are so near the surface, and are not in- terrupted in their course to the pelvic viscera, they afford excellent opportunity for the good effects of inhibition to be demonstrated. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 371 CHAPTER XVIII. SOUNDS PRODUCED IN JOINTS BY MANIPULA- TION. Normal Sounds. It is not uncommon to hear peculiar sounds accompanying the normal movement of joints. These sounds are indicated by popular terms, such as "cracking," "snapping" and "popping." They are so common that every one has heard them, either in their own bodies, or those of friends. Pulling the fingers is the best known method. It is commonly supposed that such a method, if persisted in, will enlarge the joints. It is doubtful whether there is any proof of this. Doubtless the fear of it originated as an effort to frighten some one in whom the phenomenon was easily pro- duced. Loose jointed people are able to produce sounds in many joints by carrying normal movements to the limit. Scarcely any movable joint, in which the ligaments and muscles are normally relaxed, is free from the possibility of producing sound, when the opposing muscles are contracted unevenly, i. e., either the flexors or extensors predominating. The joint surfaces will slip upon each other suddenly, thus producing the sound. After it has been once made, it is rarely repeated without there has been an interval of rest, during which the muscles change their tension. The crack- ing in the tempero-maxillary articulation can be repeated until the structures ache, because it is occasioned by the slid- ing of the interarticular cartilage on to the eminentia articu- laris. The wrist and shoulder are capable of producing fre- quent sounds, on account of their free movement, and the many directions in which the force is applied. 372 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY Abnormal Sounds. A large number of sounds which originate in joints are abnormal; i. e., the joints are not normal, or else these particular sounds would not be pro- duced. Some of these sounds are familiar to all physicians. They result from forced motion, actively or passively made, in a joint having limited movement as a result of injury; or intracapsular deposits, due to disease. Another class of sounds is produced by forced movement, passive, in joints having lost some of the normal relations of their surfaces. Pathology of Joints Producing Abnormal Sounds. It may be well to recount systematically the conditions in which passive. movement of joints produces sounds. In this way we can note the difference between the characters of sounds usually recognized by physicians, and those especial- ly peculiar to manipulative treatment of subluxations. Synovial Adhesions. The breaking of adhesions be- tween articular surfaces produces a sound comparable to that occasioned by the breaking of a green stick, in which the fibers break individually as the force becomes greater and greater. Synovial adhesions are due to many causes, the simplest of which are slight injury and non-use of a joint. An injury sufficient to cause slight efforts at repair, when accompanied by rest, will result in a few adhesions. Voluntary movement of the joint is arrested by these adhe- sions. Such conditions frequently follow a sprain, or the splinting of a joint just above or below a fracture. The joint may be quite well, but by keeping it perfectly fixed during the repair of the fracture, the periarticular structures lose their elasticity, and a few adhesions may form within. Non-use of a Slightly Sprained Joint. Sometimes a timid person may be so fearful of moving a slightly sprained joint that adhesions form, and control of the joint is lost. I was recently called to examine a foot, which was very pain- ful and useless. Seven months previously the ankle was sprained. The foot had not been used since that injury. I found the foot stiff, cold and resting on a pillow. Examina- tion revealed slight motion which seemed to be limited by PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 37* elastic bands. There was no inflammation in the foot. Sud- den force, applied first in direction of flexion, then extension, caused a series of cracking sounds, which indicated the ru )- turing of adhesions. The range of motion instantly in- creased. If these adhesions had been broken six months be- fore, much of the muscular atrophy of the leg and thigh would have been avoided. A patient with broken femur, having been kept in bed twelve weeks, was unable to move the knee, on account of adhesions formed during period of non-action due to splint- ing. Forcible flexion of the knee a little each day gradually broke the adhesions, until movement was nearly normal. These are the cases with which all physicians are fa- miliar. The sounds produced are not repeated at any time following the first forcible movements. Such adhesions as these, are due to rest, not without some slight injury, involv- ing the joint structures. I do not believe that non-use alone is capable of causing adhesions. Rheumatic Joints. Rheumatic joints sometimes mani- fest conditions similar to sprain. Adhesions form during the period of inflammation and persist after its subsidence. Rupturing these by sudden force frequently restores normal movement. All the foregoing conditions are the result of some de- gree of inflammation. Forced movement breaks the adhe- sion, which makes a sound as it breaks. There is no repeti- tion of the sound in succeeding movements. Semilunar Cartilages of the Knee. The semilunar cartilages of the knee joint may become displaced and cause great pain, with loss of motion. A case recently under treat- ment gave history of frequent accidents of this kind, while riding a bicycle. When extending the leg to push the pedal down, the force was exerted with the knee somewhat everted. Excruciating pain came on suddenly, and the leg could not be extended. Examination revealed a very sen- sitive spot at the outer and anterior surface of the joint. The semilunar cartilage slipped forward and blocked the exten- 374 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY sion of the joint. By taking the leg between my knees and making thumb pressure on the painful prominent spot, then gently flexing and slightly rotating the tibia on the condyles of the femur, followed by quick extension, a distinct sound was elicited, and the action of the joint was restored. The sound indicated replacement of the cartilage. "Bone Setting." It has been supposed that much of the work of osteopaths consisted in breaking adhesions, which were simple enough, but happened not to have been strictly attended to by the surgeons. There is much chance to misinterpret the work of the osteopaths in reducing sub- luxations. Medical men of established schools of medicine have failed to closely analyze the structural condition of joints before and after manipulation, hence they have jumped to the conclusion that all of our work was of that kind called "bone setting" for want of a better descriptive term. This appellation, "bone setting," is a popular one, first used in England to describe the work of individuals, usually un- educated, who treated patients by manipulation of joints, which they said were out. Quick forceful movements in the direction of normal joint actions usually resulted in a "pop- ping" sound. When this occurred the "bone setter" consid- ered his work accomplished. Historical Reference. Aside from adhesions the condi- tions which we find limiting the movements of joints are subluxations. Wharton P. Hood, M.D., M.R.C.S., furnished the Lancet a description of what was commonly called "bone setting." His articles were published in that journal March and April, 1871. The articles were published in book form the same year, entitled "On Bone Setting (So Called) and Its Relation to the Treatment of Joints Crippled by In- jury, Rheumatism, Inflammation, Etc." Dr. Hood made close observations of the work of a "bone setter" Mr. Hut- ton. This gentleman sought to teach Dr. Hood his art, as a matter of gratitude for professional attention given him by Dr. Peter Hood. In the pages of this book I find a clear, concise exposition of the bone setter's art, together with a PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 375 record of the observations of the author, who has the advan- tage of excellent training in the medical arts. There is no doubt in my mind as to the similarity existing between the conditions which were recognized by so-called "bone setters" and those who have formed the basis for the successful ad- vancement of osteopathy. The difference lies principally in the educational qualifications. Dr. Hood notes that the man- ipulations were made without any knowledge of anatomy and physiology, but were nevertheless astonishingly successful, and he calls attention to the fact that much greater success, with less probability of injury, ought to result from these manipulations, when the true pathology of the joint is under- stood; i. e., when the operator is in fact a trained surgeon, thoroughly versed in the details of anatomy. Dr. Hood evi- dently did not understand the conditions which we recog- nize as subluxations of the ribs and vertebrae, although he came very near to it, as you will observe hereafter. His at- tention was principally fixed on the conditions following greater or lesser degrees of joint inflammation, resulting in intra-articular adhesions or extra-articular contractions. In the case of adhesions, breaking them causes a sound which can not be repeated, but subluxations may occur repeatedly in the same joint, each reduction causing a sound. Tarsal and Carpal Subluxations. In Dr. Hood's chap- ter on pathology, I find the following: "Subluxations of tar- sal and carpal bones must occur, I think, in a considerable number of instances. I mean by subluxations, some dis- turbance of the proper relations of a bone without absolute displacement, and I believe that such disturbance may be produced either by the traction of a band of adhesion about the joints, or by a twist or other direct violence." Grant the possibility of subluxation in the arthrodial joints of the car- pus and tarsus, it is not improbable to conceive of them in any other joint. As a pure example of "bone setting," one of my recent cases is apropos. A lady stepped on some small hard object, the point of contact being just under the instep. Sharp pain, localized on top of the instep, began at once, and 376 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY was not relieved by heat or other antiphlogistic measures. Forty-eight hours after the onset of pain, I was called to examine the foot. Found some swelling over the instep, but palpation localized the pain in the articulation between the scaphoid and internal cuneiform. Any attempt at local movement of this joint caused sharp pain. The patient could not stand on the foot, on account of the pain, which was in- creased thereby. Extension of the foot, with firm pressure on the upper side of the articulation, caused a very loud sound, the prominence of the scaphoid was not so apparent, and the patient could put her weight on the foot immediate- ly. This was a case of tarsal subluxation. If the same de- gree of displacement had existed in a vertebral articulation, the effect on circulation in the nerve centers of the cord might have caused very widespread symptoms. The subluxations treated by "bone setters" have usual- ly been those which occasioned pain in the joint. The osteo- path does not depend upon pain as a symptom of subluxa- tion, but makes palpation the true guide. Enarthrodial and Arthrodial Joints. When the head of the femur is forced out of the ascetabulum, there is more or less tearing of ligaments, with consequent inflammation. Replacement of the head is not accomplished without a dis- tinct sound. The sound is considered as audible evidence of successful operation. The same is true of the shoulder joint. The great range of movement in these joints necessarily re- quires lax ligaments, therefore great separation of the joint surfaces is possible. The arthrodial joints, in all parts of the body, are constructed on a different principle. The range of movement is not great in them, and their ligaments are comparatively short. The form of the body surfaces of the arthrodial joints does not limit motion, as in the case of en- arthrodial joints. Replacement of the head of the femur or humerus re- quires it to move over a ridge of bone or cartilage, and when it sinks suddenly into its proper place, a sound is heard. Probably the sound which accompanies the reduction of a PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 377 subluxation arthrodial joint, can be explained by the sudden readjustment of joint surfaces, even though there is no ridge of bone or cartilage to glide over. It is hardly probable that a subluxated joint has its surfaces smoothly, though in a limited area, opposed to each other. Forcing a greater area of contact corrects the unevenly opposed surfaces. Slow vs. Quick Reduction of a Subluxation. A sub- luxation may be reduced slowly, and in such an instance no sound is heard. Quick, sharp force is required to overcome the periarticular tension which will result in sudden replace- ment with sound. Bone Setters' phrases. The use of the statement by some osteopaths that a "joint is out" or a "bone is out" is merely the direct appropriation of the "bone setter's" pet phrase. The use of the phrase "There, it's in," or some sim- ilar one, when the sound of the reduction is heard, is also an appropriation from the same source. These phrases are un- scientific, and should not be used by any one who pretends to understand the true pathology of the condition he is treat- ing. In the case of sound due to the breaking of adhesions, we could not truly say a "bone is out," nor in the case of subluxation is it right to describe it thus. If it is adhesion, call it so, and if a subluxation, describe it carefully. In this way definite knowledge of joint conditions will be gathered. Differences of Opinion. There is some difference of opinion between osteopaths as to whether a subluxation must give forth a sound when properly reduced. Discus- sions of the subject thus far have not settled it. It seems that the statement made previously in this chapter, that slow reduction of a subluxation by relaxing movements will not cause a sound, but forceful and sudden relaxation will do so, about covers the facts. We know that subluxations are reduced by both methods, with satisfactory results. Elsewhere we have called attention to the treatment of subluxations. For comparative purposes, and that the stu- dent may know what was understood concerning the manip- ulative treatment of the spinal column previous to the ad- 378 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY vent of osteopathy, we quote a portion of Dr. Hood's chap- ter on "Affections of the Spine." "Affections of the Spine," Dr. Hood. "I fear it must be admitted that the great importance of the spinal cord, and the gravity of its diseases, have rather tended to make professional men overlook the osseous and ligamentous case by which it is enclosed, and which is liable to all the mala- dies that befall bones and ligaments elsewhere. The quack, on the other hand, who probably never heard of the spinal cord, recognizes the presence of structures with which he is familiar, and deals with them as he does in other situations. The result is much the same as in the hip joint. The quack every now and then cures conditions which the authorized practitioner had regarded with a sort of reverence because they were "spinal"; and he every now and then kills a pa- tient because this reverence did not exist for his protection. .If the profession generally would so study the diseases of the spinal cord as to rescue them from specialists, the first step would be taken towards rescuing the disease of the vertebral column from quacks. "Crick in the Back." "However, the matter may be ex- plained, it is quite certain that many people now resort to bone setters, complaining of a "crick" or pain or weakness in the back, usually consequent upon some injury or undue exertion, and that these applicants are cured by movements of flexion and extension, coupled with pressure upon any painful spot. Manipulation of the Neck. "In a few cases, Mr. Hut- ton was consulted on account of stiffness about the neck or cervical vertebrae, and he then was accustomed to straighten them. * * * His left forearm would be placed un- der the lowered chin of the patient, with the hand coming round to the base of the occipital bone. The right thumb would then be placed on any painful spot on the cervical spine, and the chin suddenly elevated as much as seemed to be required. As far as my observation extends, the in- stances of this kind were not bona fide examples of adhe- PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 379 FIG. 151. Illustration from "On Bone Setting" by Whar- ton P. Hood, 1871. sions, but generally such as might be attributed to slight muscular rigidity, or even to some form of imaginary mal- ady. The benefit gained was probably rather due to the pain of the operation and the effect produced by it upon the mind of the patient than to any actual change in the physi- cal condition concerned. Manipulation of the Back. "For the lower regions of the spine he had two methods of treatment differing in de- tail but not in principle. In the first, when the painful spot was found the patient was made to get out of bed and to stand facing its side, with the front of the legs or perhaps the knees according to the height of the patient and the bedstead pressed against it. She was then told to bend forward until the bed was touched by the elbows. His left arm was then placed across the chest, and the thumb of the right hand upon the painful spot. Firm pressure was then made with the thumb, and as soon as he felt that he had settled himself into such a position that he could obtain 380 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY the full power of the left arm, the patient was told to assume the erect posture with as much rapidity and vigor as she could command. This movement was facilitated and ex- pedited by the throwing up of his left arm and the opposing force of the right thumb. As a rule there seemed to be two painful spots, answering to the upper and lower border of the affected vertebrae, so that the manoeuvre would require to be repeated. "In the second method the patient was seated in a chair placed a short distance from the wall, so that the feet could be firmly pressed against it. She was told to bend forward and place her arms between her legs, with the elbows rest- ing against the inner side of the knee; to sit firmly on the chair, and at a given signal to throw herself upright. The operator passed his left arm under the chest, placed his right thumb on the painful spot, and, in order to obtain firm and resisting pressure, rested his elbow against the back of the chair. The signal being given, the operator, keeping his fist clenched so as to support his thumbs and the elbow being held firm in its position, when the patient throws herself upright, resists the approach of her back to the chair and bends her head and shoulders as far backwards as possible, the position of the feet preventing any forward movement. Treatment of Upper Dorsal. "These two methods are used for cases in which pain is present in the dorsal verte- brae below the eighth, or in any of the lumbar. The treat- ment used for the upper dorsal and lower cervical vertebrae was to place the operator's knee against the painful spot and, with the hands placed upon the shoulders, to draw the upper part of the body as far back as possible. "In cases when pain was complained of in the dorsal and lumbar region and the backward movements did not afford the required relief, the patient was made to bend side- ways, and a similar process was gone through as in the other manipulations. Comment. "As a commentary on all this, there is manifestly little to say, except that the size of the vertebral PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 381 column is such as to admit of considerable diminution with- out injury to the cord, and that the bones and ligaments of the column as already observed are liable to the same results of injury and to the same diseases that befall bones and ligaments elsewhere. Differential Diagnosis. "The surgeon who is consulted about a case of spinal malady should first of all make sure that he is not frightened by a bugbear, and should then pro- ceed to determine by scientific methods of examination whether or not he is in the presence of disease of the nervous centers, or of caries, abscess or other destructive change in the vertebral column. On such points as these no man who possesses a thermometer, a microscope and a test tube has any excuse for remaining long in doubt; and if he is able to exclude the possibility of such conditions, he may then re- gard the spine simply as a portion of the skeleton and may deal with it accordingly. Here, as elsewhere, injury and rest, or rest and counter irritation, may produce adhesions that painfully limit movement and that may at once be broken by resolute flexion and extension. Here, as elsewhere, partial displacement may occur and may be rectified by pressure and motion. In the lower cervical, the dorsal and the lum- bar portions of the spine the change of position of any single vertebra can only be slight enough to produce pain and stiffness, but not enough to produce visible deformity. In the highest region, however, partial dislocations are some- times more manifest. The following case is quoted from the hospital report of the Medical Times and Gazette of August 5th, 1865 : 'John S , aged 21, laborer, of St. Mary's Cray, was admitted on May 26th, 1865, under Mr. Hilton. States that he has been ailing foi the last three months ; loss of ap- petite and general debility; has, however, followed employ- ment. On Sunday, May 14, he was stooping down to black his boots as they were on his feet, when suddenly he "felt a snap" in the upper and back part of his neck; he felt as if someone had struck him there. About a quarter of an hour after he became insensible and continued so about half an 382 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY hour; then he felt a stiffness and numbness at the sides and back of his head and the back of his neck, with a fullness in the throat and difficulty of swallowing. At first he. had no loss of power over his limbs, only slight pain down his right arm ; some days after admission, however, he had partial loss of power in the right arm, which shortly recovered itself. On admission he carries his head fixed, and has pain on slightest attempt to rotate, flex or extend the head; his jaw is partially fixed, and he cannot open his mouth wide enough to admit of a finger being passed to the back of the pharynx ; his voice is thick and guttural ; deglutition not at- tended by any great uneasiness. Complains of all symptoms before enumerated. Externally, over the spine of the second cervical vertebra, there is a tumor hard and resisting, but tender on pressure; this is evidently formed by the undue prominence of the spine of the axis itself; the tenderness is not general, but circumscribed; the parts all around are numb. He was put on his back on a hard bed, his head was slightly elevated 'and a small sand bag was placed beneath the projecting spine, and the whole head main- tained in a fixed position by larger sand bags. He was ordered pulv. Dov. gr. V; hydr. c. creta; gr. iij., bis die. This was continued for about ten days, when his gums became affected slightly, and it was then omitted. Marked improvement has taken place in his general appearance and more particularly in his special symptoms. He con- tinued until July 3, gradually and steadily improving. He then had acute rheumatic inflammation of the right knee and elbow joint, followed in a day or two by a similar state in the left knee joint. There was no evidence of a pyaemic state. The joints were blistered; he has been treated with pot. nitr. and lemon juice and is now fast re- covering. The tenderness and all the symptoms have disap- peared, the projection still remaining, and he expresses him- self much relieved by the continued rest in bed.' Size of the Vertebral Canal. "Mr. Hilton, in remark- ing on this case, observed that it had been demonstrated that PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 383 the area of the vertebral canal might be diminished by one- third, provided that the diminution was slowly effected, without giving rise to any alarming or indeed marked symp- toms of compression of the cord. Conservative vs. Radical Treatment. "Now, there can be no doubt that most surgeons would agree that Mr. Hilton exercised a sound discretion in simply placing this man in conditions favorable to recovery, or in keeping him at rest until the axis was fixed in its new position and the spinal cord accustomed to the change in its relations. There can be little doubt that Mr. Hutton would have made thumb pressure on the prominent spine while he sharply raised the head. The probability is that he would by this manoeu- vre have cured his patient; the possibility is that he might have killed him. This sort of 'make a spoon or spoil a horn' practice we may contentedly leave to quacks, and without risking reputation in doubtful cases. I think we may find a considerable number which are not doubtful, in which skilled observation may exclude all elements of danger, and in which the rectification of displacement or the rup- ture of adhesions will be certainly followed by the most favorable results. For the discovery of these cases no set- tled rules can be laid down, since they can only be known by negations by the absence of the symptoms that would give warning of danger. The diagnosis must be made in each instance for itself, and in each must depend upon the sagacity and skill of the practitioner." 384 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY CHAPTER XIX. POSITIONS FOR EXAMINATION. Observation. The method of examination should be somewhat affected by one's getting a sense of the individu- ality of the patient. There are many things which one should be trained to observe quickly, such as the pose and movement of the patient, nutrition, character of the skin, etc. All of these things give a sense of direction to the examination, i. e., odd poses, compensatory movements, or cachexias lead one to try to determine the causes of these very apparent abnormalities. Minor phases of these things may escape our cursory glance, but it is unwise to com- mence any examination without first determining the probable region or regions especially requiring examina- tion. This does not mean being particularly guided by the patient's own statement, but rather seeking to exer- cise one's powers of observation and deduction. We wish it distinctly understood that we are striv- ing here to explain a special form of examination which is only a part of general diagnostic work. An examina- tion which comprehends merely the use of palpation would give a limited understanding of a patient's ailment, but since this book is concerned with elucidating groups of phenomena which can quite clearly be recognized by pal- pation, we will not use time or space to describe other coordinate methods which are ably taught in other texts. In order to be systematic in the examination of patients, it is well to adopt the use of a certain routine of positions which will best show the details of osseous struc- ture. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 385 Testing Alignment and Flexibility. The first position, as illustrated in Fig. 152, flexes the spinal column and makes the spinous processes prominent. This position is valuable in examining even very fleshy people. Approxi- mation or separation of the spines can be noted, also FIG. 152. Flexion of the spine in the vertical position to make the spinous processes prominent. 386 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY lateral deviation. If the amount of flesh over the spines, as in fat people, precludes the use of the sense of sight, you can ascertain the relation by the sense of touch. Sense of Touch. We wish to emphasize the necessity of the student's acquiring the habit of depending on the sense of touch, rather than of sight. In all osteopathic examinations, the sense of touch should be used to obtain those data concerning structure which form the basis of all diagnosis. Remember that you can not see bone, muscles and glands, but you can feel them. Inspection. While the patient is sitting erec% ascer- tain the flexibility of the spinal column. Note the position of the scapulae, whether near or far from the spinal col- umn, whether unevenly placed. Note the development of the trapezius, latissimus dorsi, and erector spinae, i. e., observe their surface markings. If the patient does not voluntarily relax while in the erect position, ask him to assume his normal posture. This will illustrate the points of greatest spinal stress and show how the spinal column acts in its normal weight carrying capacity. Palpation of the Ribs. Fig. 153 illustrates a method of bringing the ribs prominently into view, or in case of fleshy persons, making it easy to palpate them. By pull- ing the arm up and across the chest, the latissimus dorsi is stretched which brings the four lower ribs into a good position for examination. The movement of the scapula away from the vertebrae makes it easier for the examiner to feel the angles of the fourth and fifth ribs. It is not well to depend on this position for evidence of rib subluxations, because the tension of the latissimus dorsi brings at least the four lower ribs into proper alignment. The spacing of these ribs will then be equal. The chief value of this position is to give the exam- iner better opportunity to palpate the angles of the ribs above the ninth and to note the changed relations which PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 387 FIG. 153. Position to accentuate the prominence of the ribs. may take place at the anterior end of the ninth, tenth, eleventh and twelfth ribs. Palpation of the Spine. After gathering as much in- formation as possible by observing the form of the back, position of the scapulae and contour of the muscles, ex- amine the spine by means of your sense of touch. To do this, have the patient sit erect, being careful not to exag- gerate the normal posture, i. e., bend the spine far for- ward or backward in the lumbar region. A marked ten- 388 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 154. Palpation of the spine in the vertical position. dency to either position is indicative of weak muscles. Use the index and middle finger of either hand to care- fully note the relations of the individual vertebrae, as in Fig. 154. Begin at the first dorsal and work downward to the sacrum. Lateral subluxations are easily noted with the patient in this position. Gentle digital pressure may be made at the prominent side of any subluxated vertebra to determine the degree of sensitiveness. This informa- PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 389 tion is best secured when the patient is reclining, because the muscles are relaxed. While the patient is sitting there is usually too much contraction of both intrinsic and ex- trinsic muscles of the back to allow much examination, outside of mere study of alignment and normal or ab- normal curves. PIG. 155. Palpation of the dorsal muscles, horizontal position. Now have the patient recline on the right or left side, which is most convenient, as in Fig. 155. Examine the con- dition of the spinal muscles by using the ball of the ringers of one or both hands. Be careful not to use the ends of the fingers. Commence your examination at the first dorsal by noting the amount of sensitiveness directly on or between the spinous processes all the way to the coccyx. To elicit this sensitiveness use a moderate pressure, equal to about six pounds. With this much pressure the patient 390 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 156. Diagram of dorsal muscles, first, second, third and fifth layers. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 391 FIG. 157. Diagram of dorsal muscles fourth layer. Adapted from a diagram in Cunningham's Anatomy. 392 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY will be able to distinguish easily between the sense of mere pressure and a painful or hyper-sensitive feeling. Begin once more at the first dorsal and examine along the sides of the spines and about three inches from them. This space brings the internal and middle groups of in- trinsic muscles under your fingers. Extrinsic and Intrinsic Muscles of the Back. In speaking of extrinsic and intrinsic muscles of the back, we desire you to bear in mind the different groups as they are noted in Gray's Anatomy. Gray divides them into five layers. The first three layers are extrinsic, i. e., arise from vertebrae and insert into the humerus, scapulae, or ribs. They depend upon the intrinsic muscles of the fourth and fifth layers to fix the spine so that operating from the spinal column as a fixed point, they can move the upper extremities and ribs. While palpating a back which is moderately well mus- cled, you will be able to feel through the upper three layers and distinguish the condition of the muscles of the fourth layer. It is important that the student should learn to feel through the soft tissues to harder ones below. Skill in detecting varying degrees of density and hardness is an absolutely essential qualification of the diagnostician. A careful dissection of the fourth layer will disclose the fact that there are three parallel groups of muscles. The first is the spinalis dorsi which lies on the side of the spines. The second group lies more on the transverse processes. The longissimus dorsi and its continuations make up this group. The sacro-lumbalis and continuations make up the third group which lies on the angles of the ribs. Careful palpation will distinguish these divisions. The Diagnostic Value of Hyperaesthesia. Different points, along the line of the first group, which are hyper- sensitive, may be evidence of direct strain of a single ver- tebral articulation, or the result of a visceral reflex, or even in sympathy with a rib subluxation which affects sensory PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 393 nerves reaching the same segment of the cord from which its nerves arise. Hyperaesthesia directly upon the spines is usually found in connection with depression or eleva- tion of the spines, not lateral subluxation. Hyperaesthesia at points in the second group of mus- cles, i. e., the longissimus dorsi and continuations over the transverse processes, may result from vertebral or costal subluxation, or muscular contraction caused by visceral reflex. When this excessive sensitiveness is found at the angles of the ribs, in the short muscular divisions of the sacro-lumbalis and continuations, it nearly always signi- fies an irritation from a costal subluxation. The examination of the ribs should be made while the patient is in this reclining position. The fingers should follow the angles of the ribs, noting the spacing, special prominence or depression of an angle, then noting the compensatory changes at the chondro-costal articulations. In this way the relation of the ribs to each other can be determined. When pain exists at any one of the points named, or the digital pressure arouses a painful reflex, all of the sensory points along the course of the spinal nerve should be tested in order to determine the extent of the nerve irritation. Take for example, the point on the spinal column between the fifth and sixth dorsal. After examining these two spines and finding them well placed, our digital pressure at the sides might cause a painful reflex, i. e., the patient might complain of our pressure. Then we test the point over the transverse processes and angles of the ribs, and even the junction of the ribs and costal cartilages. If hyperaesthesia is present at all points in the distribution of the fifth spinal nerve, we understand that the original irritation may be slight, but long continued, or strong and of short duration. If no osseous displacement is discoverable, which has a rela- tionship with a hypersensitive nerve, we must look for evi- dence of disturbed functioning by the viscus most nearly 394 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY related. The original irritation might have been an exces- sive demand on the ability of the viscus, as in the case of the stomach being overloaded. In any case, the discovery of what appears to be an osseous lesion, leads us to test the condition of its related nerves. If they do not show undue excitability, the lesion is doubtful as a causative factor. A careful examination of vertebral spinous processes may show many deviations from symmetrical development, and the diagnostician should guard against the false evidence of these distorted spines. If a spine has been distorted by unequal development, there should be no sensitiveness around it except as the result of a visceral reflex. In case of such visceral reflex, the ex- aminer can not help being misled as to the value of the ap- parent osseous malformation. His ringers can not inform him that what he considers an osseous lesion is in reality bad development. The only way he can escape from mak- ing a mistake is by continuing his examination without hold- ing a positive idea that he has found the cause. The history and development of the case may arouse strong doubts as to the value of his discovered spinal lesion. Your attention is called to this possible mistake in val- uation of a lesion, so that you may not become wedded to the idea that, when you have found what appears to be a misplacement, you are free to end your examination and pronounce a competent judgment. Test Muscular Tension. While the patient is on his side, examine carefully the amount of tension in these three groups constituting the fourth layer. After considerable education of the sense of touch, it will be possible for you to determine that the points under your ringers are probably too sensitive. When these muscles feel hard and unyield- ing, they are usually sore to pressure. The contractured condition of the muscle has affected the sensory nerve fila- ments in two ways : First, by direct pressure between the contracted muscle bundles; second, by retention of meta- bolic waste products which result in chemical poisoning. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 395 FIG. 158. Testing the pliability of tht> interscapular portion of the spinal column. Thoracic Flexibility. Fig. 158 illustrates a method of ascertaining the elasticity of the dorsal spine and thorax. This procedure assists in estimating the general condition of the body. If the thorax is fixed, inelastic, respiration can not be carried on properly. Oxygenation of the blood will be imperfect. If desired we may palpate the spinous processes and the musculature while the patient is in this prone position. Examination of the Abdomen. Fig. 159 shows the proper position of the patient for examination of the abdo- men. The knees being drawn up allows relaxation of ab- dominal muscles. Where the abdomen is very sensitive to the touch, either because of pain or ticklishness, use the whole hand until the patient becomes somewhat accustomed to the touch. Sometimes it is necessary for the physician 396 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 159. Palpation of the abdomen. to lift the feet from the table and flex the knees quite close to the abdomen. A steady, even pressure of the hand on the abdomen will soon become non-irritating to the patient, and deeper palpation can be made. If the examination is a general one, commence your work, with the patient in this position, by palpating the thorax. Note form and flexibility, especially the flexibility of the five lower ribs. The free movement of these ribs is essential to many functions, chiefly respiration, but it also affords a sort of rhythmical massage to the liver and stomach. Such observations of form and flexibility are very gen- eral, but they lead invariably to some clue of especial value in the search for effects and their causes. Elevation or Depression of Ribs. Note the spacing of the ribs to determine whether any rib is elevated or de- PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 397 pressed. Palpate the chondro-costal articulations for mis- placements, especially note the articulations of the tenth ribs, they are frequently broken loose and form additional float- ing ribs. They are usually depressed slightly under the ninth. After palpation of the chest, use percussion, then auscul- tation, according to the methods outlined in the best text- FIG. 160. Position for examination of the prostate gland. 398 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY books on diagnosis. By the use of all these physical meth- ods it is possible to arrive at a very definite conclusion of the state of the thoracic viscera. The abdomen should be palpated, then percussed. These two methods should make evident any organic change in the abdominal viscera. Examination of the Rectum and Prostate Gland. Fig. 160 illustrates a position for examining the rectum and pos- tate gland. Fig. 161 is the well-known Simm's position which may be used for the same purpose as the preceding. Other positions used by the osteopath for examination and treatment are the well-known gynecological positions, genu-pectoral and Trendelenburg. Examination of the Neck. For easy examination of the neck, the patient should be recumbent, as in Fig. 159. The muscles of the neck must have all tension removed so that the examiner's fingers can feel the processes of the cervical vertebrae. A flat table instead of the model shown in the illus- tration is better. A hard small pillow may be used to sup- port the head. PIG. 161. Simms' position. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 399 Since the spinous processes in the cervical region are short and bifid, and oftentimes developed unevenly and are covered with several layers of muscles and ligaments, it is not satisfactory to use them as landmarks for relations of cervical vertebrae. The tubercles on the transverse processes are easily palpated, hence these serve as guides in the detection of slight misplacements of cervical vertebrae. The transverse processes of the atlas are usually large and sufficiently prominent to enable the examiner to ascer- tain accurately its position. When the atlas is in its true position, its transverse processes will be found about mid- way between the mastoid processes of the temporal bones and the angles of the jaw. This relationship may appear untrue when the mastoid processes are quite large or small, or the angles of the jaw are more or less obtuse. It is necessary to study the relative development and positions in every case, on both sides, in order to discover whether a subluxation exists. The fact that nearly all subluxations of the atlas are twists instead of direct forward or backward displacements, makes it comparatively easy to detect the inequalities and understand the faulty position. Sensitive- ness will be found in the tissues on the side whose trans- verse process is posterior. In case there is marked sensi- tiveness on both sides, that is, on the posterior surfaces of both . transverse processes, the atlas is probably drawn slightly posterior on both sides by the severe contraction of its attached muscles. The third cervical vertebra seems to be easily sublux- ated. It is usually twisted, not sufficiently to lock its ar- ticular processes, but just enough to make the dorsal sur- face of its inferior articular process easily palpable through the muscles which lie over it. This prominent point will be sensitive because the muscles over it are always tense. Sometimes the sixth cervical vertebra is twisted. When this condition exists, there is marked disturbance of circu- lation in the head. The patient is usually wakeful and 400 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY excitable on account of the congested condition of the cere- bral blood vessels, caused by the pressure on the vertebral veins. Note the tone of all the cervical muscles, the flexibility of the neck, the temperature of the skin on different parts of the neck. Palpate the chains of lymphatic glands, the thyroid and the submaxillary salivary glands. After a thorough palpation of the neck, look carefully for any evidences of disturbed circulation in the head as may be evidenced by the appearance of the skin, mucous membrane of the mouth, the tonsils, conjunctiva or the wearing of glasses. Your knowledge of optics should en- able you to judge the general condition of the eyes by in- spection of the glasses worn. Such an examination of the head and neck as herein outlined should give the examiner a good understanding of the structural and functional condition existing at the time of examination, and even guide him to what other parts of the body may need special attention. The History of Lesions. All facts as to structure and function, determined by your examination are historical, that is, they have dates and circumstances which give them much or little value. The experienced diagnostician de- lights in filling in the life history of the patient to fit the structural and functional changes. Herein lies the oppor- tunity for the physician to bring to his aid all his resource of experience and education in judging how these lesions have been brought about and how they are now influencing other tissues. The Extremities. While the patient is in the recum- bent dorsal position, Fig. 159, the lower extremities can be examined. Note the comparative length of the legs, but be careful to eliminate all possibility of mistake by observ- ing whether the patient is lying evenly on the back, ilia same height, and muscles of both legs equally relaxed. A measurement from the anterior superior iliac spine to the internal malleolus determines the length of the leg. p jj Y j^ f c f /i f '-/' ^ U P P F G f PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 401 Palpate the great trochanter. Note its relation to Ne- laton's liner These general directions for examination will determine the weak, disordered or diseased part of the body which requires your further careful examination. Subjective Symptoms. You will observe that thus far nothing whatever has been said about asking the patient concerning his or her subjective symptoms. It is a general principle underlying osteopathic diagnosis that objective symptoms are the only true facts upon which the diagnos- tician dares base his judgment and final verdict. The near- est approach to a subjective symptom thus far mentioned is hyperaesthesia. This may frequently be judged by the feeling of the muscle when pressed upon by the fingers. The muscular reaction to the painful sensory impressions occasioned by the pressure can be felt. Usually we depend upon the patient to indicate or corroborate our sense of touch. In actual practice this process is not carried out in its entirety. Time is a factor in the physician's life as well as in the life of the business man. He cannot afford to go about his work in this detective-like manner. It requires too much time. We hear a great deal of objection to the physician's question to his patient: "What is your trouble?" But the answer to it enables him to get quickly to work on the seat of disease or at least leads him quickly to it. The physician who is a good questioner saves much time. He does not accept the subjective symptoms, merely goes to work to prove or disprove their verity by the standards of physical diagnosis. saa.-Uea "' IT S 402 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY CHAPTER XX. MANIPULATION. There has been a very rapid evolutionary develop- ment of manipulation as a therapeutic method. It has been found to be a wonderfully adaptable means of al- leviating human suffering. Undoubtedly the principles underlying any method of manipulation contribute some- thing to all other so-called systems of movement cures. Manipulation is hand practice in the surgical sense. It is applicable in a tremendously wide range of disorders, for example the treatment of fractures, sprains, breaking adhesions, reducing dislocations, assisting venous circula- tion, stimulating peristalsis, reducing congestions, quiet- ing reflexes, stimulating nerve centers, and many other things of a helpful character. The form of manipulation most generally understood is massage. This term is used by some to mean any method of manual manipulation. Massage is a method of manipulation which has been extensively practiced and written about, hence there is no excuse for the prevailing slovenly use of the terriv to cover all forms of hand manipulation. The characteristic movements of massage are friction and kneading. They have proven wonderfully satisfactory as adjuvants in overcoming venous stasis and toning the neuro-muscular mechanism of the body. No one who is at all conversant with the phenomena of nat- ural recovery fails to recognize the great assistance which even the crudest usfe of massage furnishes. The next step of a scientific character in the devel- opment of manipulative methods was Swedish move- PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 403 ments. These introduced leverage and voluntary resistance as new factors in increasing the tone of the neuro-mus- cular apparatus. A very limited field was accorded to massage and Swedish movements. Both these methods were practically never used except as prescribed by a physician. Practically no diagnostic ability or initiative is credited to those who apply the methods. Surgery was "Formerly that branch of medicine concerned with man- ual operations under the direction of the physician." If the evolution of surgery can be used as a criterion for judging the future of manual manipulation, there can be no doubt as to the commanding position that will be at- tained. Osteopathy has introduced a new factor in manipu- lative therapeutics, i. e., the adjustment of joint luxations and subluxations. It is interesting to note that the art of manipulation applicable to this corrective work was developed independently of massage and Swedish move- ments. Osteopathic movements could not have evolved naturally from massage and Swedish movements, because osteopathic technique is the direct result of the theory, sturdily asserted and defended by Dr. A. T. Still, that "structure governs function." His recognition and treat- ment of joint lesions, "subluxations", led to the develop- ment of a system of movements primarily surgical in character. No matter how much any osteopathic physi- cian may take issue with him in matters of theory, the fact exists that not one of them believes that he has ever been approached in skill in the art of corrective manipu- lation. Present day osteopathic physicians are beneficiaries of all the successes credited to massage, Swedish move- ments. Dr. A. T. Still's original work, special operations devised by orthopaedists all over the world, and the brilliant work of Professor Lucas Champoniere in the treatment of fractures by "gluco-kinesis" and mobilisa- tion. We are beneficiaries of all these because Dr. Still 404 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY believed in fundamental medical education and the es- tablshment of a school of medicine and surgery primarily devoted to the scientific development of manipulative therapeutics. Since at the time of his most active work in practice and teaching, the abuse of drugs and surgery was at its height, it is no wonder that he desired to estab- lish a system of practice which would not be burdened by inheritance of the foibles and failures of drug-therapy. As a result of the success of osteopathic theory and practice, there has been the inevitable plagiarizing of its literature and methods by those who find it profitable to impose on an ignorant public. This plagiarizing has been done under several names, but especially under that of chiropractic. The history of this attempt to appropriate the principles and methods, of 'osteopathy, without re- quiring any creditable educational work to make them safe means of treating ailing human beings, is a sad trav- esty on the standards of medical education in this coun- try. Under our present laws new schools of medicine may be started as short cuts to avoid the moderately severe requirements of established schools. So long as this is possible, there will continue to appear "new schools" exploiting some phase of established methods under new names. Methods of Procedure. Osteopathic physicians fre- quently differ as to methods of procedure, but they all work according to the same principle. For instance, a subluxation of a vertebra might be discovered by two osteopaths. The first one might undertake to reduce the subluxation without any preliminary work on the mus- cles, believing that it is best to go right to the seat of trouble and remove it. His treatment would be severe because much strength would be required to overcome the resistance of the muscles governing the articulation. The second one might spend considerable time on the preliminary work of relaxing the muscles of the articula- tion, increasing flexibility, reducing sensitiveness, etc., PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 405 before attempting any specific reduction of the lesion. The ultimate result of both methods would be alike. The question of which method is best lies wholly with the in- dividual osteopath. Some like to put forth a severe effort for a short time, others a moderate effort for a longer time. Outside of the special choice of the osteopath, lies the business one of satisfying the patient. Severe work at the outset frightens some patients, furthermore, it actual- ly bruises some of them. The ultimate result of the treat- ment may be excellent, but the patient does not quickly forget the methods used. There is a parallel between the immediate after-results of a severe osteopathic treatment and surgical shock. This shock should be avoided as much as possible. FIG. 162. Relaxation of the latissimus dorsi. 406 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY The movements hereafter pictured and described are all made with reference to structure rather than function. Few references are made concerning their applicability to special diseases. We do not care what the name of the disease is. The groups of symptoms which make up the pictures described in symptomatology have very little significance to the osteopath. His movements are not made with reference to a named disease, but to a faulty structural condition. The structural condition may be the basis for the physiological. Function does affect struct- ure. We are not to lose sight of this fact. Function may be perverted by bad 'habits, hence our therapeutics must comprehend the hygienic and dietetic side of life as well as structural. Every movement herein outlined secures a definite effect on a muscle, or is used to affect the relation of bony parts. The movements made to affect the muscles of the back and spinal column are based upon the attachment of the muscles and the leverage they exert on the spinal column. Relaxation of the Latissimus Dorsi. The arrange- ment of the back muscles has been noted in the chapter on Positions for Examination. In order to relax these muscles in their natural relations, i. e., from superficial to deep groups, we begin with such a movement as will separate the extremities of the most superficial muscles to their fullest extent. Fig. 162 illustrates the method of relaxing the latissimus dorsi. One hand extends the arm to its fullest extent, the other hand anchors the ilium. It will be noted that the lower dorsal and lumbar portions of the spinal column are lifted by the pull of this muscle, Also the four lower ribs are raised. The intrinsic effect of this stretching movement is to take most of the ten- sion out of the muscle itself and increase the amount of metabolic change taking place within it. But that is not what is primarily intended. The intrinsic effects are mere PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 407 FIG. 163. Relaxation of the trapezius. incidents in the physiological life of the muscle, and as such are found following all kinds of muscular movements. The extrinsic effects are what concern us most; the effect upon the vertebrae and ribs, the change in the form of the chest. There are three uses for this movement. First, as preparatory to work upon muscles lying beneath it, i. e., purely relaxing. Second, in case of overlapping by any one of the four lower ribs. It is a common condition to find the twelfth rib under the eleventh, or tenth under eleventh. The pull of the latissimus dorsi is exerted on all alike, hence the individual ribs are brought into their proper relations. Relaxation usually allows a return of the faulty position, but if the ribs are held at their ex- tremities by the operator for a few seconds after relaxa- tion, the intercostal muscles and quadratus lumborum will 408 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 164. Relaxation of the rhomboideus major and minor. be filled with arterial blood which tones them. The patient should be directed to hang by the hands several times per day so as to get a good effect on the position of the lower ribs. Third, to affect lateral curvature of the spine in the lumbar or lower dorsal portion. Relaxation of the Trapezius. The trapezius is an- other of the superficial group of back muscles. Its fibers are so variously attached that several movements are re- quired to relax all its divisions. Fig. 163 illustrates the method of grasping and holding the scapula while relax- ing the trapezius. The scapula is rotated on the thorax as far as possible toward the head so as to stretch those fibers extending from the spine of the scapula to the sixth PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 409 and twelfth dorsal spines; then away from the head to affect the cervical fibers, then away from the spinal column to relax the short fibers between the upper dorsal spines and scapula. There is a vast difference in the way the scapula can be moved about in different cases. Those having any tendency to asthmatic trouble will present a very fixed scapula. The more marked the asthmatic con- dition is, the more difficult it is to move the scapula. Pleurisy and lung troubles, especially when coughing is frequent, tend to hold the scapula fixed. Lifting the patient's body above the table by the scapula gives instant relief in many cases of pleuritic pain, intercostal neuralgia or angina pectoris. This result is explained by the re- moval of the pressure exerted by the scapula when it is held too close to the thorax by contracted muscles which are acting reflexly. A subluxated rib is usually respon- sible for the pains mentioned, but the muscles of the scapula are partially respiratory, hence act in connection with disturbances of normal rhythm of intercostal mus- cles. The pressure of the scapula helps to fix the whole chest in an unyielding condition. That which was at first purely helpful in character becomes in itself an added irritant. This movement or series of movements affects the tone of the muscle fibers, then the whole respiratory process. Relaxation of the Rhomboids. In the second group of back muscles we find the rhomboids, major and minor, accessory muscles of inspiration. Fig. 164 illustrates a method of stretching these muscles. The patient's elbow is placed against the physician's abdomen. Pressure against the elbow forces the scapula back, and makes its vertebral border prominent. The physician's fingers grasp this border securely, and then lift steadily upward. This movement is excellent for the purpose intended. That which has been written concerning the trapezius is ap- plicable to the rhomboids. Outside of the intrinsic effects on the muscle and on respiration, a- slight effect may be 410 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 165. Relaxation of the pectoralis major and serratus magnus. exerted on a lateral curve in the interscapular region. It is generally used as preparatory to work on deeper struc- tures. The Pectoralis Major and Serratus Magnus. Follow- ing these movements, where general thoracic and spinal relaxation are desired, the movement illustrated in Fig. 165 may be used. It affects the Pectoralis Major and Serratus Magnus. By pushing the patient's elbow as far back as possible, the scapula is approximated to the spinal column, hence the serratus magnus is put upon a ten- sion which lifts the eight upper ribs. The pectoralis major also affects the upper ribs. The physician's hand on the angle of the ribs accentuates the expansion of the PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 411 FIG. 166. Relaxation of the serratus magnus ana some floret, of the fourth layer of dorsal muscles. chest. This is a general movement, but one which has far- reaching effects upon respiration and circulation. It is adaptable to many specific structural defects of the ribs. In Fig. 166 the physician again uses the humerus and scapula as means by which to affect the spinal column. The left hand exerts traction on the muscles above the spine, while the right hand and arm forces the patient's scapula toward the head and spine. The movement is made to enable the physician to relax the serratus mag- nus and some of the fibers of the fourth layer of the back. Slight torsion of the dorsal spinal column is also secured. Quadratus Lumborum. The relaxation of the quad- ratus lumborum is secured according to Fig. 167. In all displacements of the twelfth rib, it is necessary to secure a free circulation in the muscles attached to that rib. The fact that it is a floating rib makes its position dependent 412 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 167. Relaxation of the quadratus lumtaorum. on the tone of the muscles attached to it. It is frequent- ly slipped under the eleventh. This movement separates them. Fig. 168 is in some respects similar to the movement illustrated in Fig. 166, except that the scapula is forced downward, and the left hand is able to work through the relaxed superficial muscles. After the use of the move- ments already illustrated, it is astonishing how easily one can work upon the fourth layer or examine the condition of deep structures. Erector Spinae. The work upon the fourth layer should be done according to Fig. 155. The fingers are placed between the muscles and the spines of the verte- PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 413 FIG. 168. Relaxation of the lower fibres of the trapezius. brae and then drawn away from the spines in such a. man- ner as to stretch the muscles. The fingers should never be allowed to slip over the muscles. Work steadily and deeply. Do not move the fingers over the skin. When you place your fingers, compel all soft tissues beneath them to move with them. In this way you secure relaxa- tion of the erector spinae and continuations, take out sore- ness of the muscles, and prepare for specific work upon the ribs or vertebrae. The erector spinae is rarely contracted throughout its whole length. Your work should be centered on that portion which your examination has demonstrated to be contracted, either as a result of visceral disturbance, os- seous subluxation, strain or cutaneous reflex from cold. Having now prepared our patient for specific manipu- lation, we will note the results to be obtained on the gen- eral contour of the spinal column. Treatment of Simple Kyphosis. Fig. 169 illustrates one of the simplest methods of springing a spine which is 414 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY PIG. 169. Springing a dorso-lumbar kyphosia. FIG. 170. A method of springing a lumbar kyphosis. 415 FIG. 171. Springing an upper dorsal lordpsis kyphosed at the junction of the dorsal and lumbar. The physician's forearms are placed against the patient's shoulder and ilium while the fingers rest over the ky- phosed portion of the spinal column. The hands draw for- ward while the forearms push away. Considerable force can be exerted in this way on slender patients. Great force can be exerted on a posterior curve of the lower dorsal and lumbar portions by the movement shown in Fig. 170. This movement is also used for purposes other than corrective of structural defects. Since the leverage is so great, it is quite easy for the physician to carry it too far. The result is an active congestion of the lower portion of the spinal cord, followed by excessive activity of the nerve centers located there. In giving this move- ment to women, ascertain whether pregnancy exists. If 416 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY so, do not under any consideration use it. The center for parturition might be excited by it, even though the move- ment made is slight. There is practically no danger in this movement when intelligently used, except in the case of pregnancy. A slow, steady lift made while the physician is watching carefully the amount of resistance offered by the back will usually inhibit the excitement of the centers located in the lumbar enlargement of the spinal cord. The slow- ness and steadiness of the movement relaxes the muscles of the fifth layer and secures better drainage for blood in the spinal canal. No active congestion is brought on, hence a sedative effect is gained. Quick, intense execu- tion of this movement has frequently a reverse effect, be- cause the sharp strain put upon the muscles results in added contraction, active congestion and obstruction to good drainage of the spinal canal. These conditions re- sult in functional activity of those organs governed by the nerve cells in the lumbar enlargement. Active con- gestion of a center results in increased function of the organ governed by that center. As a general rule, this movement is contra-indicated for any purpose but that of correcting a structural defect. The reaction of many patients is an uncertain quantity, hence it is not wise to use this treatment for purely func- tional effects. As a result of the ignorant use of this movement by those who are palming themselves off as osteopaths, the author knows of several cases where dangerous conditions were brought on. Lordosis Upper Dorsal. An anterior curve, or straightened condition of the spine in the interscapular region, is rather difficult to treat on account of inability of the physician to use the extremities as levers. Fig. 171 illustrates a method of applying leverage by means of the cervical vertebrae. The position of the knee on the spinal PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 417 FIG. 172. Springing an upper dorsal lordosis. The leverage is so great in this movement that the operator must exercise great discretion in its use. As applied by a skillful operator it is exceedingly satisfactory. 418 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY column regulates the extent of the force of the movement. The knee is the weight to be lifted, the spinal column is a flexible lever. The physician's forearms are the fulcrum, while his hands apply the force to lift the weight (the knee) which bends the lever at the point governed by the position of the weight and fulcrum. The position of the physician's hands is important, because the cervical is not the portion of the spinal column we desire to bend. If the hands are allowed to rest close to the head, the force exerted is nearly all spent on the neck; the most flexible part of the spinal column is affected a result not desired. Place the hands as nearly over the cervical and first dorsal spines as possible. Since the junction of the dorsal and lumbar segments is a very flexible point, the knee should be located higher. Fig. 172 illustrates another method of producing flexion in the upper dorsal region. The leverage in this position is so great that the operator must exercise cau- tion in its use. The operator should never aim to over- come the patient's resistance by exerting a greater force. The patient will usually relax under the influence of a tetering movement, i. e., short, gentle application of the leverage. The Possible Variety of Movements Which Will Se- cure the Same Results. All of the effects described may be secured by movements differing from those outlined. The author desires to illustrate the application of osteo- pathic principles. It is believed by him that the series of movements illustrated have the virtue of directly and forcibly affecting the part desired without using up too much of the physician's strength in their application. Where much work is done by a physician, it becomes a vital problem with him how to conserve his own strength. By the selection of those movements which give the great- est leverage, he saves himself. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 419 The Head and Neck as a Lever. If the anterior or straightened condition of the spine is very marked in the upper dorsal, it is possible for the physician to use the head and neck in securing his leverage. When the posi- tion of the spine is as described, the spinal muscles in that area will be very contracted. The vertebrae will be held tightly together, thus lessening the flexibility. Loss of flexibility of the spinal column results in poor circulation in the spinal cord with consequent perversion of the ac- tivity of the physiological nerve centers located there. Congestion, passive type, usually exists around these cen- ters when drainage is interfered with by these contracted muscles. Lordosis or Kyphosis May Affect a Function Similarly. A change in the contour of the spine, either anterior or posterior, may result in the same disturbances in the peripheral distribution of the nerves from the dis- torted section. The anterior curve in the interscapular region usually causes the ribs to droop, which occasions a flat chest. The thoracic cavity is lessened, hence respira- FIG. 173. Voluntary treatment of an upper dorsal lordosis. 420 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY tion is feeble. People with flat chests may develop won- derful breathing capacity by persistent exercise. The respiratory muscles lift the ribs. Exercise of these mus- cles will increase the antero-posterior diameter of the chest. When directing a patient about the details of exercise to increase the breathing capacity, do not fail to impress the fact that a full round chest without flexibility is just as bad a condition as an abnormally flat chest. Flexibility is the keynote of health. Those exercises which merely increase the contracting power of muscles, without at the same time increasing their relaxing power are not health- ful. Examination shows that whether we have anterior or posterior conditions in the interscapular region, the spinal muscles are contracted. The patient's power to relax them is lost. The patient may feel tired and weak, but these muscles will not cease their contraction. The rigidity has passed beyond the patient's control. The patient can do something toward restoring flexi- bility to an anteriorly curved or straight spinal column in the upper dorsal region. Fig. 173 illustrates the effect of flexing the neck forcibly by pulling down with the hands. These spines are greatly separated, and hence the muscles of the fourth and fifth layers are relaxed. Fig. 174 illustrates how the physician can use the dor- sal and cervical vertebrae as a flexible lever, and by shift- ing the position of the hand upon the spine apply the movement specifically to any particular vertebra. No movement which uses the arms as levers will affect the position of these vertebrae, because the first and second layers of muscles which are affected by arm movements do not control the intrinsic mobility of this portion of the spinal column. The fourth and fifth layers of back mus- cles are the groups which cause the mal-position of verte- brae in this region. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 421 FIG. 174. Use of the head and neck as a flexible lever 10 aftect the upper dorsal region. Splenius Capitis et Colli. The Splenius Capitis et Colli, a muscle of the third group, extends as low as the sixth dorsal spine. As its name indicates, it is a bandage muscle, and binds down the muscles under it. Its long attachment in the dorsal region gives it a considerable in- fluence there, when its superior attachments to the head and neck are forced anteriorly by flexion of the neck. It is the influence of this muscle which makes the movements described so effective. These movements are for a gen- eral corrective effect on a section of the spinal column. 422 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 175. A method of affecting kyphosis in the upper dorsal region. They are not well adapted to treatment of an individual vertebra. Kyphosis Upper Dorsal. A posterior curve in the upper dorsal region can be treated by the method illus- trated in Fig. 175. The physician's right arm is placed above the patient's right shoulder and under the chest, so that the hand can be placed in the patient's left axilla. The patient's head should be turned away from the physi- cian, so that the upward pressure of his arm will not inter- fere with the trachea. The physician's left hand may be moved from place to place along the spinal column. The farther the hands are separated, the more leverage is gained. Considerable force can be exerted in this move- ment without any danger to the patient, in fact, to be of any value it must be made forcefully. The primary use of this procedure is to reduce the excess of posterior curve. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 423 That which has been written concerning the nerve centers in the interscapular region, when straightening or anterior curvature of the spine exists, applies equally to the posterior curvature. FIG. 176. A method of affecting kyphosis in the tlorso-lumbar region. 424 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY Posterior curvature is accompanied by increased an- tero-posterior diameter of the chest, and loss of flexibil- ity. This movement increases flexibility. It can easily be adapted to the treatment of the fifth or sixth ribs. FIG. 177. A method of affecting kyphosis in the lower dorsal region. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 425 Kyphosis Dorso-lumbar. When the kyphosis is at the junction of the dorsal and lumbar regions, it is easy to secure enormous leverage. The arms can be used as levers while the physician's knee rests against the kypho- sis as in Fig. 176. If the patient's buttocks are held to the stool, the whole force of the leverage is spent on the back under the physician's knee. This movement should not be carried too far. It, like all other movements in which the physician has tremendous leverage, is liable to pro- duce more than the desired effect. It stretches the thorax and abdomen very decidedly. Centra-indications. The author expects that all who use this and other high power movements, have examined their patients carefully before administering them. The presence in the abdomen of an aneurism, ovarian cyst, or . FIG. 178. A method of affecting kyphosis in the lumbar region. 426 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY gravid uterus, centra-indicate the use of any movement which compresses the abdominal contents, and also in the case of a gravid uterus any movement which is liable to cause active congestion of the lumbar enlargement of the spinal cord. Other Movements. Fig. 177 illustrates another meth- od of exerting pressure on the prominent part of a kypho- sis. The leverage is not so great as in the preceding method, but where the kyphosis is slight, it is the better movement. Still another simple method of springing the lumbar portion of the spinal column is shown in Fig. 178. The patient's knees are held against the physician's abdomen, while the physician's hands make counter pressure over the apex of the kyphosis. The buttocks are forced back- ward by the pressure on the patient's knees. Some osteo- paths object to this movement or any other which neces- FIG. 179. A method of affecting either kyphosis or lordosis in the lumbar region. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 427 sitates pressure of the patient's knees or elbows against the abdomen. There is an element of danger to the osteopath. This position, Fig. 178, is used frequently where strong inhibitory pressure in the lumbar region is required. For example, in cases of diarrhoea or cramps. Any hyper- activity of structures governed by cells in the lumbar en- largement may be inhibited in this region. When lordosis of the lumbar region exists, it is neces- sary to flex that region in order to counteract it. Fig. 179 illustrates an easy method of accomplishing this result. This same movement with the physician's right hand under the spine can be made to do duty in correcting a posterior curve. When the hand is placed directly under the kyphosis, the back is lifted; then if the buttocks be forced to the table, the spine will be sprung in the direc- tion desired. Functional Kyphosis. A large proportion of patients whose spinal columns exhibit a tendency to kyphosis, in the splanchnic area, suffer from either visceral reflexes or a hypotonic condition of the erector spinae muscles. There is scarcely a case of visceral ptosis that does not present a hypotonic condition of these extensor muscles. The functional kyphosis so frequently apparent in this region is tremendously benefited by rather forceful leverage movements which are accompanied by counter pressure at the apex of the kyphosis. If this counter pressure is ap- plied suddenly, but not severely, it usually produces a sound in the arthrodial articulations of the spinal column under the point of counter pressure. This popping sound can be produced by a variety of methods, many of which are illustrated in this chapter. The patient practically always feels an increase of muscle tone after the popping sound is elicited. This is evidenced by a feeling of greater ability to hold the body erect. There is a genuine feeling of increased power, aside from any psychological effect 428 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 180. A method of securing general dorsal rotation. that may accompany the phenomenon. As a simple ex- periment, one may voluntarily extend one's fingers in opening the hand to its fullest extent, after having had it flexed for a considerable time. There is a feeling of lim- itation of the extensor movement which is done away with if we passively extend the fingers with the other hand. After this passive extension by manipulation we are able to voluntarily extend the fingers with greater power and to a greater extent than before. This equalizing of the forces of extension and flexion is probably what takes place, when we hear the sound, incidental to movements which produce sudden passive extension, in a joint which is in a state of imbalance on account of a static error, or visceral reflex. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 429 Wherever we find the muscles which are prime movers of a joint in a state of imbalance, we are apt to produce a sound in the joint when we exaggerate the movement so as to suddenly stretch the dominant muscle or muscle group. This produces a readjustment of the joint sur- faces. Since the spinal arthrodial joints are apt to be in a state permitting spinal flexion, due to static conditions, fatigue, or visceral ptosis, we are able more frequenlty to produce sounds in these joints than in most others, when sudden correction is made by counter pressure. This phenomenon of sound in a joint, incidental to a quick re- adjustment of its joint surfaces, when muscular tension controlling the joint is equalized, has led to the inven- tion of many ingenious methods for producing it. Tables have been devised of various heights, having adjustable pads and separable sections so as to allow the patient to lie prone across openings in the surface of the table, thus greatly increasing the advantage of the operator in mak- ing sudden downward pressure on a selected point in the spinal column. No apparatus is necessary to enable one to do efficient adjusting work if the conditions necessary for the production of the popping sound are understood. FIG. 181. To correct rotation in lower dorsal and lumbar region and secure free movement of the lower ribs. 430 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY The effort to produce such a sound in all so-called sub- luxations will surely result in strain of the peri-articular tissues. The operator must have a trained sense of tissue resistance and be governed accordingly. Leverage and counter pressure should never be used in the treatment of any joint which exhibits symptoms of inflammation. In case of inflammation in a joint, its position is probably self-protective and hence should not be roughly treated. The lack of ability to diagnose the true condition of a joint leads to frequent misuse of manipulative methods. New Schools. It is astonishing how varied a class of patients is benefited by rather heavy counter pressure movements. This fact has led to the rapid exploiting of so- called "new schools" which claim their methods are differ- ent from and far superior to osteopathic methods. It is an interesting fact, testified to by many patients who have been treated by many osteopathic physicians, that no two of their physicians operated alike. This is characteristic, in that the osteopathic colleges have not concentrated so much on a particular method as on teaching principles which are capable of many methods of application. FIG. 182. Simplest form of movement to overcome a functional kyphosis in the dorsal region. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 431 Various Applications of a Principle. If a patient with a functional kyphosis, in the splanchnic area, lies prone on the floor or any other unyielding surface, as in Figs. 182 and 183, it often suffices to merely make sudden down- ward pressure on the apex of the kyphosed area with the palm of the hand. One, or several, popping sounds will be heard if the patient relaxes and the force of the sudden pressure is properly proportioned to the passive resistance of the spinal tissues. It may be necessary to concentrate the point of pressure, i. e., use a thumb or heel of the hand, reinforced with the opposite hand. The reason some op- erators use low tables is merely to allow them to use their own weight to the best advantage in using down- ward pressure. According to the extent of the "lesioned area," i. e., the kyphosis, and according to the voluntary power of relaxation characteristic of the patient, the op- erator can use a large or small contact area, i. e., the heel of the hand, hypothenar eminence, or the thumb. The amount of pressure must be proportioned to the passive resistance of the tissues. No effort should be made to FIG. 183. To overcome a functional kyphosis in the upper dorsal we may use a towel as a sort of fulcrum while making sudden downward pressure over the transverse processes of the verte- brae with the thumbs. This movement usually causes a snap- ping sound in the articulations most affected by the thumb pressure. 432 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY overcome any active resistance on the part of the patient. The operator must contrive to use the pressure before the patient can bring his muscles into active contraction. Herein lies the necessity for the exercise of considerable discretion as to when the advantage of the patient's off guard moment should be taken. The Use of a Fulcrum. Advantage over a patient's natural spinal resistance is gained by using a fulcrum at some chosen point on the anterior surface of the body. A very simple use of this principle is illustrated by Fig. 184, wherein the operator's forearm serves the purpose of a ful- crum. Figs. 185 and 186 illustrate the application of the same principle with the patient sitting. This is probably the easiest position for the operator to use counter pressure. His knees serve as a fulcrum. His hands, grasping the pa- tient's elbows, have a secure hold, so that a sudden pull backward serves to force the weight of the upper portion of the patient's body over the fulcrum and thus fulfill the conditions of extension and counter pressure required for correction of the kyphosis. By varying the position of the FIG. 184. To correct a functional kyphosis in the dorsal region. Operator using his right forearm as a fulcrum. Sudden down- ward pressure is made with the opposite hand, reinforced by the pressure of the operator's chest. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 433 FIG. 185. To correct a functional Kyphosis in the dorsal region. Patient, must be relaxed. Operator makes a sudden but very moderate pull against his knees. 434 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY operator's knees and interlocking his fingers over the pa- tient's chest, as in Fig. 185, the movement can be made very specific as to a single spinal segment. A movement of great adaptability is illustrated by Fig. 187. The patient places his hands on opposite shoul- ders and then allows his weight to rest on the operator's forearm. In this manner the operator may use his left or right hand, according to convenience, as a fulcrum to be applied at any selected point in the dorsal or lumbar area. By lifting the patient's body against the fulcrum, either suddenly or gradually, the operator is able to con- centrate corrective leverage and pressure at any desired point. Rotation of the spinal column can be secured by this movement and hence it serves as one of the most adaptable movements for all sorts of corrective work. The operator does not actually carry much of the patient's weight on his arm. The first four dorsal vertebrae are rather difficult to manipulate. The position illustrated by Fig. 230 shows how the hypothenar eminence of the operator's left hand serves as a fulcrum, while the rest of the hand reinforces the neck, so that the head and neck thus reinforced can be used as a lever, which is forced backward by the right hand on the patient's chin. Fig. 189 shows how more pow- erful leverage may be applied, by one who has a keen sense of tissue resistance. Any movement, embodying great leverage, must be used with extreme caution. Coordination of Corrective Movements. The success of any of these movements depends entirely on the oper- ator's ability to coordinate his movements so as to affect the special point in the spinal tissues requiring adjust- ment. Just as one's eyes coordinate to produce binocular vision, one's hands must work harmoniously to secure good results. The skillful operator causes practically no pain by his movements. They are timed and graduated to suit the needs of his case. Fig. 191 illustrates a method of exerting leverage and pressure to correct a lateral subluxation in the upper PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 435 FIG. 186. To correct a functional kyphosis in the dorsal region. Practically the same movement as in preceding illustration. By transmitting the pull through the pa- tient's arms, the patient's pectoral and serratus magnus muscles lift the anterior extremities of the ribs. This is an exceedingly efficient movement when executed by a skillful operator. 436 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 187. An excellent movement by which to exert leverage and counter pressure in the dorsal and lumbar regions. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 437 FIG. 188. An application of leverage and counter pressure to secure corrective rotation in the dorsal region. By con- centrating the counter pressure tne rotation can De ac- centuated in a single articulation. 438 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 189. Using the head and neck as a lever while the hypothenar eminence of the right nand is used as a fulcrum in the upper dorsal region or by using the thumb and forefinger as the fulcrum the force of the move- ment may be exerted to correct a cervical lesion. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 439 FIG. 190. A variation of the movement pictured in the pre- ceding illustration. 440 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY dorsal. The operator's right hand serves to force the head and neck in a direction to bend the column over the thumb of the left hand, as a fulcrum. The patient's face is inclined toward the lesion side, so as to accentuate rotation, which is the actual corrective part of the movement. Dorsal Rotation. Fig. 181 is a simple method of se- curing flexibility in the lower dorsal portion of the back. Rotation is possible in the dorsal but not in the lumbar region, hence, by holding the shoulders down and lifting one hip, rotation is secured in the dorsal region. This movement forces the normal action between individual ver- tebrae of the lower dorsal region. If any particular articu- lation is at fault, it will not yield to such a general move- ment as this. The only gain made by it, in that case, is to prepare the surrounding tissues for more specific work. Lateral Curvature. This kind of deformity is fre- quently found and a large proportion of such cases are ben- efited by osteopathic manipulation. A weakened con- dition of the whole body predisposes to the formation of a lateral curve. Fig. 192 illustrates an uncompensated lateral curve, that is, the curvature is all in one direction. In such a case the muscles on the convex side are not doing their full duty. The patient is allowing the weight of the upper portion of the trunk to be held by the ligaments in- stead of the muscles. This simple curvature can be readily overcome by exercises which will develop the weak spinal muscles. Fig. 134 illustrates a compensated curve, that is, a letter S curve. The primary curve is in the interscapular region and is compensated for by a curve in the opposite direction in the lumbar region. Know How to Apply Principles. The osteopath should know how to apply his principles so thoroughly that the position of his patient, whether lying, sitting or stand- ing, will not confuse him. Some osteopaths desire to give their manipulations to the patient sitting, others like the reclining position better. On the whole, it seems best to select the position suited to the special work required. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 441 FIG. 191. Using the head and neck as a lever, reinforced by the operator's right nano. ana arm, while the operator's left thumb is used as a fulcrum to accentuate the force of an effort to correct a rotated upper dorsal vertebra, or a group lesion. 442 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY Do Not Copy Movements. Do not copy anybody's movements. Learn the principles, then apply them in the manner most satisfactory to yourself and helpful to the patient. To understand the principles and apply them intelligently, one cannot know too much concerning all the subjects which are the basis of a broad medical edu- cation. FIG. 192. A case of uncompensated lateral curvature, due to debility. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 443 CHAPTER XXI. REDUCTION OF SUBLUXATIONS. Having noted a few movements which have a general beneficial effect on groups of structures, we will now ex- amine a few of the movements which are applicable to specific subluxations. In the chapter on Subluxation in the theoretical sec- tion of this volume, we called attention to the fact that "A subluxation is a slight abnormal relation between bony surfaces, maintained by uneven contraction in opposing groups of muscles which control the articulation. The causes of the contraction are violence, temperature changes and reflex irritation. A reduction is secured by equalizing vital activity." With this statement in mind, we will study first the lateral subluxations in the dorsal region. Lateral Subluxation. A lateral subluxation is possible only in those portions of the spinal column where the formation of the articular facets allow rotation. The cer- vical and dorsal are the regions in which this occurs. Lat- eral subluxation is most common in the articulations of the atlas, third cervical, and anywhere in the dorsal with the exception of the twelfth. The inferior articular facets of the twelfth are lumbar in character, hence allow only flexion, extension and circumduction. It makes no difference what the cause of the lateral subluxation may be, the uneven contraction of muscles is the final result, hence all are treated in the same manner. When the vertebral spine is discovered out of line with those above and below and tenderness noted on its prom- inent side, we are disposed to consider it a true lesion, an irritant to the nervous system. Whether it is the result of 444 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 193. Surface indication of a lateral subluxation. accident, cold or reflexes does not need to be seriously considered. While it exists, it is a continual source of ir- ritation to the nervous system, hence should be removed without delay. If it is the result of reflexes, its reduction will at least remove one disturbing factor from the case. The prominent side of the spine is the one on which the muscles are contracted. The contracted muscles must be those which are holding the bone in its mal-position. In order to exert this influence, they must be attached in such a way as to move the bone in this direction when they act normally. Their present condition is one of hyper- activity. With this line of reasoning, any articulation can be examined, the pull of its muscles determined and move- PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 445 FIG. 194. "Exaggeration" of a lateral subluxation. ments made in accordance with the normal action of these muscles. In Fig-. 193 we observe the subluxation to the left of a mid-dorsal vertebra. Intrinsic rotation of the dorsal spines is the result of the contraction of the rotatores spinae, one of the fifth group. In order for this vertebra to remain subluxated, i. e., more rotated than any of its fellows, the particular digitation of the rotatores spinae attached to it must remain contracted, after the other digitations have become relaxed. The work laid out for us is relaxation of this one digitation. The digitation which is acting is work- ing from below, i. e., arises from the transverse process of the vertebra below the one which is subluxated. The first movement consists in "exaggerating the le- sion." The patient's body is flexed laterally away from the 446 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 1S5. "Flexion" of a lateral subluxation. prominent side of the lesion as in Fig. 194. This procedure stretches the contracted rotatores spinae and also sep- arates the three vertebrae, i. e., the subluxated one and the superior and inferior ones, thus making it easier to push the subluxated vertebra into its true position. The second movement is an anterior flexion to permit of greater freedom of movement between the articular pro- cesses. By forcing the body first into the position of lateral flexion, then anterior flexion, all the muscles of the fifth group which affect the subluxated vertebra are relaxed. During this anterior flexion, a "click" is sometimes heard which is evidence of relaxation sufficient to allow approxi- mation of the subluxated surfaces. During all the time of PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 447 FIG. 196. Extension ana counter pressure to re- duce a lateral subluxatlon. making these flexions, the physician's right thumb should make steady pressure against the prominent side of the spine, thus taking advantage of the relaxation gained by each flexion. The anterior flexion is illustrated in Fig. 195. The final movement is lateral flexion toward the lesion while lifting the patient from the stool in such a way that the weight of the body below the lesion exerts its influence to separate the vertebrae. Fig. 196. Counter pressure with the thumb is made vigorously during 'iis final movement. The successful reduction of this subluxation may be accomplished without any "click" or other evidence of movement of the surfaces. The vertebra usually moves into its true position without any audible sign. The physi- 448 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY cian's fingers can determine the success or failure of the movement. If the subluxation was caused by accident or cold, its reduction is all that is needed, but if it is the re- sult of reflex irritation, originating in a viscus, the physi- cian must direct such a mode of living that rest may be secured for the stimulated viscus. Habits of life must be looked into. Fig. 197 illustrates another method of reducing a slight lateral subluxation. The physician's left arm passes under the patient's left axilla, then the hand is placed firmly on the base of the neck posteriorly. This gives the physician great leverage. The physician's knee, right or left, is placed against the spinal column at a point four or five FIG. 197. Leverage applied to a lateral subluxation in the mid- dorsal region. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 449 inches below the subluxation. This compels the flexible spinal column to yield to the force applied at the neck, in such a way as to relax the deep muscles controlling the subluxation. Counter pressure applied to the prominent spine by the physician's right thumb completes the move- ment. By this movement about the same result is ob- FIG. 198. Leverage applied to a lateral subluxation in the lower dorsal region. ,450 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY tained as when counter extension is given by two men pulling at the head and feet of the patient, while a third one devotes his attention to forcing the vertebral spine into place. When the patient is short and heavily muscled, it is impossible to execute this movement satisfactorily. Lateral Subluxation Lower Dorsal. A lateral lesion of the ninth, tenth or eleventh dorsal is more easily han- dled than those higher up, because the physician can grasp the patient in a much more satisfactory manner. Fig. 198 illustrates the method. The series of movements is always the same as al- ready described, that is, lateral flexion or "exaggeration," anterior flexion, then lateral flexion toward the lesion, as illustrated by the cut. With this same position, other forms of subluxation in the lower dorsal and lumbar regions can be corrected. A Depressed Spine. Slight depression of a dorsal spine with sensitiveness over it, that is, between its apex and the spine below, indicates that the muscles in that situation are sufficiently contracted to draw the spine of the upper vertebra downward. The depressed spine indi- cates that the body of the vertebra is slightly tipped back- ward and downward. See chapter on Subluxations. To reduce this lesion, a flexion of the spinal column as far as the vertebra below the lesion is made anteriorly. If the depressed spine is any one of the upper six dorsal, use the pull of the splenius capitis et colli, i. e., flex the head and neck as in Fig. 174. The physician's right hand is placed on the spine of the vertebra below the subluxa- tion, thus allowing all the force of the movement to ter- minate in a pull on the muscles between this vertebra and the depressed spine. This same principle can be applied to all portions of the spinal column. When individual spines are prominent and sensitive- ness is found above the process instead of below, we have a condition the reverse of that just described. Its treat- ment is similar to that of the preceding, except that by LLEGE OF PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 451 changing the position of the right hand to rest upon the prominent spine, our leverage affects the contracted mus- cles above the spine. Kyphosis Pott's Disease. Whenever a "knuckle" is found in the spine, inquire carefully as to the possibility of direct injury, predisposition to tuberculosis, etc. Pott's Fig. 199. Spreading the lower ribs and stretching the diaphragm. ^ o YH ^H 8 1 J, r.ASO-r : UJoo 1 1 c Y H 4 452 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY disease of the spinal column may cause prominence of a single vertebral spine. As other vertebrae are affected, a kyphosis is developed. Rib Subluxations. Rib subluxations present many difficulties to the osteopath. The methods used in their reduction are as varied as can well be imagined. A few of the most useful and direct are given here. In Fig. 199 the physician is applying a method of spreading the lower ribs. When the tenth rib sinks under the ninth and there is a general jamming of the four lower ribs together, the physician stands behind the patient who raises his hands above his head to spread the lower ribs by means of the latissimus dorsi. While the hands are elevated, the physician grasps the anterior extremities of the ribs and holds them up while the patient lowers his hands to his thighs. Such a movement as this will replace the ribs in their right relations, but a flexion of the patient's body will undo the work. Continual well directed treat- ment and voluntary exercise are needed to bring them to place and hold them there. The four lower ribs can be separated and the antero- posterior diameter of the thorax increased by the method illustrated in Fig. 200. The left hand lifts on the angles of the depressed ribs while the patient's arm is extended beyond his head, thus making use of the leverage gained through the attachment of the latissimus dorsi. This movement increases the right and left hypochondriacal spaces. The position of an individual rib is affected by the contraction of the intercostal muscles above and below it. The spacing determines whether the rib is elevated or de- pressed. The width of an intercostal space will not be the same between the angles and anterior extremities. This is caused by the fact that the head of the rib is fixed so that it cannot move up or down. The movement which takes place between the head of the rib and the vertebra PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 453 FIG. 200. Spreading the lower ribs by using the latissimus dorsi. is a slight rotation. The costo-transverse articulation al- lows a slight gliding of the articular facet of the rib upon that of the transverse processes. As an example, take the fifth rib, when the space between it and the fourth rib is lessened by the contraction of the fourth intercostals. The lower margin of the rib becomes prominent because the rib is twisted when raised. The anterior extremity is de- pressed, making the fourth intercostal space wider anter- iorly. Palpation of this rib in this condition will show a prominent angle with corresponding depression of the an- terior extremity. When the rib is depressed at the angle, its anterior extremity will be prominent. Palpation is the only method of discovering these sub- luxations. To reduce them, the same principle we applied to reduction of vertebral subluxations must be applied here, i. e., the relaxation of the contracted muscles. 454 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY The tendency in asthmatic and bronchitic patients is to cause elevation of the ribs, thus developing a barrel- shaped chest. When all the intercostal muscles act equal- ly, the ribs are equally spaced, but in a case of bronchitis, some local portion of the bronchial tubing is especially FIG. 201. First position to reduce a subluxated fifth rib. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 455 irritated. From this area, irritant impulses reach the spinal center with which it is most closely associated. The inter- costal muscles in direct relation with this center receive a greater number of impulses, hence, contract more vigor- ously. A strain or blow might cause the same result. FIG. 202. Second position to reduce a subluxated fifth rib. 456 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY To bring this fifth rib down to its proper position, the physician may stand behind his patient, as is illustrated by Fig. 201. His left hand grasps the patient's right elbow and pushes it above the shoulder, thus causing the mus- cles to lift the ribs. This movement will pull on all the ribs of the right side, and tend to equalize the spacing. The physician places his left knee directly over the angle of the fifth rib, his right hand on the anterior extremities of the fifth, sixth and seventh ribs, the middle finger of this hand being applied against the lower margin of the fifth rib. The rib being now in right relation with its fel- lows, the critical period of the movement is when relaxa- tion is allowed by lowering the arm. The knee above and over the angle, pressing forward and downward, while the middle finger of the right hand prevents depression of the anterior extremity. This leverage forces the rib to retain right relations with its fellow in relaxation of the chest. The termination of the movement is illustrated by Fig. 202. A general depression of all the angles of the ribs causes their superior margins to be prominent. A flat chest is the result. This condition frequently follows pneumo- nia or some disease which causes the patient to lie on the back during a long period of weakness. When a single depressed rib is found, it usually has been caused by a strain which has weakened the inter- costal muscles in the space above it. Treat it while stand- ing in front of the patient. Place the middle finger of the left hand under the angle. The patient's right elbow may rest against the physician's abdomen. Pressure made on the elbow forces the scapula back and brings into ac- tion the serratus magnus which lifts the ribs. Ask the patient to inspire and this will raise all the ribs. When relaxation comes with expiration, lift the angle of the rib forcefully, and it will regain its proper position. Fig. 203 illustrates this movement. Some osteopaths grasp the PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 457 FIG. 203. The position of the fingers below the angle of a de- pressed rib. patient's right wrist and extend the arm first forward, then above the head, and back to the side, instead of placing the patient's elbow against the abdomen. It will be noted that all these movements are based on the effects of muscular contraction and relaxation with resulting changes of the position of the structures to which they are attached. 458 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY PIG. 204. First position in lifting- a series of depressed lower ribs. Figs. 204, 205 and 206 illustrate the method of raising and spreading the lower ribs. With the patient in this position, the physician can make extensive passive move- ments without much resistance. These movements are similar to that illustrated by Fig. 199. When the ribs "droop" to a marked degree, there is a decided change in the shape of the diaphragm. The extent of the thoracic floor is lessened, and it may be that the structures passing through the diaphragm are detrimental- ly affected by it. The movement pictured in Fig. 199 is well calculated to spread the lower ribs and thereby in- crease respiratory capacity. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 459 The first rib is so strongly held by the scalenus anti- cus that it practically never is depressed. It is, however, frequently elevated to such an extent that it infringes on structures around the first thoracic sympathetic ganglion, thus affecting heart action. To depress the first rib to its proper position, it is necessary to take the extra contraction out of the scalenus FIG.. 205. Second position in lifting a series of depressed lower ribs. 460 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY anticus. Th?s is done by making the first rib a fixed in- stead of a movable attachment. Fig. 218 illustrates the method of relaxing the scalenus anticus. The physician's thumb holds the first rib down while the muscle is stretched by forcing the patient's head directly to the opposite side. The scaleni muscles can be easily detected by placing one's fingers on the side of the neck near the base. They will be felt hardening during inspiration. FIG. 206. The third position in lifting a series of depressed lower ribs. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 461 Luxations of the Innominate Bones. Examination of the innominate bones requires very close observation of all the factors concerned in tilting the pelvis and varying the length of the lower extremities. The only way to determine the condition of the in- nominates is by palpation and mensuration. Have the patient stripped and sitting in a perfectly upright position on a level surface. Determine the condition of the lum- bar portion of the spinal column. Have the patient's shoul- ders level. While the patient is in this position the rela- tive prominence of the posterior superior iliac spines can be noted by palpation. Find the second sacral spine and note the relations of the iliac spines to it. They should all be on a level. See Fig. 91 in Chapter XIII. Palpate for sensitiveness around the iliac spines, crests of the ilia and crests of pubes. Measure from the anterior superior iliac spines to the adductor tubercles on the internal con- dyles of the femur, when the patient rests evenly in the dorsal position. This measurement is not entirely satis- factory, because any change in the thigh muscles or hip rotators may easily vary the measurements. The only fixed structures from which a reckoning can be made are the second sacral and posterior superior iliac spines. The relations between the sacrum and ilium are never greatly changed, therefore it requires the examiner to exclude practically all measurements which might be varied by muscular tension. The posterior superior iliac spine may be less prom- inent than its fellow on the opposite side, or vice versa. There may not be enough upward or downward displace- ment to make a well recognized change in horizontal re- lations with the second sacral spine. This being the case, it is decidedly difficult to determine which side is normal and which is abnormal. Hyperaesthesia will have to be depended on to determine this point. The related sub- jective symptoms of the patient will decide which is the affected side. 462 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 207. Position for treatment of an upward and forward dis- location of the ilium. The shock which is transmitted to this articulation in an accident usually strikes the tuber ischii from below, or posteriorly, or strikes the knee and the force is exerted against the ascetabulum. When, the force is against the tuber ischii from below, or posteriorly, we have an upward displacement, or a twist, causing the posterior superior iliac spine to become more prominent. When the force strikes the ascetabulum by means of the femur, the twist is in the opposite direction, and the spine is less prominent. Have the patient give details, if possible, concerning his position with reference to the direction of the force at the time of the accident, or if the condition appears to be due to other causes, strive to find out what they are. Having determined the direction of the twist, the force of our manipulation must be made counter to that applied at the time of the accident. Since the hip joint is very movable, we cannot use the thigh as a stiff lever, there- fore, our force must be applied to either the anterior or pos- terior surface of the tuber ischii and to the anterior or PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 463 posterior superior spine of the ilium, i. e., push and pull, such as turning a wheel on its axle. This movement is illustrated in Fig. 207. The original force which this move- ment is trying to overcome was transmitted from the knee by the femur to the acetabulum, and resulted in a twist of the ilium which made the posterior superior spine less prominent than its fellow of the opposite side. In order to make this movement effectual, an assistant must make steady, even pressure over the articulation of the sacrum and fifth lumbar vertebra, i. e., overcome the tendency of the twisting movement to merely affect the movable sacro- vertebral, instead of the immovable sacro-iliac articulation. By flexing the patient's thigh on to his abdomen, suf- ficient opportunity is given the physician to make pres- sure on the anterior surface of the tuber ischii, and pull forward on the posterior superior iliac spine, thus revers- ing the movement illustrated by Fig. 207. Fig. 208 illustrates an effort to use the thigh as a lever to affect the sacro-iliac articulation when the posterior superior spine is prominent. This is a dangerous move- ment, and should not be used. The force transmitted by the thigh as a lever will not reach the joint desired, and will only result in straining the ilio-femoral ligament. A sacro-iliac subluxation is difficult to correct, because the joint is practically without normal movement. The pelvis tends always to resist any appreciable movement in its joints, therefore the physician must devise ways of securing leverage to directly affect these joints without transmitting his corrective leverage through the very movable sacro-vertebral joint above or the hip joint below. This is a difficult condition to fulfill. Anterior Rotation of the Ilium. When the ilium is rotated forward, the posterior superior spinous process is less prominent than its fellow of the opposite side. This condition can be met by having the patient prone on an unyielding surface, slightly padded so as not to bruise the anterior superior spine of the ilium. Since the twist 464 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 208. A dangerous method of applying force to the sacro- iliac articulation. PIG. 209. To correct anterior rotation of the ilium. Hard pad- ding Bunder the anterior superior spine of the ilium. Sudden, heavy, downward pressure on tne sacrum between its first spinous process and the iliac spine, on the lesion side. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 465 may be considered as an ilium rotated forward or the sac- rum rotated backward, we may meet the conditions neces- sary for correction by making sudden pressure on the sacrum at a point between the first sacral spine and the crest of the ilium. This point lies sufficiently above the axis of rotation in the sacro-iliac articulation to give the operator some leverage to assist in securing reduction of the subluxation. The operator should use the hypothenar eminence of one hand, reinforced by the other hand, to make contact with the proper area on the back of the sacrum. The pressure must be exerted in a direction par- allel with the iliac crest. After contact has been made with the hand the operator 'should prepare to deliver a sudden forceful pressure, as though he was trying to compress a very stiff spring which would not show any compression without throwing his weight on it. It may be necessary to increase the operator's advantage by putting a special pad under the anterior superior spine of the ilium so as to eliminate any support by the soft tissues of the ab- domen. A further advantage may be gained by allowing FIG. 210. To correct anterior rotation of the ilium. Flex thigh, on the lesion side, onto the abdomen. Use padded edge of operating table to support the sacrum at point between first sacral spine and spine of the ilium, while a sudden, heavy downward rotating pressure is made on the thigh and lesioned ilium. 466 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY the patient's leg, on the side of the lesion, to hang off the table so as to be at a right angle to the spinal column. This tends to tilt the pelvis backward and thus permit a greater downward movement in response to the sudden pressure. Sometimes it is advisable to use several par- tial applications of the pressure before the final corrective effort, without removing the contact hand. This tends to permit the patient to relax by taking away the feeling that protective resistance must be made. The operator must create and recognize the psychological moment for the application of the corrective movement. The principle underlying the operation just described can be applied if the patient lies on his back. The leg on the lesion side should be flexed on the thigh and the thigh on the abdomen, thus tilting the pelvis backward. By placing the pelvis so that the ilium on the lesion side is just off the padded edge of the table, the operator can place his chest against the flexed leg and thigh while his hands rest on the opposite anterior superior spines of the ilia. A sudden downward pressure, coordinated with an attempt to spread the ilia apart, will be met by the re- sistance of the padded edge of the table against the side of the sacrum, between its first spinous process and the iliac crest. These movements have the advantage of ap- plying corrective force without having any of that force dissipated by passing it through a movable joint before reaching the intended point of application. This is a very important factor if the patient is anaesthetized. Posterior Rotation of the Ilium. When the posterior superior spine of one of the ilia is apparently too prom- inent, care should be taken to note whether the apparent prominence is not due to a rotation and tilting of the pel- vis in its relation to the spinal column. Since the flexion of the trunk on the pelvis is characteristic, in the sitting posture, and all people tend to rest themselves while stand- ing by transmitting the weight of the body through one leg, continued maintenance of these positions changes the PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 467 relation of the pelvis to the spinal column, i. e., causes a unilateral lumbo-sacral subluxation. Static errors are characterized by a compensatory tilt of the pelvis, hence all the factors that might produce such a condition must be taken into consideration. As previously noted, the one test of whether a subluxation exists is a comparison of the relative positions of the posterior superior spines with relation to the second sacral spine. To correct a posterior rotation we use practically the same position and leverage required to correct a tilt of the pelvis on the spinal column. The patient should re- cline on the normal side, thus presenting the subluxation area to the operator. Force must be applied on the crest and side of the ilium close to the posterior superior spine, so as to rotate the ilium forward. The body must be ro- tated backward, thus tending to hold the sacrum from ro- tating idly with the ilium. These conditions can be ful- filled if the operator takes the position illustrated in Fig. 211, i. e., grasps the patient's elbow with his hand and presses his own elbow against the patient's shoulder, thus FIG. 211. To correct posterior rotation of the ilium. Balance pa- tient's body in the lateral recumbent position so that, by push- ing the patient's shoulder backward the operator can make efficient pressure against the prominent iliac spine with his opposite forearm and thus secure a combination extension and torsion movement, concentrated in the sacro-iliac joint. 468 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY securing an advantageous hold for forcing the patient's body to rotate backward. The operator places his other forearm solidly against the crest of the ilium and gluteal tissues just above and external to the posterior iliac spine. By rocking the pelvis forward and the body backward a few times the patient will yield to the movement and the operator should select the moment of the patient's greatest relaxation to suddenly accentuate these opposing rota- tions. No attempt should be made to make more than a moderate rotation until it is felt that the patient is per- mitting the movement to be made without interposing any strong protective muscle tension. It is quite impossible to correct a subluxated ilium if the patient exerts any pro- tective contraction of his muscles. The force of the rota- tion movement must go through the muscles without re- sistance, so as to reach the ligaments and other deep struc- tures around the joint. The art of getting successfully by the muscular tension of the patient without exerting a force capable of producing trauma requires no small degree of skill. No great amount of force seems ever to be required if one has a fine sense of tissue resistance. FIG. 212. Leverage and counter pressure to reduce a posterior iliac subluxation. Operator's left forearm makes pressure against posterior superior il : ac spine. Same leverage as in Fig. 218, therefore dangerous. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 469 By working skillfully in applying corrective force one learns to recognize a psychological moment when, by in- tensifying the force suddenly, the deep structures which are the object of our operation can receive the full benefit of our effort without interference from muscular contrac- tion. The operation, at the climax of the application of the corrective force, is characterized by a popping sound. The position here described serves in an almost iden- tical manner for treating unilateral subluxations in the lumbar arthrodials or the lumbo-sacral articulation. The only change required is the shifting of the forearm from the ilium to some selected point higher on the crest and lumbar region. Since the lumbar arthrodials face nearly directly inward and outward, the forcing of the shoulders and pelvis in opposite directions tends to take out tension in the muscles controlling these joints and the force is evi- dently applied with the same angle of incidence to the sur- faces of the lumbar arthrodials as we secure in the dor- sal area of the spinal column by a sudden counter pressure and extension. After a successful correction has been made of a case of subluxated innominate it is advisable to reinforce the pelvic ligaments by strapping the pelvis with surgeon's adhesive plaster. Plaster three inches wide serves very well. Apply the first strip so that its upper edge just reaches the posterior superior spine of the ilium. Pass the strip forward so that it comes just above the crease at the junction of the thigh and the abdomen, the upper margin of the strip covering the anterior superior spine of the ilium. The pubic hair must be shaved so that the ends of the adhesive strip may lap over the pubes. The second and third strips are brought around the body on lines sim- ilar to the first and overlapping each other about an inch. The strips should be put on tightly so as to bind the pelvis and give the patient a sense of security and comfort. The strips may be left on for ten days, then a series of treat- ments of a tonic character which will serve to strengthen 470 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY the tissues is advisable. It may be necessary to repeat the corrective movements many times if the case is one of low vitality or has a static area which does not permit the pelvis to hold its normal relation to the spinal column. FIG. 213. Three strips of two and one-half-inch adhesive applied to reinforce the pelvic ligaments so as to retain a subluxated ilium in position after correction. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 471 CHAPTER XXII. TREATMENT OF THE CERVICAL REGION. The treatment of the clavicle must be considered here, because its position so frequently interferes with the drainage of the tissues of the neck. When it is held down too closely to the first rib, by shortening of the subclavius muscle, it is quite sure to affect venous circulation in the head and neck. To Raise the Clavicle. To raise it place the right thumb on the first rib as illustrated by Fig. 214, then carry the patient's left forearm across his face above the head as in Fig. 215. Then as far outward as the physician's arm. This movement causes the clavicle to press down on the physician's thumb, where it rests on the first rib, and thus stretches the subclavius. Subluxation of the Clavicle. Articulations, such as the sterno-clavicular and acromio-clavicular, which depend entirely on their ligaments to keep them together and to limit their motion, cannot be retained in place if their liga- ments have been injured. If the ligaments of the sterno- clavicular joint become relaxed, the pull of the sterno- cleido-mastoid lifts it upward. Slight irritation of the pneumogastric nerve may be occasioned by this change of position. Preparatory Treatment of the Neck Trapezius. The preparatory treatment of the neck consists in movements to relax the various groups of muscles. Fig. 216 illustrates the method of relaxing the cervical portion of the trape- zius. One hand on the shoulder holds it firmly down, while 472 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 214. First position to raise the clavicle. the other hand forces the head as far as possible in the opposite direction. Relax the opposite muscle in a similar manner. Sterno-cleido-mastoid. Next, relax the sterno-cleido- mastoid by separating its attachments as far as possible, as in Fig. 217, also by direct manipulation. Observe whether both muscles will relax equally. These large mus- cles are frequently found unevenly contracted. Since the spinal accessory nerves control these muscles, any con- traction should lead the physician to examine all parts in connection with them. A reflex from the laryngeal branches as well as pneumogastric branches might ac- count for it. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 473 FIG. 215. Second position to raise the clavicle. Scaleni. The scaleni muscles should be treated as al- ready mentioned in Chap. XXI. See Fig. 218. Splenius Capitis et Colli. Fig. 219 illustrates a meth- od of stretching the ligamentum nuchae, as well as all the extensor muscles on the back of the neck. This may be modified by forcing the chin backward with one hand, while the other flexes the head as sharply as possible. This stretches the muscles and ligaments on the posterior por- tion of the occipital-atlantal and axial articulations. The retraction of the chin governs the amount of stretching exerted by the flexion. 474 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 216. Relaxation of the cervical fibres of the trapezius. Extension. Direct extension of the neck makes an equal pull on all the vertebrae. When the patient's feet are anchored, the force of the pull is felt in the weakest portions of the spinal column. The average patient requir- ing this treatment enjoys a delicious stimulation after re- laxation of the extension. A few who are extremely ner- vous may give a bad reaction. The influx of blood in the spinal cord is highly beneficial to those who have suffi- cient vaso-motor tone to hold it there, but those who lack this tone will feel faint or even absolutely lose conscious- ness. Simply allowing them to rest on the table until the vascular system reacts, will enable them to reap the full benefit of the treatment. The extension should be made with absolute steadiness. The relaxation period is usually the one in which any vaso-motor phenomena are noted. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 475 FIG. 217. Relaxation of the sterno-cleido-mastoid. The tension should be lessened very slowly in all cases. Fig. 220 shows the position of the physician's hand. Rotation.- The following movement is one for which long practice is required, in order to get anything like a successful result from its use. It consists in grasping the patient's neck with the left hand as in Fig. 221. The pa- tient's head rests against and slightly to the right of the physician's forearm. The right hand grasps the chin while the forearm rests firmly against the patient's head. The object is to hold the neck and head rigid above the point grasped by the thumb and fingers of the left hand. While holding the head and neck rigid, they are moved so as to force circumduction in the joint below the grasp of the left hand. After each circumduction the left hand is shifted the depth of one vertebra nearer the head. Thus all the in- tervertebral articulations in the cervical region are relaxed 476 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 218. Relaxation of the scaleni by depressing the first rib. and specific work on a definite articulation can be done more easily. The Hyoid Bone. Work on the anterior portion of the neck consists in affecting- the condition of groups of muscles forming the floor of the mouth and extrinsic mus- cles of the larynx. The Hyoid bone is the movable part which can be grasped by the physician's fingers. Drawing it downward and to the right, as in Fig. 222, relaxes the stylo-hyoid and posterior belly of the digastric. A contractured condition of these muscles may affect the pneumogastric nerve. Mylo-hyoid and Hyoglossus. The mylo-hyoid and hyoglossus forming the floor of the mouth may be treated as in Fig. 223. When the maxillary glands are congested, PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 477 FIG. 219. Relaxation of the splenius capitis et colli. it is necessary to relax these muscles. The physician's right hand grasps the hyoid bone, being careful to provide enough loose skin above the bone so that the force will not be exerted on the cutaneous tissues instead of the muscles underneath. After the hyoid bone is pulled down- ward, the tension of the mylo-hyoid is increased by using the pressure of the fingers of the left hand. Sterno-thyroid and Sterno-hyoid. The depressor mus- cles of the larynx and hyoid may be stretched by forcing these structures toward the angle of the jaw, while the free hand makes direct manipulation of the muscles. In all cases of congestion of the glands, mucous membranes or cellular tissues of the mouth, pharynx or larynx, these muscles should be relaxed if the position of the atlas has been corrected. 478 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 220. Extension of the neck. Intrinsic Muscles of the Larynx. The intrinsic mus- cles of the larynx sometimes need attention. The crico- thyroid is the tuning muscle of the larynx. This may be demonstrated by grasping the thyroid cartilage with the thumb and forefinger of one hand, while the thumb and forefinger of the other hand grasps lightly the cricoid cartilage, as in Fig. 224. If the cartilages are slightly sep- arated while the patient makes a vowel sound, the pitch of the voice will be perceptibly lowered. This is occa- sioned by relaxation of the vocal cords by separating the cartilages, which stretches the crico-thyroid. This mus- cle is innervated by the external branch of the superior laryngeal branch of the pneumogastric. The motor fibers of the superior laryngeal come from the spinal accessory, hence we find lesions in the cervical articulations, which are primary causes of laryngeal disorders. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 479 FIG. 221. Circumduction of the neck to relax the muscles of the flfth layer. The Atlas. The atlas, on account of its position, free- dom of movement, numerous muscular attachments, etc., is subject to frequent subluxation. Fig. 102 shows the normal relations of the mastoid process, transverse pro- cess of the atlas, and the angle of the jaw. Fig. 103 shows the abnormal relations of these various prominent points as they are frequently found by the osteopath. When the right transverse process is near the mastoid, the left is too close to the angle of the jaw, and vice versa. In reducing this twist of the atlas, the physician should work on the side which shows the transverse pro- cess to be posterior. The same principle is applied in re- ducing this subluxation as was described in connection with the dorsal lateral subluxations. Fig. 225 illustrates "exaggeration." Fig. 226 shows lateral flexion to the left, while the physician's fingers make firm pressure back of the prominent transverse process, thus steadily taking 480 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 222. Relaxation of the stylo-hyoid and posterior belly of the digastric. advantage of all the relaxation gained in each portion of the movement. The termination of the movement is il- lustrated in Fig. 227. Sometimes the atlas slips into place with an audible "click," but more often the physician feels a "gritting" sensation as the articular surfaces rub over each other. When the subluxation of the atlas is reduced by this movement, it will hold its true position more firmly than will any other vertebral articulation which has been affected in a like manner. This is because the condyles of the occiput fit more deeply into the superior articulat- ing surfaces of the atlas than is the case between articulat- ing surfaces of pairs of vertebrae. Fig. 229 illustrates a PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 481 FIG. 223. Relaxation of the mylo-hyoid and hyo-glossus. method of relaxing the muscular tension in the muscles which move the atlas. This method is used to force the atlas forward. It will be readily noted that by over-ex- tending the head on the neck and using counter pressure on the posterior surface of the atlas the mechanical re- quirements for forcing the atlas forward are fulfilled. By moving the head up and down and from side to side, mus- cular tension will be sufficiently reduced to permit reduc- tion of the snbluxation. Sixth Cervical. The sixth cervical vertebra is especial- ly difficult to treat. When the cervical muscles are well developed, it is obscured to the touch posteriorly, but the carotid tubercles anteriorly can be felt. It is not wise to 482 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 224. Relaxation of the crico-thyroid. exert much pressure upon bony structures from the an- terior surface of the neck. There are so many glands, nerves, arteries, etc., lying over the transverse processes, that direct pressure is liable to injure them. Fig. 228 illustrates a method of reducing a subluxation of the sixth cervical vertebra. The patient's chin rests in the physician's hands, which are placed on each side of the neck and near enough to the chin to support it by the little finger. The thumbs are used to affect the spine directly. The compression of the head and neck above the lesion, by both hands, keeps them rigid and all are moved together, first to exaggerate the lesion of the sixth, then anterior flexion is forced in the articulation affected, then lateral flexion with counter pressure by the thumb on the prominent side of the spine. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY i 483 FIG. 225. Reduction of subluxation of the atlas, right trans- verse process too far posterior exaggeration movement. This movement can be applied to subluxations of the first and second dorsal. General Principles Underlying Corrective Movements. The same general principle, governing the correction of subluxations in other portions of the spinal column, is applicable in the cervical region, i. e., the movement, or series of movements, must be made so as to overcome the influence of a dominant muscle group. As we have pre- 484 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 226. Reduction of subluxation of the atlas, lateral flexion. viously noted, the position of an arthrodial joint is expres- sive of the relative tension of the muscles which activate it. The Simplest Form of Correction. The simplest form of corrective movement is extension, i. e., a direct pull in the long axis of the spinal column. This tends to put PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 485 FIG. 227. Reduction of subluxation of the atlas, extension and counter pressure. equal stress on all the joints, but, in reality, it will be felt most in any lesioned articulation. The lesioned articula- tion is the "weakest link" and therefore is most sensitive to the effect of the extension. Extension of this kind is grateful to most patients and when made by one who has a keen sense of tissue resistance, is practically without danger. 486 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 228. Manner of holding the head and neck in order to reduce a subluxated sixth cervical vertebra. Torsion and Counter Pressure. Since the cervical region is normally very flexible, considerable skill is re- quired, if an operator makes use of rotation and counter pressure for correction of joint lesions. The results se- cured by these means are very gratifying, but there is a larger element of danger than in the use of extension. The skillful operator must have a good knowledge of the anat- omy of the region and a sense of tissue resistance. A tor- sion movement is a powerful lever and should be used very carefully. Although it is possible to describe the relative positions of the operator's hands and the general direction of the movements, it is not possible to convey to the reader an idea of the amount of force used, or the rela- tive amount of resistance to be overcome. It is this var- iable element which makes the difference between success and failure in operative work. Normal muscle tone is equal to about six pounds' pull, hence if a patient volun- tarily relaxes, or is placed in a position which does not PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 487 FIG. 229. Position for loosening structures around the atlas and forcing it forward. 488 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY PIG. 230. Movement to secure correction of a cervico- dorsal kyphosis. Many variations of this leverage may be used. The effectiveness of the movement depends on the fulcrum being properly applied. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 489 require any exertion to overcome gravity, it is very evi- dent that no great amount of force will be required to change the position of an arthrodial joint. If the operator will always bear in mind that great force is not required, there will be no accidents. Rigidity. When the patient holds his neck stiff and rigid, it is necessary to determine why it is so held before we attempt any movements to alter the condition. Disease of the vertebrae, or inflammation in the joints, is charac- terized by bilateral muscular tension, which is necessary to protect the structures from the strain occasioned by movement. No attempt should be made to relax this ten- sion by manipulation. The usual case of "stiff neck" is unilateral. It consists of a unilateral muscular contrac- tion. Usually the patient cannot turn the head toward the lesion, but can turn it in the opposite direction. This is the differential diagnostic point between a muscular and a ligamentous lesion. The ligamentous lesion does not permit rotation away from the lesion because such action stretches the ligament. The Favorable Position for Corrective Movements. As stated in a previous chapter, the position of election, for the use of rotation as a corrective movement, is exten- sion. Some operators prefer to have the patient sitting and thus have the head balance its weight on the vertical vertebral column. It is then very easy to use the weight of the head as an assisting factor in securing the leverage necessary to correct slight rotation lesions. By allowing the patient's chin to rest in the operator's right or left hand, while the opposite hand supports the suboccipital region, Fig. 230, the head may be rotated and flexed, or extended, in such manner as desired by the operator, to correct a cervical subluxation. The hand, which supports the suboccipital region, is made to do double duty by act- ing through its lower border, as a fulcrum, over which the spinal column is bent, so as to accentuate the force 490 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY of the corrective movement in a certain joint. The correc- tive rotation movement is always associated with a little flexion or extension, according to the character of the FIG. 231. The use of rotation to secure correction of cervical lesions. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 491 lesion. The head is rocked gently in the direction required for the correction and when the rotation reaches a point where the resistance in the lesion is felt, Fig. 231, the op- FIG. 232, Leverage and counter pressure applied to a reclining patient. Rotation is secured in the upper dorsal or any point in the cervical according to the location of the fulcrum. 492 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY erator strives to create a condition of relaxation by ad- monishing his patient not to resist, so that by a sudden but very slight increase in rotation the lesion will receive the full effect of the movement and yield to it. The yield- ing is usually accompanied by a clicking sound in the joint and a feeling of comfort. The range of voluntary movement in the articulation is increased and the patient usually experiences a feeling of added power. The position of the fulcrum individualizes the charac- ter of a movement, therefore the shift of the depth of one vertebra either makes or mars the success of one's effort at correction. In order to use the fulcrum hand with more specificity, or force, the operator may rest the patient's chin in the bend of his elbow and then, by anchoring the head with his body, forearm and hand, Fig. 189, ex- tend the patient's neck by a gentle lift. This extension frequently overcomes enough of the muscular tension to permit a slight additional rotation movement, with coun- ter pressure, to correct the lesion. Several illustrations are presented herewith, to show the manner of applying the osteopathic principle of cor- recting cervical subluxations by extension and torsion. The position of the patient, either lying or sitting, is pure- ly arbitrary with the operator. The principles involved in the operation are the same in either position. Fig. 232 shows how torsion and counter pressure may be used w r hen the patient is recumbent. The position of the right hand illustrates how the influence of the leverage may be car- ried into the upper dorsal region. Fig. 191 illustrates the application of the same principle when the patient is sit- ting. As we have previously stated, the position of the fulcrum is the part of any corrective movement, of this character, which localizes the effect. Since we are aiming to change the relations of the bony elements in a flexible lever, the spinal column, at a certain point, the fulcrum must be used with reference to the kind of movement characteristic at that point. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 493 CHAPTER XXIII. EXTREMITIES. Treatment of the shoulder for synovial adhesions. liga- mentous or muscular contractions, consists of movements made in the normal direction, but carried farther than the patient can do so voluntarily. Diagnosis. Test the extent of the movements, normal to the articulation, to ascertain whether the loss of move- ment is general in all directions or results from impair- ment of some, special muscle or ligament. Causes of Stiff Joints. The history of the case will usually give an insight into its cause, progress, etc. The shoulder articulation is frequently stiffened by a sprain, dislocation, muscular and articular rheumatism. The simplest cases are those resulting from rest, necessitated by a broken clavicle or humerus. The necessary rest after a dislocation gives the strained ligaments an opportunity to shorten and thicken. Movements should be frequently forced in such cases to prevent any synovial adhesions. The differentiation of cases of ankylosis is an important one. It is disheartening to physician and patient alike to find that after weeks of earnest effort no satisfactory results are obtained. An article on "Ankylosis" by J. S. White, D. O., of Pasadena, Cal., published in Vol. V., No. IV., of The Osteopath, page 211, deserves quotation here because it notes so clearly the important points which the student ought to know. With his permission, it is quoted in full. "Ankylosis. When, from an injury, disease or other cause, a joint loses its function and becomes stiff, it is said 494 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY to be ankylosed. This condition may be termed bony (complete) or fibrous (incomplete), true (intra-articular) or false (extra-articular) ankylosis." "These are the terms used by Da Costa to define ankylosis, yet some claim that joint-stiffness caused by extra-articular contraction, or obstruction, is not ankylosis in the correct sense ; but on looking at the derivation of the word (an(g)kulos crooked or bent), it seems that the term ankylosis would be correct when applied to any form of restricted joint movement." "The causes of ankylosis are many. First, let us con- sider those which result in complete and incomplete an- kylosis. Inflammations in or around the joint, from what- ever cause, if continued long enough for new tissue forma- tion, will cause ankylosis. After aseptic inflammations we FIG. 233. Manner of applying leverage to stretch the structures forming the scapulo-humeral articulation. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 495 will most likely find fibrous, but when there is infection, bony ankylosis is more probable." "This fibrous formation is the result of inflammation, for wherever there is inflammation there is an increase of tissue. Suppose a case of dislocation, with considerable FIG. 234. A position for easy manipulation or the scapulo-hu- meral articulation. 496 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY contusion of the tissues around the joint, inflammation re- sults, and embryonic tissue begins to form as a reparative process; the embryonic tissue sends out small processes, which start from new centers and spread through the gelatinous mass, in and around the joint, until a very ir- regular network is spread all around the joint surface, when the contraction process begins, the new tissue is formed into fibrous tissue, which unites the bones closely together; by cicatricial contraction the bones may be drawn so closely together that movement is almost impossible." "Bony union of the joint surface follows fibrous anky- losis; it occurs when the bone itself is injured or diseased, and the surface of the bone eroded or broken. Ossification begins chiefly in those layers of fibrous tissue lying next to the bone." "False or extra-articular ankylosis is caused by the contraction of tissues around the joint. These contrac- tions, external to the joint, may be the result of many remote and obscure causes." FIG. 235. Relaxation of the quadriceps extensor. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 497 "First. Chronic contraction, which may be due to dis- ease or obstruction to the nerve, at the center, or in its course to the muscles. As the normal action of muscles is dependent on normal nerve stimulus, a muscle may be affected in various ways by the stimulus of an over-irri- tated or inhibited nerve ; excess of nerve stimulation will cause a pathological contraction, or there may be suspen- sion of nerve stimulus and paralysis of muscles, allowing the opposing muscles to pull and hold the joint in a fixed position." "Second. Contractions sufficient to cause permanent fixations may follow the healing of wounds, ulcers or ab- scesses. Active contraction, from any cause, if kept in that state any length of time, can cause the muscle to undergo a state of fibroid degeneration; tissue waste is replaced by fat and fibrous material. There is good evidence that, after a time, tissues which have not fulfilled their function lose the ability to do so, and the nutritive changes ac- companying vital activity do not take place ; the contiguous fibers and cells become adherent, agglutinated and united FIG. 236. Relaxation of the quadriceps extensor, sacro-vertebral articulation allowed to remain movable. 498 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY by exuded serum and waste material not carried away by the circulation, sluggish through inactivity of the muscles." "The tendons and ligaments around the joint are thickened and hardened to the length the limb was held by the active contraction, but after the manner of all new- ly formed tissue, it continues to retract and draw the limb more out of its normal position." "Third. Contractions may be the result of certain diseases (as rheumatism, gout, tuberculosis, syphilis, or any disease causing non-use of the joint or mal-nutrition of the controlling muscles." "In examining an ankylosed joint, we must distinguish between bony and fibrous ankylosis and extra-articular con- traction. A joint may be immovable, and yet not so be- cause of bony ankylosis." "Da Costa says that a joint immovable from fibrous ankylosis is distinguished from a joint immovable from bony ankylosis by the fact that, in the former, attempts at motion are productive of pain and subsequently of in- flammation ; therefore, pain on attempted motion excludes FIG. 237. Relaxation of the adductor muscles of the thigh. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 499 bony ankylosis from our diagnosis. An approximate idea of the extent of the stiffness may be obtained from a his- tory of the case as to whether the disease has been severe in character and long in duration. The nerves of the joint should be examined at their point of exit from the spine and throughout their course to the joint." "The same conditions, in general, which cause pain in a joint may cause ankylosis, whether that pain be due to local injury or referred from some other part. A contracted psoas muscle by irritation to the branches of the obturator nerve can cause pain, contraction and consequent stiffness of the knee joint." "What can osteopathy do for this condition? For bony ankylosis nothing should be attempted, for the treat- ment would only result in discouragement and disappoint- ment to both physician and patient; but if the joint is in an almost useless position, excision or osteotomy may be tried with good results. If the joint has become ankylosed through septic inflammation, it should not be forcibly broken up, because of the danger of re-infection of the FIG. 238. Method of stretching the sciatic nerve. 500 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY whole joint, or other parts of the body, through the cir- culation." "In cases of fibrous and extra-articular ankylosis osteo- pathy can refer to the most encouraging records, and is un- doubtedly ahead of any other method of treatment. The main point in the treatment consists principally in making active the retarded circulation, gradually breaking up the adhesions, thoroughly relaxing all the muscles, and a stimulating treatment to the nerves." "For extra-articular ankylosis the treatment is varied according to the cause. Osteopathy has a great mission to fill in finding and removing the primary cause of many cases of ankylosis. Hilton speaks of a case of diseased (tubercular) knee joint cured by ankylosis. True! the rest and ankylosis was nature's way of reducing the in- flammation and disease when it had progressed so far. But the work of the osteopath is to look for the causes which made the knee joint "a point of least resistance" for the tubercle bacilli to multiply in. Examine the spine thoroughly, the sacro-iliac articulation and the hip for dis- locations, which cause pain in the knee joint through irri- tation of the obturator nerve. But does pain alone in the joints lead to the condition known as a 'point of least re- sistance?' Pain prevents much movement in the joint, and remembering that continued non-use of muscles causes mal-nutrition, sluggish circulation and degeneration of the muscle, we may see how the joint may become a place for germs to multiply." "Is it too long a course from simple pain to disease? Remember that pain is usually accompanied by contraction of muscle. Our treatment must be both preventive and curative." "Following is a case of fibrous ankylosis and paralysis illustrating the efficiency of osteopathy to treat this class of sufferers. Vincent Pete, five years of age, had an anky- losed elbow as a result of a dislocation and break. The joint was attended to immediately after the accident by a PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 501 regular physician, but was kept in the splints too long, which caused the fibrous ankylosis. The humerus was broken just above the condyles, and a small spicula of bone had protruded so that it interfered with those fibers of the median nerve which supply the flexor muscles of the thumb and forefinger to such a degree that the thumb and forefinger were completely paralyzed, as far as the flexor movements were concerned. The forearm was ankylosed almost at a right angle with the arm, and a very little movement could be made, and that with great pain; the muscles in the cervical region of the spine were sore and contracted. This was the condition of the patient when he came for treatment eight weeks after the accident. The improvement began with the first treatment, and in on month the arm was perfectly straight and movable in any direction, and he began to have power of movement in his finger and thumb; at the end of two months' treat- ment, his arm had returned to almost its usual strength and flexibility. I saw him a month later and the arm and FIG. 239. Method of stretching the pyriformis muscle. 502 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY hand were perfectly normal. Contrast this case with one treated by mechanical rest, resulting in a fixed elbow joint, or perhaps a moderately useful joint following forcible breaking of adhesion under anaesthesia, which is a dan- gerous treatment, with very doubtful results, as the opera- tion may have to be done over and over again before a use- ful joint is gained." The Scapulo-humeral Articulation. Fig. 233 illus- trates a method of prying the head of the humerus out of the glenoid fossa, i. e.. separating the articular surfaces. This movement can be used in cases of muscular rheuma- tism when complete abduction of the arm is impossible. It also allows an influx of fresh arterial blood. When abducting the arm, the scapula must be held by the physician's hands. Place the fingers on the vertebral border of the scapula, while the axillary border is com- pressed by the thumb. By holding the scapula securely, the physician is sure that all the movement he forces is in the shoulder articulation, and not the gliding of the scapula on the thorax. The muscles of the arm may be relaxed by direct manipulation. The insertion of the deltoid is fre- quently tender. Any wasting of the muscles of the ex- tremity should be carefully noted, so that the course of its FIG. 240. Stretching the deep and superficial muscles on the back of the leg. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 503 governing nerve may be searched for a point of com- pression. Examination of the Brachial Plexus. The principal motor divisions of the brachial plexus may be tested by simple movements made by the patient. The patient's gripping power is an index to the condition of the median nerve, and the muscles it innervates. Extension of the forearm, wrist and fingers made against resistance is an index of power in the musculo-spiral nerve tract. Abduc- tion and adduction of the fingers are controlled by the ulnar nerve. Flexion of the forearm by the musculo-cutaneous. Observe the condition of the first posterior interos- seous muscle which forms the little muscular swelling when the thumb is adducted to the second metacarpal bone. If it is wasted there is evidence of nerve cell degeneration. This muscle should be well developed in thin hands, as well as in fat ones. If the wasting is unilateral, look for impingement on the ulnar nerve at some point in its course. If it is bilateral the cells in the spinal cord are probably at fault. The deltoid is frequently painful as a result of pressure on the circumflex nerve. The pressure is usually at the point of exit from the vertebral canal. Relaxation of the structures around its point of exit usually gives relief. Reduction of Dislocations by Traction. The general method applied to dislocations of all joints of the extremi- ties is direct traction. This is sometimes aided by pres- sure on the prominent point of the dislocated bone to aid it in slipping to its place. All of the dislocations of the humerus, subcoracoid, subclavicular, subglenoid and sub- spinous, can be reduced by using traction to stretch the muscles and ligaments of the joint to the extent that the head of the humerus will slip over the rim of the glenoid fossa. This traction may be made with the patient sitting, as in Fig. 234. The knee in the axilla springs the head of the humerus outward. The same treatment may be ap- plied with the patient reclining. The physician should 504 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY place a ball of woolen yarn in the axilla, then place his stockinged foot upon it, and make traction on the arm. It is possible to apply the traction method in a simpler way. An ordinary canvas cot, with a hole cut in it, so that the arm can be put through while the patient rests easily on his side, should be elevated far enough from the floor to al- low a six-pound weight to be attached to the wrist. This steady weight quickly relaxes the muscles and reduces the subluxation. Traction always strains the muscles and causes some heat and swelling, therefore, care should be taken to pre- vent exudates and adhesions. Reduction of Dislocations by Leverage. Those who are expert in reducing shoulder dislocations, usually make use of a series of movements which exaggerate the lesion, i. e., make the head of the dislocated bone more prominent. In subcoracoid dislocations of the humerus, abduction of the arm causes exaggeration. The physician stands at the side of the patient, who is reclining on a hard surface. As abduction is made, the physician's free hand rests upon FIG. 241. Position for easy manipulation of the saphenous opening. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 505 the head of the humerus. From the position of abduction the arm is carried inward and forward on a level with the shoulder, at the same time being rotated internally so that the external condyle will be in front of the patient's nose; then carry the arm downward to the side with a quick, vigorous movement, at the same time exerting pres- sure on the head of the bone as before mentioned. This series of movements must be made quickly, and the pres- sure on the head of the bone be most intense while the in- ternal rotation and adduction are at the maximum This series of movements may be employed to break up synovial adhesions. Elbow Dislocations. Elbow dislocations are infre- quent compared to those of ball and socket joints. The possible dislocations of the ulna are lateral and posterior. The former require traction, the latter is reduced by placing the bend of the patient's elbow over the physician's knee. Traction with one hand on the patient's wrist, while the other hand makes pressure on the olecranon, will force FIG. 242. Position for easy manipulation of the popliteal space. 506 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY the ulna into place. This dislocation is usually compli- cated with fracture of the coronoid process. The Radius. The radius may be dislocated posteriorly or anteriorly. Lateral dislocations of either radius or ulna carry both bones together. A posterior dislocation of the radius can be reduced by flexion of the forearm, then ex- tension with counter pressure on the prominent point of the head of the radius posteriorly. A forward dislocation requires supination of the arm and adduction of the hand, together with pressure on the anterior surface of the head of the radius. Dislocations of the bones of the wrist or hand are re- duced by traction or pressure. Old Dislocations. All dislocations, twenty-four hours old, require considerable relaxing treatment. The older they are, the harder they are to reduce. Nature begins to adapt herself to new conditions almost immediately. All the slack of muscles and ligaments is swiftly taken up. Those tissues most compressed by the new position of the bone are impoverished by the lack of nourishment. Thick- enings and adhesions quickly form, so that old dislocations are not easily handled. Old dislocations are treated in the same manner as fresh ones, except that much relaxing and restoring of vitality is necessary. Muscles of the Lower Extremity. The muscles of the lower extremity may be relaxed, either by direct manipu- lation or by taking advantage of the movement of various joints to put them on a stretch. Direct manipulation is laborious and requires considerable time. The muscles of the hip joint frequently contract suf- ficiently to make walking difficult. They contract as a re- sult of strain, bruise, disease of the joint, subluxation of lumbar vertebrae, or luxation of the iliac bones. The sub- luxations irritate the nerves which innervate the muscles controlling the joint. The movements hereafter outlined may be used for many different purposes, but they are applied here to spe- PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 507 cific groups of muscles. All the movements we have thus far outlined have been described according to the way they affect structure, not function. FIG. 243. Position for reduction of subiuxation of external semilunar cartilage of the knee. 508 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 244. Showing position for producing free movement in the arthrodial articulation between upper ends of the fibula and tibia. External popliteal nerve lies behind the head ot the fibula. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 509 Quadriceps Extensor. The quadriceps extensor of the thigh is innervated by the anterior crural nerve. In order to stretch this muscle the patient should lie face downward. The physician grasps the patient's ankle with the left hand, as in Fig. 235. The right hand holds the pelvis to the table. Lifting with the left hand puts the muscle on a tension which can be easily increased by flex- ing the knee. This movement stretches the fascia over Poupart's ligament and the saphenous opening. Fig. 236 illustrates a movement similar to the pre- ceding, but it is not so powerful. When the patient lies on the side, his back bends to the force of the movement of the leg. If the physician grips the ankle instead of the knee there is a great increase in the effect of the move- ment. The Adductor Group. The adductor group of thigh muscles, innervated by the obturator nerve, can be stretched as in Fig. 237. If there is any inflammation in the acetabulum, this movement will cause the patient great distress, because it stretches the teres ligament. Dislocation of the Femur. Dislocations of the hip joint are usually caused by the forcible spreading of the legs. The head of the femur is thus forced over the edge of the acetabulum at its dependent and weakest part, the cotyloid notch. It passes into the thyroid foramen, and if it remains there all the muscles are stretched very tight- ly, and no voluntary movement is possible. The direction the head takes is dependent on the direction of the force. If the knee points anteriorly at the time of the forced ex- treme abduction, the head, after entering the thyroid fora- men, passes out of it posteriorly and takes a position over the spine of the ischium, great sciatic foramen or outer sur- face of the ilium, all owing to the vigorous pulling of the muscles. If the knee points posteriorly, the head of the femur travels to a position under the anterior inferior spine of the ilium. 510 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 245. Radiograph of fractured oiecranor, process and exudate after removal of splints. Movement recovered after many weeks of gentle manipulation to promote absorption and break ad- hesions. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 511 The movements made to reduce these subluxations take into consideration the fact that the head of the femur must be made to retrace its route in order to regain its proper position. For example, a dislocation posteriorly on- to the spine of the ischium causes the toe to turn inward, and there is slight shortening of the leg. The physician takes a position as in Fig. 239 and carries the knee upward and inward. He forces the knee as far as possible across the median line, then flexes the thigh hard on the abdo- men. This turns the head of the femur downward and inward. Remember that the head points always in the same direction as the internal condyle. Now, forcibly ab- duct and extend the thigh with a quick external rotation. These movements cannot be made successfully without a long course of preliminary relaxing treatments, that is, if the dislocation is an old one. Direct traction may be used for all dislocations of the femur, just as for the shoulder, but the muscles are so strong that it is no small matter to overcome them, hence movements which take advantage of leverage are much more satisfactory. The formula for any dislocation of the hip may be worked out by noting the position of the head of the femur and then carrying the internal condyle so as to make the head retrace its course. When shortening or lengthening of the leg is noted, make sure that the iliac bones are even. A half-inch difference in the length of the legs may easily be accounted for by the action of the hip muscles. The pyriformis muscle may contract and compress the sciatic nerve in its course through the great sciatic foramen. Fig. 239 illustrates the movement to stretch the pyrifor- mis. The physician holds the pelvis to the table by press- ing on the anterior superior spine of the ilium. The thigh is then strongly adducted. Stretching the Sciatic Nerves. Sciatica is frequently successfully treated by relaxing the pyriformis, but the majority of cases require a stretching of the sciatic nerve, 512 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 246. Position for reducing tarsal subluxations. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 513 which is performed as in Fig. 238. The physician has great leverage in this movement. It stretches all the flexor group on the back of the thigh. The Calf Muscles. The calf muscles sometimes con- tract and make it difficult for the patient to get the heel to the floor. Fig. 240 illustrates the method of applying leverage to the case. Scientific Manipulation. Every group of muscles in the body can be relaxed by stretching them, hence if the student will study their attachments and the effects of their normal contraction, a series of movements can be devised to suit the condition. Learn anatomy in a prac- tical manner and a system of osteopathic movements will spring forth from the understanding mind of the student. The author has tried the plan of not demonstrating move- ments to students, but putting the whole attention to un- derstanding the conditions in the patient which require treatment. A study of the mechanical difficulties pre- sented and the comparison of these with the normal rela- tions, leads the student to apply anatomical knowledge in treatment. If the student understands the case, that is, realizes the significance of the points found by the physical diagnosis, he can be depended upon to apply a rational method of treatment. As soon as the student makes a movement in a certain manner in order to copy his in- structor, instead of basing it on his own understanding of the condition treated, he degenerates to mere empirical methods. Saphenous Opening. The circulation in the lower ex- tremity is frequently affected on the venous side by tension at the saphenous opening. Enlargement of the superficial veins of the leg, above a point three or four inches above the ankle, denotes obstruction to free blood flow in the long saphenous vein. Abduction and tension of the thigh will stretch the fascia forming the saphenous opening, then place the thigh in a semi-flexed position, as in Fig. 241, to facilitate direct manipulation of the tissues forming this 514 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 247. Distension of veins due to tricuspid insuf- ficiency. Varicose ulcers on both shins ana under maiieoli of both ankles were healed by strapping over the ulcers with strips of adhesive plaster. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 515 opening. The deep and superficial veins of the leg have little or no communication above a point about the junction of the lower and middle third of the leg. This applies especially to the long saphenous vein. Varicose veins on the feet or ankles may be drained by both superficial and deep veins, therefore, their existence in these locations may be due to visceral causes, even when there is no ob- struction to the saphenous opening. Popliteal Space. The popliteal space sometimes needs relaxation. This is performed by direct manipulation, as illustrated in Fig. 242. The position of the physician's hands in this illustration affect the upper portion of the popliteal space. By facing the patient the lower portion can be easily affected. The Semilunar Cartilages of the Knee. These carti- lages, which serve to form cup-like depressions for the condyles of the femur to rest in, on the superior articular surface of the tibia, may become slightly displaced and hence act as wedges to limit motion in the joint. Since they normally move with the condyles, it is probable that some slight ligamentous strain is primarily the cause of the change in position of a semilunar cartilage. The external semilune is the one most frequently affected. The reason for this probably is due to the fact that the internal con- dyle of the femur is longer than the external, hence in a movement, such as pedaling a bicycle, the extension of the joint is made with the knees rather wide apart. This tends to strain the external lateral ligament. The cartilage slips slightly forward and prevents either flexion or exten- sion. The joint remains in a semi-flexed position and is exquisitely painful. Some of these cases can be quickly relieved by having the patient sit, so that the operator can grasp the knee with both hands, as in Fig. 243. The op- erator's thumb makes careful pressure on the painful spot where the external semilune causes a little transverse ridge. By gently rotating the tibia and using a slight ef- fort to slide the tibia on the condyles, without producing 516 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY FIG. 248. Same case as the preceding illustration. No caput medusae present, thus showing that portal cir- culation is not seriously obstructed. 517 either flexion or extension, the semilune will tend to yield to the thumb pressure and resume its normal relations to the condyle. Since some swelling accompanies such an accident, it should not be expected that complete flexion, or extension, would be possible immediately after replace- ment of the semilune. Any trauma of a ligament is ac- companied by the swelling incident to normal repair. Paralysis of External Popliteal Nerve. One of the most frequent forms of peripheral paralysis involves the Peroneal or External Popliteal nerve. Its position, with re- lation to the fibula, subjects it to possible pressure, when one knee is crossed over the other. It is also subject to in- jury when traction is made on the leg, for a considerable time, as is frequently done in cases of hip joint injury or fracture of the femur. Surgeons realize the danger of mak- ing traction below the knee joint, but there are still enough of these peripheral paralyses, due to this cause, to make it evident that not all physicians realize the danger. This form of peripheral paralysis is characterized by ankle drop. In cases of Peroneal paralysis due to pressure, recovery is nearly complete in a few weeks. This seems to show FIG. 249. Illustration of typical varicose veins. 518 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY PIG. 250. Method of strapping with adhesive plaster to support varicose ulcer on the shin. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 519 that a slight edema exists in the sheath of the nerve at the point which suffered the traumatic pressure. In those cases due to extension of the leg, recovery is always problematical, because the traumatic pressure may have been produced by a fold of fascia. This is especially the case when the anterior tibial nerve is the only branch of the Peroneal, paralyzed. These cases need to be treated by semi-flexing the knee, so that deep digital manipulation, of all the soft tissues of the knee, will hasten absorption of the edema. Judging by some of the cases we have seen, the patients would have been in more capable condition with bony deformities, due to fractures, than with the paralyses, resulting from the efforts to maintain reduction of the fractures. These paralyses are, however, unavoida- ble in some cases, but recovery would be more rapid and certain if intelligent manipulation was used almost from the beginning of the cases. "Glucokinesis and Mobilisation." Many efforts have been made to develop a method of treating fractures, that will not only insure a reasonably perfect union but will avoid the serious sequelae incident to the use of casts, splints and extension apparatus. No single method of treatment is applicable to all forms of fractures, but there are certain principles, underlying the art of manipulation, which are applicable in the treatment of certain forms of fractures. The use of a form of massage, by Dr. Just Lucas-Championniere, in the treatment of fractures, is a new development in the art of manipulation. He calls his method "glucokinesis," painless massage. It is so dif- ferent from massage, as generally understood by masseurs, that none but physicians, who understand the phenomena in tissues involved in fracture, can use it intelligently. It consists in stroking the injured part very gently, in the direction of venous circulation and the muscle fibers. This stroking is rhythmical and continuous for about fifteen or twenty minutes. The stroking is so gentle as to seem quite ineffective. The first principle is : "Never be afraid 520 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY of rubbing too gently, or of giving too small a dose of mobilisation ; always fear that the massage is too heavy and the movement too great." The result of this stroking is the relief of pain in the injured part and a coincident relaxation of the muscles involved in the fracture. This relaxation of muscles allows replacement of the fragments. Mobilisation consists of minute "doses" of passive move- ment in all of the joints above and below a fracture. The "dose" should cause no pain in the limb. The applica- tion of Prof. Lucas-Championniere's methods has been excellently described by Dr. James B. Mennell in his work on The Treatment of Fractures by Mobilisation and Mas- sage, MacMillan and Co. Pain in the Legs and Feet. Many cases complain of pain of variable character in the legs and feet. It is good practice to test the plantar arches in all such cases. Weak- ness of the longitudinal arch may not be evident except when the leg muscles are fatigued, therefore a plantar impression may not show any sagging. If no structural defect is apparent, it is safe to assume that weakness exists. The application of strips of adhesive, to parallel the suspected tendons, will give enough support to demon- strate whether the diagnosis is reasonably correct. Tarsal ligaments may be strained, or a tarsal bone become subluxated. The pain, incident to these conditions, is very acute. Subluxations are usually reduced by pas- sive movements, which merely tend to produce mobility in the tarsus as a whole. If this does not produce reduc- tion, it will be necessary to use thumb pressure over the prominent painful spot and then flex and extend the tar- sus with the other hand, so as to allow the pressure to be- come e'ffective. In any case of weak arch, or subluxated tarsal bone, it is advisable to use some means of passive support until the acute phases are past. Some cases will recover completely under the influence of voluntary exer- cises, while others cannot get along without support. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 521 Varicose Veins. The pain incident to varicose veins may be very severe. The first thing to determine is whether the varicosity is due to local or general condi- tions, i. e., whether there is involvment of one group of veins in a single extremity, or a general back pressure in all the veins of the body, due to a lesion in the right auriculo-ventricular valves, or muscular insufficiency. The varicosity due to pregnancy is in a class of its own. The veins on the shin lie so close to the surface that a very slight abrasion causes a varicose ulcer. The weight of the column of blood, in the long saphenous vein, serves to break down the granulations by which healing tends to take place. In such cases, whether due to local or systemic conditions, it is best to furnish the vein an artificial sup- port by strapping with strips of adhesive plaster directly over the ulcer and for a space of three inches on all sides of it. These strips should be about one inch wide and lapped on to each other about one-quarter inch, .as in Fig. 250. This artificial support should be left in place three days, then be stripped off, the ulcer cleansed and fresh adhesive applied. The amount of exudate will decrease rapidly under this treatment. Previous to the first dress- ing, there should be no application of irritating antisep- tics. The mechanical principle of supporting the wall of the vein is all that is necessary. The moisture of the ulcer will keep the adhesive from breaking the granulations as it is pulled off. As soon as the discharge from the ulcer ceases there is no necessity for removing the adhesive for many days. In the meantime such general help, as may be possible, should be given to overcome the conditions which predispose to a recurrence of the ulcer. 522 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY CHAPTER XXIV. MANIPULATION FOR VASO-MOTOR NERVE EFFECTS. There are times when the physician desires to affect the amount of blood in the tissues of the head. There may be congestion of the nasal, pharyngeal and laryngeal mu- cosa, as during a hard "cold." After manipulating to re- lax the muscles of the neck and overcome any effects these may have had on the position of the cervical vertebrae, it is well to try to cause vaso-constrictor action by stimulat- ing nerve endings. Fig. 251 illustrates a method of stimu- lating deeply under the zygoma in the sigmoid notch of the inferior maxillary bone. When the patient opens his mouth, the physician places his finger over the depression below the zygoma and presses inward, at the same time making a vibratory movement of the finger. This affects the branches of Meckel's Ganglion and, through it, the nasal mucosa. It is a painful treatment, but the blood will often surge from the mucous tissues to the skin as a result of it. About the same effect is secured by using the move- ment illustrated in Fig. 252. While the patient's mouth is open, the physician places his thumbs on the bridge of the nose, and his fingers at the angles of the jaw. The tips of the little and ring fingers are pressed into the de- pression caused by the forward movement of the condyle of the jaw on the eminentia articularis. The physician forces the mouth shut while the patient opposes. The position of the tips of the little and ring fingers prevents the easy slipping of the condyles into the glenoid fossa. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 523 The sensory fibers around the condyle are intensely stim- ulated and frequently manifest it by spreading a flood of color over the face in front of the ear. This is also a pain- ful stimulation. It is highly probable that all movements of this character which are painful secure results by caus- ing activity of the dilator nerves to blood vessels in super- ficial tissues, thus depleting the blood in the congested area. A sharp pain may cause a sudden blanching, but it is followed by vaso-dilation. If it is difficult for the patient to breathe through the nostrils, press on the nasal bones, first on the right side, then left, then make a heavy pressure over the junction of the nasal and frontal bone with one thumb above the other. This movement is very pleasant to the patient, ordinarily. To carry off the venous blood, make a stroke from FIG. 251. Stimulation between the zygoma and the sigmoid notch of the inferior maxilla. 524 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY the inner canthus of the eye downward over the junction of the masseter muscle with the lower jaw, thence to the supraclavicular fossae. The Fifth Cranial Nerve. The fifth cranial nerve can be treated at its points of exit through the bones of the face. Fig. 253 illustrates the position of these points. A vibratory pressure over these points causes a dull but in- creasing pain. If the movement is made quickly and vig- orously, there will be evidence of a reaction in a flushed appearance. Inhibition of Suboccipital. When there is a high blood pressure in the head and the patient is suffering with headache it is possible to give great relief by steadily inhibiting in the suboccipital fossae and temples, as illus- FIG. 252. Stimulation by forcible closure of the mouth against resistance. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 525 trated by Fig. 254. All nervous conditions are greatly reduced by this movement. The inhibition reduces the number of sensory impressions, and lessens the tension of blood vessels all over the body. This inhibitory move- ment should be used in cases of epilepsy and delirium tre- mens during the excitable stages. Have an assistant in- hibit in the splanchnic area, thus causing a general reduc- tion of blood pressure in the superficial and deep tissues of the body and extremities. The blood is thus drawn away from the head, and the patient becomes quiet. To inhibit the transmission of impulses to the dia- phragm by the phrenic nerves, pressure should be made as in Fig. 255. The physician's fingers compress the phrenic nerve against the scalenus anticus. FIG. 253. Points of exit of divisions of the fifth cranial nerve. 526 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY The phrenic, pudic and pneumogastric are the only nerve trunks distributed in the body which can be easily compressed through soft tissue. Fig. 256 illustrates stim- ulation of the pneumogastric. The physician's fingers roll over the nerve trunk where it lies along the inner edge of the sterno-cleido-mastoid. The general tendency of an osteopathic treatment, which aims to relax the extensor muscles of the neck and trunk, is to reduce blood pressure. Cases which are char- acterized by high blood pressure are greatly benefited by relaxation of muscle tension, by means of gentle leverage. The use of heavy pressure movements is contraindicated, because they might occasion involuntary resistance by the patient and thus suddenly raise blood pressure to a dan- gerous degree. It is very probable that the extension and counter pressure movements we use to reduce subluxations, act also FIG. 254. Inhibition in the suboccipital fossa. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 527 as factors in changing blood pressure in localized visceral areas. Vaso-motor effects can be secured by various forms of stimulation applied to spinal areas. Counter irritation, cupping, heat or cold, concussion, or sudden pressure to FIG. 255. Inhibition of the phrenic nerves. Center for hiccough. 528 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY the point of producing a "click" in an arthrodial joint, all produce vaso-motor effects of various degrees. They all serve a useful purpose and tend to reinforce each other in some cases. FIG. 256. Stimulation of the pneumogastric nerves. PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 529 BIBLIOGRAPHY On Bone Setting Wharton P. Hood Theory of Osteopathy Riggs Physiology of Bodily Exercise La Grange Principles of Osteopathy Hulett Principles of Osteopathy Hazzard Practice of Osteopathy _ Hazzard Practice of Osteopathy McConnell and Teall Lateral Curvature of the Spine and Round Shoulders Lovett The Development of the Human Body McMurrich Technique Rigsby Autobiography _ A. T. Still Philosophy of Osteopathy A. T. Still Philosophy and Mechanical Principles of Osteopathy A. T. Still Osteopathy, Research and Practice A. T. Still Pain Schmidt Pulmonary Tuberculosis Pottinger Orthopedic Surgery Whitman Studies in the Osteopathic Sciences. Vols. I, II, III Burns The Integrative Action of the Nervous System...Sherrington Diagnosis and Treatment of Diseases of Women Crossen Immunity _ Citron Applied Anatomy Bardeleben 530 PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY Physiology of the Nervous System _Morot Text Book of Physiology Howell Treatment of Fractures by Mobilisation and Massage ~ - Mennell Spondylotherapy _ Abrams Hand Atlas of Human Anatomy Spalteholz Eye Strain in Health and Disease Ranney Abdominal Pain _ ; Maylard The Abdominal and Pelvic Brain .*.....Robinson Diseases of the Nervous System Resulting from Acci- dent and Injury Bailey Modernized Chiropractic Smith, Langworthy, Paxson Surgical Anatomy _ Campbell Clinical Anatomy _ :. Eisendrath A Manual of Medicine Allchin Manual of Physiology Stewart Kirke's Handbook of Physiology .'. Kirke Diseases of the Nervous System Mettler Biology, General and Medical McFarland Applied Anatomy Clarke Normal Histology Piersol Comparative Physiology and Morphology of Animals _ Le Conte Neurotic Disorders of Childhood Rachford Anatomy of the Central Nervous System in Man and in Vertebrates in General Edinger and Hall Bier's Hyperaemic Treatment Meyer, Schmieden Physiologic and Pathologic Chemistry Bunge Origin of Life _ Le Dantec Manual of Osteopathic Gynecology Woodall PRINCIPLES OF OSTEOPATHY 531 Deformities including Diseases of the Bones and Joints Tubby The Treatment of Fractures Scudder Principles of Surgery Nancrede Lectures on Rest and Pain .Hilton ARTICLES Rotary Lateral Curvature. No. 7, Vol. II of J. of A. O. A H. W. Forbes The Nature of a Subluxation. No. 5, Vol. I, J. of A. O. A Tasker How the Heart is Affected by Osteopathic Manipula- tions. No. 11, Vol. II, J. of A,. O. A Tasker Vertebral Articular Lesions. (Series begun in 1908) J. of A. O. A Forbes Auto-Protective and Recuperative Mechanism of the Body. No. 4, Vol. XI, J. of A. O. A E. S. Willard The Osteopathic Lesion. No. 8, Vol. IX, J. of A. O. A McConnell The Immediate Effects of Bony Lesions. No. 11, Vol. IX, J. of A. O. A Burns Examples of Functional Lesions. No. 9, Vol. X, T- of A. O. A H. F. Goetz Adaptation and Compensation. No. 3, Vol. Ill, West- ern Osteopath Tasker Backache. California State Journal of Medicine, June and July, 1909 C. M. Cooper A Consideration of the Pelvic Articulations from an Anatomical, Pathological and Clinical Standpoint. Boston Medical and Surgical Journal, May 18 and June 1, 1905 Goldthwait and Osgood INDEX NOTE Main chapter subjects are referred to in dark faced numerals. Page Abdomen 395 Acceleration 354 Adaptation 28, 332 Adaptation, Failure of 42 Adhesions, Synovial 372 Alignment and flexibility 385 Anaesthetic, inhibition 368 Anatomy 183 Angina pectoris 158 Ankylosis 493 Articulation, Atlo-axial 294 Costo-central 304 Costo-transverse 304 Dorso-lumbar 302 Lumbo-sacral 264, 266, 268 Occipito-atlantal 286 Sacro-iliac 269 Scapulo-humeral 502 Articulations, Ankylosis of 493 Arthrodial, enarthrodial 376 Sounds produced in 371 Structure of 285 Tarsal 520 Atlas, The 285, 479 B Back 239, 325, 379 Back, Inspection of the 45 Backache 311, 378 Blood 149 Bone-setting 374 Cardiac plexus 141 Caries 294, 319 Carpal subluxations ....375 Cartilages, Semilunar of knee 373 Cause and effect 33 Causes of disease 27 Causes of disease, Difference in belief as to 29 Cell life dependent on circula- tion 35 Cell relations 34 ^Center, Bladder 235 -Cardiac 154, 156, 158 Chills 227 vCilio-spinal 136, 223 Defecation 233 -'Gall bladder 229 x Heart 223 -Intestines 225, 227, 229 " Kidneys 233 ^Liver 225 Lung 220 ^Micturition 233 ' Osteopathic 194 Ovary 231 ^Parturition 233 ^Spleen 225 Stomach 225 Testes 231 Uterus 229 Vaso-motor 167 Cervical region, Affections of.... 66 Extension 474 Rotation 475 Chorea 358 Circulation 149 Circulation apparatus 151 Capillary 166 Cell life dependent on 35 Influence on 49 Clavicles 309, 471 Compensation 332 INDEX Page Compensation curvature 335 Conductivity 98 Contraction, Muscular 354 Control, Plurisegmental 1 10 Co-ordination, Segmental 50 Curvature, Compensatory 335 Lateral . 69, 408, 440 Development, Variations in 43 Diagnosis 195, 381, 386, 392, 493 Diagnosis, Backache 311 Extremities 493 Osteopathic 23 Physical 23, 185 Digastric 476 Disease, Causes of 27 Interpretation of phenomena of 29 Known causes of 30 symptoms 32 Dislocations 503 Dislocations, Elbow 505 Femur 509 of radius 506 Old 506 Dorsal region, Irritation in..67, 380 E Efficiency 28 Elbow, Dislocations 505 Embryology 88 Encysting, Power of 339 Environment, Favorable reac- tion to 30 Erector spinae 412 Examination, Position for 384 Extension 474 Extension, Spinal 250 Extremities 341, 400, 493 F Page Fatigue, Effect of 41, 357 Feet 342 Feet, Pain in 520 Femur, Dislocation of 509 Fever 122 Fever, Infectious 326 Flexion, Spinal 250 Fracture, Mobilisation 353, 519 Fulcrum, The use of 432 Function, Impairment of 361 and structure 39 Variations in ... . 27 Ganglia, Automatic visceral 148 Sympathetic 127 Ganglion, Meckel's 522 Superior cervical 205, 293 Gluco-kinesis and mobilisation..5l9 H Headache 132 Head's law 191 Healing, The true art of 39 Health 25 Health, Normal 28 Heart 153, 337 Herpes Zoster 187 Hiccough 213 Hilton's law 181 Hyoglossus 476 Hyoid bone 476 Hyperaemia 73, 170 Hyperaesthesia, Spinal. .59, 365, 392 Hypogastric plexus 146 Inefficiency 29 Inflammation, Serous mem- branes .328 Inhibition ... ....354 INDEX Page Inhibition, Dosage 360 Therapeutic 362 Innervation, Influence on 49 Inspection 114, 386 Integration, Segmental 103 Systems of 99 Irritability 97 Irritation, Mechanical 100 K Kidneys 338 Knee 183, 515 Kyphosis 413, 419, 422, 425, 427, 450, 451 Kyphosis, Lower dorsal 302 Larynx, Intrinsic muscles of 478 Latissimus dorsi, Manipulation of 406 Law of compensation 341 Head's 191 Hilton's 181, 362 Legs, Pain in 520 Lesion an objective symptom.... 57 as a cause 40 Causes of 41, 75 Characteristics of 40 Classes of 41, 56 Disease association 31 in diagnosis 76 integration 120 palpation 44 patterns 58 Persistence of 43 Secondary 41, 56 Sequence of 43 Spinal 82, 91, 450 Traumatic 47 Twelfth rib 407 Lesions, Autotoxemia in 120 Chemical causes of.... ... 42 Page Depth and extent of 119 Experimental 52 False 297 Functional fatigue : 112 Group 110 History of '. 400 Leverage 419, 448 Life, Tenacity of 31 Lordosis 416, 419 Lumbago 323 Lumbar region, Irritation in 68 Lumbo-sacral articulation 264, 266, 268 Lymph 149 M Malignant growths 322 Manipulation 133, 402 Manipulation, Back 379 Chiropractic 404 Conservative vs. radical 383 Corrective 434, 484 Dislocation 503 Dislocation of elbow 505 Dislocation, Old 506 Dorsal 380 Extension 478 External popliteal nerve 517 Fifth cranial nerve 524 General principles 483 Gluco-kinesis 403 Gluco-kinesis and mobilisation5l9 Head and neck 378, 419 Kyphosis 413, 422, 425, 427 Lordosis 416 Methods of procedure 404 Mobilisation 403 of adductor muscles of thigh. .509 of ankylosis 493 of atlas 479 of cervical region 471 of clavicle 471 of digastric 476 INDEX Page Manipulation of erector spinae 412 of extremities 493 of femur dislocation 509 of hyoglossus 476 of larynx 478 of latissimus dorsi 406 of mylo-hyoid 476 of pectoralis major 410 of phrenic nerve 525 of popliteal space 515 of pyriformis muscle 511 of quadratus lumborum..407, 411 of quadriceps extensor 509 of rhomboids 409 of rib subluxations 452 of sacro-iliac subluxations 461 of scaleni 473 of scapulo-humeral articula- tion 502 of serratus magnus 410 of splenius capitis et colli 421, 473 of sterno-cleido mastoid 472 of sterno-hyoid 477 of sterno-thyroid 477 of stylo-hyoid 476 of subluxations 443 Position for 489 Rigidity, cervical region 489 Rotation, cervical region 475 Saphenous opening 513 Scientific 513 Semilunar cartilages, knee 515 Stretching sciatic nerve 511 Suboccipital nerve 524 Swedish 402 Tarsal ligaments 520 Torsion and counter pressure..486 Traction 503 Varicose veins 521 Vaso-motor effects 522 Massage ....402 Page Meckel's ganglion 522 Medicine, Practice of 17 Preventive 31 Schools of 430 Membranes, Inflammation of serous 328 Mobilisation and gluco-kinesis..5l9 Motion, Loss of 54 Muscle, Crico-thyroid 478 Digastric 476 Erector spinae 412 Hyoglossus 476 Irritability of 97 Latissimus dorsi, Manipula- tion of 406 Mylo-hyoid 476 Pectoralis major 410 Pyriformis 51 1 Quadratus lumborum 407, 411 Quadriceps extensor 509 Rectus capitis anticus minor....292 Rectus lateralis 291 Rhomboids 409 Scaleni 473 Serratus magnus 410 Sphincter vaginae 237 Splenius capitis et colli. ...215, 421 Sterno-hyoid 477 Sterno-thyroid 477 Stylo-hyoid 476 Trapezius 215, 408 Muscles, Adductor of the thigh..509 Association of 92 Cervical 87 Developmental changes in 93 Nervous distribution to 184 of lower extremity 506 of the back 392 M-uscular contraction 299, 354 tension 59, 73, 75, 394 tone, Loss of 51 Mylo-hyoid 476 INDEX N Page Neck, Examination of 398 Manipulation of 378 Nerve bundle 101 cells, Central 86 fibres, Afferent and efferent.... 100 fibres, Intraspinal 101 Hypoglossal 205 Intercostal 189 Phrenic 213, 525 Pneumogastric....l54, 199, 472, 526 Posterior thoracic 78 Spinal accessory 213, 472 Splanchnic 138 tissue, Attributes of 355, 358 of Wrisburg 220 Nerves, B rachial 217 Cervical 197, 217 External popliteal 517 Fifth cranial 524 Pudic 526 Sciatic 51 1 Sensory 164 Suboccipital 524 Vaso-motor . 160 Nervous system 61, 97 Sympathetic 125 Neuralgia 61 Neurotic diathesis 358 Normal and abnormal 27 Variation of.... .. 28 Osteopathy 403 Osteopathy, Definition of 19 Founder of 18 Growth of 17 Name 25 Scope of 24 Pain Page .122, 311, 520 Pain, Colicy 329 Referred visceral 326 Palpation 23, 74, 296, 386, 453 Palpation of vertebral struc- tures 45 Paralysis agitans 358 Paraplegia 234, 322 Patterns, Reflex 331 Pectoralis major 410 Pelvic plexus 146 Pelvis 263 Pleurisy 58, 409 Plexus, Brachial 217, 503 Cardiac 141 Cervical 21 1 Hypogastric 146 Lumbar 235 Pelvic 146 Pulmonary 142 Sacral 235 Solar 144 Subsidiary 147 Poise 312 Popliteal space 515 Position for examination 384 Posture 323 Pott's disease 451 Pressure, Inhibitory effect of 359 Tenderness to 46 Principles, Application of.. ..431, 440 Corrective movements 483 Prostate gland 398 Pulmonary plexus 142 Pyriformis 511 Quadratus lumborum, Manipu- lation of 407, 411 Quadricep extensor 509 INDEX Page Rachitis 320 Radius, Dislocation of 506 Reactions, Intensity of 330 Protective 105, 121 Recovery, Natural 37 Rectum, Examination of 398 Recumbency, Effect of 68 Recuperative power, Inherent.... 38 Reflex patterns 331 subluxations 330 Reflexes 105, 114 Reflexes, Intensity of 213 Location of 330 Visceral 57 Region, Cervical 243, 471, 489 Cervical extension 474 Cervical rigidity 489 Dorsal 248, 255 Interscapular 135, 220 Lumbar 249, 259, 302 Resistence, A change of 33 Respiration, Nervous control of..306 Rest 189 Rest, Physiological 49 Rhomboids 409 Ribs, Examination of 304, 396 Rigidity 489 Rotation, Cervical region 474 Dorsal 440 Spinal , 250, 261 Sacral region, Irritation in 68 Sacro-iliac articulation 269 Saphenous opening 513 Scaleni 473 Scapula 219, 408 Sciatic nerve, Stretching 511 Secretion ....354 Segmental co-ordination 109 Segmentation 106 Page Segmentation of the body 76 of the spinal cord 101 Semilunar cartilages of knee 515 Sensation 117 Sensation, Reception of 109 Sensory nerves 164 Serous membranes, Inflamma- tion in 328 Serratus magnus 410 Shock '. 357 Skin 338 Solar plexus '. 144 Spinal alignment and flexibility..385 arthropathies 320 column 239, 333 cord 326 curvature 318 curves 264 curves, Normal 242 extension 250 flexion 242 hyperaesthesia ..59, 64, 378 irritation, Symptoms of 64 ligaments 239 nerves, Irritation of 60 rigidity 320 rotation 250, 316 treatment 60 Splanchnic nerves 138 Spondylitis deformans 320 Splenius capitis et colli 421, 473 Statics 312 Sterno-cleido-mastoid 472 Sterno-hyoid 477 Sterno-thyroid 477 Structure, Necessity for study of 54 Variations in 27 Stylo-hyoid 476 Subluxation, Atlas, 479 Carpal 375 Clavicle 471 Lateral 298, 443, 450 INDEX Page Subluxation Reduction of 443 Sacro-iliac 269, 316, 461 Tarsal 375, 520 Subluxations 283 Costal 307, 452 Innominate bones 461 Reflex 330 Suboccipital triangles 209 Subsidiary plexus 147 Surgery 24 Sympathetic, Ganglia of 70 nervous system 125 Symptoms, Objective 118 Subjective 59, 401 Page Trapezius 408, 471 Trauma 325 Treatment 85 Triangles, Suboccipital 209 Trophicity 98 Tumor 322 Typhoid spine 323 U Ulcer, Varicose 521 Unity, of the body 58 of the nervous system 99, 125 Tarsal subluxations 375 Tension, Arterial 152 Intracellular 35 Muscular 59 Testing alignment and flexibility 384 Therapeutics 173, 185 Osteopathic 24 Scientific 36 Thorax 335, 395 Tissue relations, Disturbed 38 Torsion 486 Toxemia 323 Traction, Femur dislocation 509 Vaso-motion 215 Vaso-motor nerves 160, 362, 522 Veins, Varicose 521 Vertebra, Fifth lumbar 263 Sixth cervical 481 Vertebrae, Cervical 295 Lower dorsal 302 Violence, Effect of 41 Viscera 192 Viscera, Plurisegmental control of 329 Visceral disturbance 63 ganglia 148 pain, Referred 326 Date Due CAT. NO. 23 233 PRINTED IN U.S.A. T198p 1916 Tasker. Principles of osteopathy UCI CCM LIBRARY